Skip to main content

Full text of "Fantasy & Science Fiction v013n01 (1957 07) (AK)"

See other formats


Sctertce  JtcHoM 


THE  MAqA!Z.)NE  Of 


THE  WIND 

BLOWS  FREE 

a no>velet 

by  CHAD  OLIVER 


35-  <t 

SR  c*  short  story 

by  Charles  Van  Daren 

C.  M.  Kornbluth 
Richard  Matheson 
'Avram  Davidson 


So  Big  ...we  had  to 

coin  a new  word  for  it 

* 


YOU'll  BE 

‘gocfied 

OUT  OF 
YOUR  SEAT! 

• 

Swcted 

OUT  OF 
YOUR  SKIN! 

• 

■puiilUd 

BY  THE 


SHEER 


TERROR 
OF  IT  ALL! 


’^NEWMENDOUS 
- So  New  - 
So  TREMENDOUS! 


PETER  PEGGIE 


GRAVES  • CASTLE 

MORRIS 

ANKRUM 

w'lh 

THOMAS  B.  HENRY 
THAN  WYENN 
JAMES  SEAY 


desperaiel/ 
fighting 
to  keep 
alive. . . 
to 

love! 


Produced  ond  Oirecfed  by 

BERT  1.  GORDON 

Screen  Play  by 

Fred  Freiberger  and  Lester 

An  AB‘PT  Picture 


At  Your  Favorite  Local  Theatre  Soon! 


An  important  message 
to  engineers 

from  Ford  Instrument  Co. 


New  opportunities  created  by  peace  and 
defense  projects  and  newly  appropriated 
government  contracts  make  room  note  for 
experienced  electronic  and  mechanical 
engineers  in  tliese  areas: 

Missile  Guidance 
Infra-red  Detection 
Nuclear  Power 
Radar  Tracking 
Complex  Computers 

Environment  is  creative 

Entire  projects  from  breadboard  to  final 
design  are  the  responsibility  of  one  group. 
You  watch  each  step  of  progress  in  the 
development  of  a new  idea  to  practical 
reality.  This  brings  out  the  best  in  you, 
and  you  can  be  sure  you'll  use  your  fullest 
talents.  FICo’s  environment  has  to  be  cre- 
ative, because  research  and  development 
is  our  business. 


at  FICo  is  a major  part  of  Ford  employ- 
ment policy,  intend^  to  attract  and  hold 
men  of  high  calibre. 

Here  are  a few  more  excellent  features 
of  FICo  employment: 

You  associate  with  engineers  with  na- 
tional reputation,  and  of  our  3000  em- 
ployees 600  are  in  engineering  activities. 
This  is  a company  small  enough  for  indi- 
vidual attention  atrd  large  enough  for 
broad  opportunities. 

Plants  and  cafeteria  are  air  conditioned. 
FICo  has  a pension  plan  without  cost  to 
the  employee.  There  are  unusually  liberal 
benefits  relative  to  sickness,  accident  and 
life  insurance,  hospitalization,  etc.  And 
employees  have  full  tuition  paid  for  re- 
lated studies  in  New  York’s  unexcelled 
graduate  education  facilities. 

We  invite  you  to  mail  the  below  cou- 
pon, submit  qualifications  in  person,  or 
send  your  resume  to  Philip  McCaffrey  at 
the  below  address.  All  applications  are 
treated  confidentially. 


Extra  benefits 

Employment  at  FICo  is  based  on  a defi- 
nite need  projected  years  into  the  future, 
which  means  we  offer  only  positions  of 
permanency.  Starting  salaries  are  above 
average,  and  the  secure  financial  system 


I 1 

I FORD  INSTRUMENT  COMPANY  l>$F-S57  { 

I 31-10  Thomson  Avo.,  long  (stand  City  t,  N.  Y.  | 

I Gentlemen:  Please  send  me  full  information  | 

I about  engineering  opportunities  at  FICo.  i 

I Mo****  - - I 

I Arlt<r— 

. Company  | 

[ Po«A*io«  • 


'This  is  a company  of  engineers" 


says  Raymond  Jahn, 
President  of  Ford  In- 
trument  Company  and. 
himself  an  engineer. 
Our  promotion  policy 
shows  a ready  recog- 
nition of  ability  and 
Initiative. 


FORD 

INSTRUMENT 


CO. 


DIVISION  OF  SPERRY  RAND  CORP. 
3MI  Tbiasii  Avilit,  Ling  liliiA  City,  1,  N.  T. 


TH  E MAqAZINt  OF 


The  Wind  Blows  Free  (novelet)  by  chad  Oliver  3 

MS.  Found  in  a Chinese  Fortune  Cookie 


by  C.  M.  KORNBLUTH 

26 

Your  Ghost  Will  Walk 

by  ROBERT  F.  YOUNG 

37 

A Trick  or  Two 

by  JOHN  NOVOTNY 

46 

The  Unfortunate  Topologist  (verse)  by  s.  d.  gottesman 

52 

Life  Cycle 

by  POUL  ANDERSON 

53 

Sumnifcrland 

by  AVRAM  DAVIDSON 

69 

The  Literate  Monster 

by  WILLIAM  CHAPMAN  WHITE 

74 

Eithne 

by  IDRIS  SEABRIGHT 

75 

You'll  Feel  Better  . . . 

by  CAROL  EMSHWILLER 

86 

Recommended  Reading  (a  department) 

by  ANTHONY  BOUCHER 

90 

SR 

by  CHARLES  VAN  DOREN 

95 

When  Jack  Smith  Fought  Old  Satan  (novelet) 

by  MARY-CARTER  ROBERTS  102 

The  Holiday  Man  by  richard  matheson  125 

"Coming  Next  Month"  appears  on  page  73 

COVER  PAINTING  BY  MEL  HUNTER 

- - - --  - - _ |_  - - --  - - 

Joseph  W.  Ferman,  publisher  Anthony  Boucher,  editor 

The  Magazine  of  fantasy  and  Science  Fiction,  Volume  IS,  No.  /,  Whole  No.  74,  JULY,  1957.  Published 
monthly  by  Fantasy  House,  Inc.,  at  a copy.  Annual  subscription,  $4.00  in  U.  S.  and  Possessions;  $5.00 
in  alt  other  countries.  Publication  office.  Concord,  N.  H.  General  offices,  527  Madison  Avenue,  New  York,  22, 
N.  Y.  Editorial  office,  2643  Dana  St.,  Ber/ieley  4,  Calif.  Entered  as  second  class  matter  at  the  Post  Office  at 

Concord,  N.  H.  under  tlie  Act  of  March  3,  1879.  Printed  in  U.  S.  A.  © 1957  by  Fantasy  House,  Inc.  All 

Tights,  including  translation  into  other  languages,  reserved.  Submissions  must  be  accompanied  by  stamped, 
self  addressed  envelopes;  the  Publisher  assumes  no  responsibility  for  return  of  unsolicited  manuscripts. 

/.  Francis  McComas,  advisory  editor;  Robert  P.  Mills,  managing  editor;  Gloria  Levitas,  assistant 
editor;  Constance  Di  Rienso,  executive  editorial  secretary;  Norma  Levine,  editorial  assistant; 
George  Salter,  art  editor 


There  are  few  more  stirringly,  imaginative  themes  in  science  fiction 
than  that  of  the  generations-ship — the  spaceship  whereby  man  may 
cross  the  light-years  separating  us  from  the  stars,  even  at  speeds  much 
less  than  that  of  light,  creating  a self-sufficient  microcosm  in  which  the 
great-great-  . . . -great-grandchildren  of  the  original  voyagers  may  at 
last  make  planet-fall.  So  great  a theme  is  never  exhausted,  even  after 
an  all-but-definitive  treatment  by  Heinlein.  Here  Chad  Oliver  consid- 
ers, not  the  technological  wonders  of  the  concept,  but  its  impact  upon 
the  character  of  one  man  named  Sam — the  effect  upon  him  of  life  in 
the  Ship  and,  in  turn,  his  effect  upon  the  Ship’s  very  existence. 


The  Wind  "^lows  Free 

by  CHAD  OLIVER 


Have  you  ever  heard,  with  your 
ears  or  with  your  soul,  the  far  wind 
that  stirs  the  world?  Have  you  ever 
felt  the  deep  beat  of  the  sea,  the  sea 
that  is  the  heart  of  the  Earth  ? 

Samuel  Kingsley  had  never 
known  these  things. 

That  may  have  been  his  trouble. 

Samuel  Kingsley  was  born  with  a 
fever  in  his  bones  and  a fire  in  his 
blood.  As  a baby,  he  was  difficult. 
His  parents  had  to  w'ork  to  keep 
their  initial  joy  from  changing  into 
impatient  anger.  Sam  screamed  his 
head  off,  he  fought  his  food,  he 
clawed  at  his  bed.  He  seldom  smiled, 
and  he  was  not  affectionate. 

He  was  bright  enough,  of  course, 
or  he  would  have  been  destroyed. 


His  childhood  was  little  better,  a 
stubborn  series  of  scrapes  and  bruises 
and  general  mayhem.  Sam  was  big 
for  his  age,  and  strong.  He  walked 
his  own  path  and  fought  discipline 
like  a wild  stallion.  He  had  no 
friends. 

Sam  was,  in  short,  a maverick.  He 
was  unbranded.  He  should  never 
have  happened  where  he  did,  and 
when  he  did.  But  he  was  there,  em- 
phatically there,  like  a burr  in  the 
hide  of  a long-complacent  animal. 

He  got  into  his  first  serious  trou- 
ble when  he  was  sixteen. 

It  was  the  day  of  his  first  big 
dance.  He  had  to  get  dressed  up  in 
his  best  synthetic  blue  suit,  which  he 
detested,  and  the  whole  thing  was 


3 


4 

very  formal  and  proper,  despite  the 
fact  that  there  were  only  twelve  boys 
and  girls  of  eligible  age.  The  girls 
were  poised  and  full  of  giggles,  and 
the  boys  were  shy,  big-footed  and 
gawky. 

Sam  liked  the  girls  fine,  but  danc- 
ing bored  him  stiff. 

And  he  wasn’t  shy. 

When  he  was  discovered  to  be  ab- 
sent from  the  dance,  and  it  was  no- 
ticed that  a girl  named  Susan  Merrill 
was  also  missing,  the  police  were 
called.  They  found  the  two  young- 
sters in  one  of  the  dark  forbidden 
corridors.  Susan,  a blonde  of  pleas- 
ant proportions  for  her  age,  was  un- 
hurt but  hysterical.  Sam  was  defiant. 

He  knew  that  he  had  broken  not 
one  law  but  two.  The  black  tunnels, 
those  mysterious  caves  that  bur- 
rowed into  the  hidden  recesses  of 
the  Ship,  were  taboo  except  to  older 
crewmen.  And  it  was  unheard-of  for 
a boy  and  a girl  to  be  alone  to- 
gether before  they  were  married. 

Sam  didn’t  care.  He  had  acted  on 
impulse  and  had  no  regrets. 

Because  he  was  so  young,  and  be- 
cause the  Council  still  did  not  know 
quite  what  to  make  of  him,  Sam 
got  off  the  hook  with  a very  light 
sentence.  He  was  confined  to  his 
house  for  a solid  year,  and  denied 
all  privileges.  His  parents  made  it  as 
rough  on  him  as  they  could,  but  he 
was  used  to  that. 

He  did  his  lessons  contemptuous- 
ly. When  he  could  sneak  out  at  night, 
he  did  so.  The  lights  were  low  at 
night,  and  he  could  prowl  the  black 


FANTASY  AND  SCIENCE  FICTION 

caves  all  the  way  to  the  locked  doors 
that  sealed  the  people  from  the  rest 
of  the  Ship.  If  he  was  unable  to  get 
out  of  the  house,  he  read  books  he 
had  stolen.  Like  most  boys,  he  liked 
best  the  ones  he  was  not  supposed 
to  read. 

Sam  liked  sex  in  his  books,  be- 
cause he  was  healthy  and  had  a nor- 
mal curiosity.  And  something  in  him 
responded  to  stories  of  rebels,  to 
tales  of  men  who  struck  out  on 
their  own.  He  dreamed  of  clipper 
ships,  their  sails  taut  against  the 
wind.  He  dreamed  of  setting  out 
into  a green  wilderness,  with  only  a 
gun  for  company. 

There  were  no  seas  on  the  Ship. 

There  was  no  wilderness. 

And  he  had  been  taught  that  guns 
were  evil.  Not  as  evil,  perhaps,  as 
that  greater  evil  no  one  talked  about, 
but  evil  nonetheless. 

At  night,  lying  in  his  bed,  he 
would  slam  his  big  fist  into  the  plas- 
tic of  his  wall  in  an  agony  of  frus- 
tration and  bitterness,  slam  it  until 
the  blood  smeared  his  knuckles  and 
he  could  taste  it  in  his  mouth. 

He  knew  tears,  and  the  terrible 
loneliness  of  a boy  who  was  out  of 
step.  No  one  ever  heard  him  sob- 
bing into  the  coldness  and  the  si- 
lence of  the  long  nights,  and  no 
one  would  have  understood. 

By  his  eighteenth  year,  Sam  had 
grown  big  and  raw-boned.  Even  his 
size  was  against  him.  He  stood  a 
rangy  six-foot-four,  and  weighed  bet- 
ter than  two  hundred  pounds.  His 


THE  WIND  BLOWS  FREE 


5 


hair  was  black  and  untidy,  and  his 
eyes  were  dark.  He  was  not  a hand- 
some man,  but  he  had  a strength  in 
him,  a power  you  could  feel. 

Sam  was  marked  by  his  body.  At 
eighteen,  he  was  by  far  the  biggest 
man  on  the  Ship.  He  stood  out  like 
a pine  in  a forest  of  ferns,  and  he 
accentuated  the  difference  by  walk- 
ing proudly  erect,  with  his  head 
thrown  back. 

He  was  a solitary  animal,  and 
therefore  suspect.  He  was  lonely,  a 
man  born  out  of  his  time,  but  he 
made  no  advances  to  others. 

Since  he  was  eighteen,  and  legally 
an  adult,  he  had  to  take  part  in  the 
annual  observance  of  Heritage  Day, 
on  the  eighth  of  February. 

Bob  Thomas  came  to  get  him. 

Bob  was  the  natural  leader  of  his 
age-group.  He  was  a pleasant-look- 
ing  boy,  with  an  easy  manner  and 
an  unforced  politeness  that  endeared 
him  to  his  elders.  He  was  the  sort 
that  accepted  life  as  he  found  it, 
growing  up  to  embody  the  ideals 
and  traditions  of  his  culture.  He 
would  have  done  well  in  Greece,  or 
in  Rome,  or  in  England  in  her  days 
of  glory.  He  did  well  on  the  Ship. 
In  time,  he  would  make  the  Control 
Room.  It  was  as  inevitable  for  him 
as  breathing. 

“Ready  for  the  big  deal,  Sam.?” 

“Sure.” 

“We’ll  pick  up  the  others  and  get 
on  down  to  the  Show,  okay.?  I think 
we  ought  to  be  a little  early;  shows 
the  big  boys  we’re  on  the  ball.” 

“OK,  ^b.”  Sam  found  it  impos- 


sible to  dislike  Bob,  although  hate 
came  easily  to  him.  Bob  was  inde- 
pendent enough  to  be  a man  in  his 
right,  but  he  kept  his  independence 
within  approved  bounds.  He  even 
had  a sense  of  humor.  And  Bob  was 
big  enough  to  put  up  a scrap.  Sam 
respected  strength  as  he  respected 
few  other  things.  He  and  Bob  had 
fought  it  out  once,  and  Sam  had 
been  hard  pressed  to  win.  Much  to 
his  surprise.  Bob  had  not  reported 
him,  and  had  even  lied  about  the 
bruises  on  his  face. 

As  a matter  of  fact.  Bob  was  the 
closest  thing  to  a friend  he  had  ever 
had.  There  had  been  a few  girls, 
but  that  was  different. 

They  walked  down  the  street,  ac- 
tually a sort  of  catwalk,  past  the 
rows  of  identical  cabins  that  people 
called  houses.  Their  footsteps  echoed 
hollowly  in  the  great  chamber. 
Above  and  below  them,  huge  metal 
girders  spanned  the  belly  of  the 
Ship.  The  slope  of  the  Ship’s  gray 
walls  was  their  heaven  and  their 
earth,  as  though  they  lived  inside  a 
vast  bowl.  Branching  off  from  the 
main  street,  smaller  catwalks  led  to 
dark  passages — corridors  to  the  Con- 
trol Room,  to  the  engine  room,  the 
hydroponics  chamber.  Some  of  them 
even  went  Outside,  or  so  it  was 
rumored.  Only  the  specially  selected 
members  of  the  Crew  could  use  any 
of  these  passages;  there  were  others 
that  were  taboo  to  all.  And  there 
were  legends,  myths,  about  things 
that  lived  in  some  of  those  black 
caves.  ... 


6 

The  Show  was  in  the  central 
square.  It  was  a perfectly  ordinary 
tri-di  theater,  and  today  it  was  even 
more  solemn  than  usual.  Men  in 
full-dress  uniforms  stood  in  a double 
column  through  which  they  had  to 
march.  The  priest  blessed  them  be- 
fore they  took  their  seats.  Patriotic 
music  flowed  from  the  speakers. 

It  was  all  fairly  impressive,  Sam 
supposed,  but  he  was  not  moved. 
Of  course,  this  was  the  first  time  he 
had  been  permitted  inside  the  Show 
on  Heritage  Day,  but  he  expected 
nothing  more  than  a mild  anticli- 
max. After  all,  it  was  no  secret  what 
went  on  in  there.  He  had  had  it 
drummed  into  him  as  far  back  as 
he  could  remember. 

Still,  it  ought  to  be  more  inter- 
esting than  the  usual  pallid  fare. 

He  took  his  seat  in  the  front  row 
with  the  others  of  his  age-group. 
Bob  had  the  aisle  seat,  of  course, 
and  Sam  found  himself  next  to  Su- 
san Merrill.  He  grinned  at  her 
broadly  and  she  flushed  and  kept 
her  eyes  on  the  screen. 

There  were  blessings  and  speeches 
galore.  Even  old  Captain  Fondren 
made  a speech,  and  the  new  Navi- 
gator was  presented  to  much  ap- 
plause. 

Sam  endured  it  all. 

Then  the  lights  dimmed  and  the 
screen  glowed. 

The  character  of  tlie  music 
changed  sharply.  It  was  grim, 
threatening,  with  an  insistent  beat 
that  thumped  you  in  the  chest. 

Sam  was  suddenly  conscious  that 


FANTASY  AND  SCIENCE  FICTION 

he  was  very  close  to  the  screen. 

In  spite  of  himself,  he  tensed,  wait- 
ing. 

The  palms  of  his  hands  began  to 
sweat. 

It  started  with  a vicious  abrupt- 
ness, slamming  him  back  into  his 
seat. 

Sound  that  was  more  than  sound, 
sound  that  tore  at  you  with  a solid 
physical  impact.  Light  that  was  more 
than  light,  light  that  seared  your  eye- 
balls with  a flash  that  mocked  the 
sun. 

Sam  screamed  with  the  rest,  and 
his  voice  was  less  than  nothing.  He 
closed  his  eyes,  and  the  brilliance 
hammered  through  his  eyelids.  He 
trembled  violently.  He  had  no  mind, 
no  spirit,  no  personality.  He  wasn’t 
Sam  Kingsley,  he  wasn’t  anybody. 
He  was  just  a spot  of  horror  in  a 
maelstrom  of  violence,  trying  to 
hang  on,  trying  to  ride  it  out. 

The  ripping,  screeching  roar 
ceased. 

The  dead  silence  flowed  in  with  a 
shock  of  its  own. 

Sam  opened  his  eyes.  At  first,  he 
couldn’t  see.  There  was  only  a voice, 
speaking  into  the  emptiness. 

The  voice  said:  This  is  Earth.  This 
was  your  planet.  Look,  M it  now. 

Sam  looked,  his  heart  thudding 
like  a wild  thing  in  his  chest. 

He  saw  desolation,  and  death,  and 
worse  than  death.  He  saw  great  ci- 
ties gutted,  their  buildings  shattered, 
their  streets  ripped  like  tissue  paper. 
Black  windows  stared  at  him  with 


THE  WIND  BLOWS  FREE 


7 


cold  stpnc  eyes.  A few  figures  that 
might  have  been  human  stumbled 
through  the  ruins,  clawing  at  their 
faces,  their  shredded  clothes,  their 
blistered  bodies. 

He  saw  a land  that  had  been 
green,  and  was  green  no  more.  A 
sere,  scorched  desert  where  nothing 
lived,  where  the  very  idea  of  life 
was  blasphemy.  No  trees,  no  water, 
no  crops. 

Nothing. 

A red  sun  glared  in  a murky  sky. 

He  saw  people.  He  saw  men, 
women,  and  children:  all  dead  or 
dying.  A man,  his  naked  body  swol- 
len with  blisters,  leaping  into  a swim- 
ming pool,  holding  himself  under, 
gulping  at  the  water  like  a fish  from 
a nightmare  sea.  A blind  woman 
sitting  in  what  had  once  been  an 
automobile,  trying  to  feed  a baby 
that  could  no  longer  move. 

Sam  could  not  watch  it  all.  He 
was  sick  and  dizzy.  He  could  not 
think. 

The  voice  was  still  speaking: 
This  is  what  a war  did  to  your 
world.  This  is  what  hydrogen  bombs 
and  cobalt  bombs  and  germ  bombs 
did  to  your  world.  T his  is  what  peo- 
ple like  you  did  to  their  own  world 
when  they  couldn’t  grow  up  in  time. 

There  was  more. 

There  was  enough  so  that  it 
rammed  its  message  into  your  in- 
sides. No  man  could  sit  through  this 
and  ever  forget  it.  Sam  felt  himself 
scaled  down  to  size,  and  he  dis- 
covered that  there  were  bigger 
things  than  Sam  Kingsley  in  the  uni- 


verse. This  is  not  a finding  that  any 
young  man  makes  with  pleasure, 
and  it  was  doubly  difficult  for  Sam. 

But  you  cannot  argue  with  obliter- 
ation. 

The  voice  said:  These  are  the  oth- 
er planets  that  make  up  your  solar 
system.  These  are  the  worlds  we 
explored  before  the  end  came.  These 
are  the  worlds  we  could  reach. 

Sam  knew  of  these  worlds,  knew 
them  from  the  history  books.  But 
he  saw  them  now  as  though  for  the 
first  time,  saw  them  through  a mist 
of  despair. 

The  wind-whipped  seas  of  sand 
that  were  Mars. 

The  violet  desolation  that  was  Ve- 
nus. 

The  frozen  forbidding  hell  that 
was  Saturn. 

All  of  them. 

Hopeless. 

There  was  nowhere  in  our  solar 
system  that  could  shelter  us.  Our 
own  world  was  dying.  We  did  what 
we  could. 

We  built  the  Ships, 

The  Ships  filled  the  screen,  im- 
mense towers  of  metal,  standing  like 
colossal  silver  tombstones  in  the 
graveyard  of  the  world.  Of  course, 
most  of  them  had  been  built  long 
before  the  last  poisoning  of  the 
Earth.  They  had  been  designed  for 
man’s  greatest  adventure,  the  explor- 
ation of  the  stars.  They  were  not 
fundamentally  different  from  the 
spaceships  that  had  touched  down 
on  the  planets  of  the  solar  system. 
Unhappily,  no  fastcr-than-light  drive 


8 


FANTASY  AND  SCIENCE  FICTION 


had  been  invented,  in  the  nick  of 
time  or  otherwise,  and  although 
men  were  working  on  the  secrets  of 
prolonged  suspended  animation,  this 
had  not  as  yet  proved  practical. 

In  any  event,  the  problem  was 
academic. 

The  Ships  had  to  go. 

They  were  planned  to  be  entirely 
self-sufficient.  Green  plants  in  great 
hydroponic  tanks  provided  the  air, 
synthetic  foods  nourished  in  chemi- 
cal vats  supplied  the  means  of  sup- 
port, and  an  entire  Ship  formed  a 
balanced  ecological  system  that 
would  maintain  life  for  generations 
— provided  the  population  remained 
stable. 

To  Sam,  it  was  a strange  thing 
indeed  to  see  a Ship  from  the  out- 
side. The  Ship  had  always  been  a 
curved  horizon  of  gray  metal  walls, 
a tangle  of  catwalks,  a cluster  of 
houses  and  tanks  and  sealed  corri- 
dors that  were  dark  caves  of  mys- 
tery. From  the  outside,  it  was  a 
thing  of  beauty,  but  not  the  home 
he  had  always  known. 

Where  sunlight  and  air  and  roll- 
ing land  surrounded  the  Ship  on  the 
screen,  there  was  now  only  the  star- 
dusted  infinity  of  space,  an  empti- 
ness more  hostile  to  life  than  the 
polluted  world  the  Ship  had  left  be- 
hind. Sam  had  never  seen  that  dark 
sea  he  sailed,  but  he  had  grown  up 
with  the  ever-present  knowledge  of 
its  existence.  For  the  people  of  the 
Ship,  the  Outside  was  death  itself. 
At  night,  when  the  lights  were  low, 
you  would  lie  in  your  bed  and  feel 


that  strangest  of  seas  lapping  at  the 
walls  of  your  room,  those  icy  waves 
seeping  into  your  head  and  your 
nerves  and  your  blood.  . . . 

The^  voice  said;  You  are  all  the 
passengers  on  a Ship.  You  who  hear 
my  voice  may  be  the  only  human 
beings  left;  each  Ship  follows  a dif- 
ferent course.  It  may  ta\e  centuries 
before  you  reach  a world  you  can 
live  on,  circling  a sun  I cannot  even 
imagine.  You  may  never  find  it.  But 
remember  your  Heritage!  Remem- 
ber that  you  are  men,  and  remember 
what  happened  to  men  on  Earth! 
You  must  begin  again,  you  children 
of  Earth.  And  you  must  be  careful, 
you  must  be  wise.  If  ever  you  find 
hate  in  your  hearts,  remember,  re- 
member . . . 

And  it  happened  again. 

The  light  that  was  beyond  light, 
the  blasting  roar  that  was  a crazed 
river  of  sound.  The  twisted  cities, 
the  poisoned  air,  the  shrieks  of  the 
ruined  and  the  maimed  . . . 

The  screen  darkened. 

The  lights  in  the  Show  came  on 
again. 

There  was  a terrible  silence,  for 
what  was  there  to  say?  Sam  kept  his 
eyes  straight  ahead,  afraid  somehow 
to  look  around  him. 

Captain  Fondren  walked  up  to 
the  stage,  his  body  bent  with  years, 
his  hair  gray  and  lifeless. 

“This  is  your  Heritage,”  he  said 
slowly,  speaking  the  ancient  ritual. 
“We  all  have  a sacred  trust  to  pre- 
serve what  we  can.  All  who  hear  my 
voice  are  adults,  members  of  the 


THE  WIND  BLOWS  FREE 


9 


people.  You  will  conduct  yourselves 
accordingly  throughout  your  lives. 
We  dare  not  fail.  It  is  my  duty  to  in- 
form you  that  this  Ship  has  now 
been  in  space  for  three  hundred  and 
ninety-seven  years.  I ask  you  to  join 
me  in  prayer.” 

He  paused,  his  old  eyes  looking 
far  beyond  the  Ship. 

"The  Lord  is  my  shepherd  . . .” 

The  ancient  words  filled  the  cham- 
ber. It  was  one  of  those  rare  mo- 
ments when  mumbled  phrases  and 
familiar  rituals  suddenly  become 
charged  with  meaning.  The  words 
were  strong  words,  but  Sam  could 
hardly  hear  them. 

Three  hundred  and  ninety-seven 
years,  he  thought.  T hree , hundred 
and  ninety-seven  years. 

If  they  had  not  found  what  they 
sought  in  all  that  time,  they  would 
never  find  it. 

The  voyage  would  never  end. 

The  Ship  was  all  there  was. 

Sam  was  impressed  by  Heritage 
Day,  impressed  and  scared.  For  the 
first  time  in  his  life,  he  began  to 
understand  the  Ship  and  the  people 
who  lived  in  it. 

His  people  were  a frightened  peo- 
ple, a refugee  people.  They  were  con- 
servative and  cautious  because  they 
were  trying  to  survive.  They  were 
existing  in  a kind  of  cultural  sus- 
pended animation,  just  hanging  on 
between  disaster  and  a new  begin- 
ning. 

The  words  of  his  parents  meant  a 
little  more  now. 


"Sam,  Sam,  why  can’t  you  be  like 
the  other  little  boys?  Why  do  you 
always  want  to  be  getting  into  trou- 
ble? Now,  do  your  homework  and 
we’ll  have  a nice  synthesteak  for  you 
when  you’re  through!’  That  was 
Mom,  a colorless,  shapeless  woman, 
going  through  the  motions  of  life 
without  ever  really  living. 

And  Dad,  a big  man  like  Sam, 
somehow  tragic,  somehow  defeated 
before  he  had  ever  gone  into  battle. 
“You  can’t  change  the  world,  son. 
The  rules  are  there  for  a reason. 
You’ve  got  to  do  your  part,  son, 
whether  you  like  it  or  not.” 

Sam  tried. 

He  told  himself  that  he  had  been 
a fool.  He  was  to  live  in  the  Ship, 
and  he  had  only  one  life  to  live.  Who 
was  he  to  think  he  was  better  than 
other  people? 

He  was  assigned  work  in  the  main 
hydroponics  chamber,  and  he 
learned  his  job  dutifully.  He  forced 
himself  to  be  interested  in  the  grow- 
ing plants  and  in  the  chemical  sea 
in  which  they  grew.  He  regulated 
the  sun  lamps  and  adjusted  the 
chemical  flows  with  precision.  He 
grew  to  like  the  fresh  air  of  the 
chamber  and  looked  forward  to  go- 
ing to  work  every  morning.  At  least, 
the  hydroponics  chamber  was  green, 
it  was  alive.  The  dead  air  piped  in 
from  the  rest  of' the  Ship  depressed 
him,  and  going  home  at  night  was 
not  pleasant. 

And  yet,  Sam  was  not  happy.  He 
tried  to  be  like  the  others,  but  he 
found  no  magic  switch  that  would 


10 

shut  off  his  mind.  If  only  the  air 
would  move  more,  if  only  it  would 
flow  in  something  different  from  its 
orderly,  measured  channels!  If  only 
the  wind  would  blow,  if  only  he 
could  have  clouds  and  storms  and 
rivers  of  rain! 

Sam  still  dreamed  at  night,  and 
that  was  fatal. 

He  did  not  marry,  and  that  added 
to  his  discontent.  There  were  times 
when  his  body  seethed  as  though 
with  fever,  times  when  the  thoughts 
of  women  were  like  a sickness  in 
his  stomach.  He  tried  to  fall  into 
what  the  people  called  love,  but  he 
could  not.  He  would  try  one  girl 
and  then  another,  and  each  time 
something  within  him  would  rebel. 

“Sam,  try  to  be  nice  lif^e  the  oth- 
ers. . . 

“Sam,  you  mustn’t  say  such  things, 
they’re  wicked.  . . 

“Sam,  you’re  so  silly.  . . ” 

For  five  years,  Sam  worked  in  the 
hydroponics  chamber  at  the  same 
job.  He  did  it  well.  He  did  it  better 
than  it  had  ever  been  done  before. 

But  he  was  not  promoted. 

No  one  ever  sounded  him  out  about 
joining  the  Crew,  not  even  Bob. 

The  other  men  of  his  own  age 
moved  on  up  the  scale.  Every  one  of 
them  was  a member  of  the  Crew. 
Sam  stayed  in  the  hydroponics  cham- 
ber, and  after  five  years  he  knew  he 
was  stuck  there  for  life.  The  Coun- 
cil didn’t  trust  him,  would  never 
trust  him.  His  crime  was  that  he 
was  different,  and  on  the  Ship  that 
was  the  worst  crime  of  all. 


FANTASY  AND  SCIENCE  FICTION 

One  evening,  when  he  was  work- 
ing late  with  the  plants,  he  looked 
up  to  see  Ralph  Holbrook  watching 
him.  Ralph  was  the  same  age  as 
Sam;  they  had  gone  through  the 
ceremony  of  Heritage  Day  togeth- 
er. Ralph  had  been  a timid  boy,  but 
he  was  cocky  now  in  his  new  uni- 
form. 

He  was  also  a little  drunk. 

“Still  at  it,  eh  Sam.?” 

“Looks  that  way.” 

“Like  your  work?” 

“Can’t  complain.” 

“You’d  better  like  it,  Sam  boy.” 

Sam  turned  and  faced  him. 
“Meaning?” 

“You  know  what  I mean!  You 
used  to  think  you  were  really  some- 
thing, didn’t  you?  Picking  on  every- 
body, swaggering  around  like  you 
owned  the  Ship.  Where  are  you  now, 
Sam  boy?  Where  are  you  now?” 

Sam  felt  the  old  anger  surging  up 
within  him.  He  clenched  his  big  fists, 
bowed  his  neck.  His  eyes  narrowed. 
“Take  it  easy,  Ralph.  I don’t  want  to 
hurt  you.” 

Ralph  laughed.  “Still  think  you’re 
tough,  Sam  boy?  Still  think  you  can 
be  a big  man  with  your  fists?  Come 
on,  Sami  Try  something!” 

Sam  took  a step  forward,  his  heart 
pounding.  He  could  beat  Ralph  to  a 
pulp,  and  he  knew  it. 

But  he  stopped. 

Striking  a member  of  the  Crew? 

He  didn’t  dare. 

“Run  along,  Ralph,”  he  said  qui- 
etly. “Mommy’s  probably  waiting  up 
for  you,” 


THE  WINO  BLOWS  FREE 


11 


Ralph  Holbrook  stepped  in  and 
slapped  his  face  with  the  palm  of 
his  hand. 

Sam  didn’t  move. 

Ralph  laughed  again,  turned,  and 
walked  proudly  out  of  the  chamber. 

Sam’s  face  was  expressionless. 

He  turned  back  to  his  work,  did 
what  he  had  to  do,  and  left  the  hy- 
droponics room.  The  dead  air 
clogged  his  nostrils  as  he  walked. 

There  was  no  outward  sign  that 
anything  had  changed.  He  was  just 
the  same  Sam  Kingsley,  big  and 
awkward  and  alone,  walking  home 
from  work,  his  footsteps  trailing 
him  with  empty  echoes. 

But  Sam  had  been  pushed  over 
the  threshold. 

He  had  not  made  the  decision;  it 
had  been  made  for  him. 

The  gray  hopeless  monotony  of 
his  life  had  been  nibbling  away  at 
him  for  a long  time.  The  future 
stretched  away  before  him  like  a 
featureless  plain,  without  life,  with- 
out color,  without  purpose. 

He  was  caught  in  an  alien  world, 
trapped  in  a Ship  in  the  deeps  of 
space.  There  was  nothing  in  that 
orderly  world  for  him,  nothing  but 
an  existence  that  was  less  than  life. 

Very  well. 

He  had  tried  to  live  by  their  rules, 
and  had  failed. 

From  now  on,  he  would  make  his 
own  rules. 

His  step  quickened,  he  was  more 
alert  than  he  had  been  in  years.  All 
his  life  he  had  been  fascinated  by 
those  dark  tunnels  that  burrowed 


away  into  the  depths  of  the  Ship. 
Those  forbidden  caves  were  the  only 
frontiers  he  had.  High  officers  of  the 
Crew  were  the  only  people  who 
were  ever  permitted  in  most  of  them, 
and  it  was  clear  by  now  that  Sam 
would  never  be  a member  of  the 
Crew. 

He  had  no  real  plan.  He  simply 
knew  that  he  had  to  do  something, 
and  there  was  only  one  place  to 
start. 

He  ate  a hearty  meal  and  took  a 
nap. 

For  once,  his  sleep  was  untrou- 
bled. 

He  woke  up  four  hours  later, 
stuffed  his  pockets  with  food,  and 
tested  his  tubelight.  He  slipped  out 
of  the  house  into  the  gloom  of  the 
sleeping  Ship. 

His  feet  were  sure  beneath  him, 
and  there  was  nothing  clumsy  about 
him  now.  Like  a shadow,  he  moved 
across  a little-used  catwalk  that 
spanned  the  black  belly  of  the  Ship. 

A dark  tunnel  loomed  before  him. 

A faintly  glowing  sign  said:  au- 
thorized PERSONNEL  ONLY. 

Sam  smiled  and  stepped  into  the 
cave  of  night. 

He  took  off  his  shoes,  careful  to 
make  no  sounds  that  might  be  over- 
heard. It  was  pitch  dark  in  the  cor- 
ridor, but  he  was  afraid  to  use  his 
tubelight  yet.  Looking  back  over  his 
shoulder,  he  could  see  the  tunnel 
entrance  framed  by  the  Ship’s  night 
lights. 

He  moved  along  as  fast  as  he 


12 

dared,  the  fingers  of  his  left  hand 
lightly  touching  the  wall  to  guide 
him.  The  passage  seemed  straight  as 
a needle,  and  progress  was  not  dif- 
ficult. Nevertheless,  he  felt  a ner- 
vousness he  couldn’t  shake  off.  From 
his  earliest  childhood,  he  had  been 
told  never  to  go  into  one  of  those 
corridors,  told  of  horrible  things  that 
lurked  there,  waiting. 

He  fancied  that  he  was  old 
enough  now  to  discount  such  nur- 
sery tales,  but  just  the  same — 

Something  cold  hit  him  in  the 
face. 

Sam  ducked,  fell  flat  on  the  floor. 
He  stifled  a scream,  then  managed  a 
feeble  grin  as  he  realized  what  had 
happened.  He  had  run  into  a door. 
He  risked  the  light,  and  in  its  pen- 
cil beam  he  saw  that  the  door  was 
an  ordinary  metal  one,  sealing  off 
the  passage.  There  was  another  sign 
on  it:  KEEP  OUT. 

Sam  tried  the  door. 

It  was  unlocked. 

He  swung  it  open,  stepped 
through,  and  closed  it  again  behind 
him.  He  blinked  his  eyes.  This  tun- 
nel was  larger,  and  the  lights  were 
still  on.  It  had  a well-used  air  about 
it.  He  hesitated,  figuring  out  his 
position.  If  he  turned  left,  he  would 
wind  up  back  at  the  town  where  the 
people  lived.  If  he  turned  right,  he 
would  be  moving  toward  the  bow  of 
the  Ship,  toward  the  Control  Room. 

Sam  went  right. 

He  almost  ran  along,  his  shoes 
dangling  around  his  neck.  He  felt 
the  cold  sweat  on  his  body,  the  anx- 


FANTASY  AND  SCIENCE  FICTION 

ious  thudding  of  his  heart.  It  was  all 
so  simple,  so  like  a dream,  hurrying 
down  this  silent  passage,  the  Ship 
around  him  like  a monstrous  beast, 
waiting,  waiting  . , . 

What  would  they  do  to  him  if 
they  caught  him  here.^  He  tried 
not  to  think  about  it.  He  just  kept 
going  as  fast  as  he  could,  his  shoes 
bruising  his  chest,  the  tubelight 
gripped  in  his  hand  as  though  it 
were  a weapon — 

He  rounded  a turn,  and  stopped 
as  though  he  had  slammed  into  a 
wall.  He  held  his  breath,  his  lungs 
straining,  the  sweat  dripping  down 
his  sides  in  icy  streams. 

There  were  two  Crewmen  in  the 
corridor. 

It  was  a moment  frozen  in  time; 
it  seemed  to  go  on  forever.  The  two 
men  were  seated  at  a small  table, 
playing  cards.  One  man  was  facing 
Sam,  but  his  eyes  were  on  the  cards 
in  his  hand.  Just  beyond  the  table, 
there  was  a blaze  of  light  from  the 
open  door  of  the  Control  Room. 

Sam  stood  stock  still.  He  was 
afraid  to  move,  and  afraid  not  to 
move.  Almost  involuntarily,  he  re- 
treated back  around  the  turn.  He 
leaned  against  the  wall,  gasping  with 
the  effort  to  breathe  silently. 

Guards!  Here,  in  the  middle  of 
the  night.  Why.? 

Had  they  seen  him,  caught  just  a 
flicker  of  movement.?  They  would 
surely  have  spotted  him  if  they  had 
been  alert,  but  why  should  they  be 
alert.?  The  Ship  was  run  with  the 
precision  of  a clock;  people  were 


THE  WIND  BLOWS  FREE 


13 


never  where  they  shouldn’t  be, 
Still— 

He  tried  to  hold  his  breath,  tried 
to  listen. 

Voices. 

They  had  seen  him! 

“You’re  just  jumpy.  I didn’t  hear 
anythingl’ 

“1  tell  you,  there  was  something 
there  1’ 

“You  just  don’t  lil{e  your  hand!’ 
Laughter.  “Did  it  have  two  heads, 
or  three?’’ 

“OK,  OK.  Maybe  I’m  crazy.  But 
I’m  going  to  have  a loo\!’ 

A chair  scraped  across  a metallic 
floor. 

Run! 

Sam  sprinted  down  the  tunnel, 
heedless  of  the  noise,  as  fast  as  he 
could  go.  The  passage  was  hideous- 
ly straight,  there  was  no  place  to 
hide.  He  damned  himself  for  a fool, 
but  it  was  too  late  now.  If  he  could 
just  find  a pool  of  shadow,  a curve 
in  the  corridor,  anything — 

“Hey!’’ 

They  had  seen  him. 

Sam  redoubled  his  efforts.  He  de- 
termined not  to  panic.  He  mustn’t 
let  himself  go,  he  had  to  think  . . . 

The  guards  couldn’t  have  recog- 
nized him,  not  at  that  distance.  He 
could  outrun  them,  he  was  certain 
of  that.  If  he  could  get  back  to  that 
branching  passage,  he  could  slip  into 
the  sleeping  town  and  nobody  would 
ever  be  the  wiser. 

He  tossed  a glance  back  over  his 
shoulder,  and  his  heart  sank  at  what 
he  saw.  The  guards  had  stopped. 


and  were  using  a wall  phone  to  call 
ahead. 

Sam  slowed  his  pace,  fighting  for 
breath.  There  was  just  one  question 
he  had  to  answer:  could  he  reach 
that  cutoff  tunnel  before  the  Crew- 
men from  town  got  there  from  the 
other  end.?  He  wanted  to  think  that 
he  could,  but  he  had  to  .admit  that 
the  odds  were  against  it.  He  still 
had  too  far  to  go.  And  even  if  he 
did,  the  others  were  not  fools.  They 
would  know  about  that  cutoff, 
would  be  waiting  at  the  other  end. 

No,  that  was  out. 

There  was  only  one  thing  to  do, 
and  he  did  it. 

The  next  door  he  came  to,  he 
stopped.  He  fumbled  open  the  catch, 
swung  the  door  open,  and  slipped 
inside.  At  first,  he  was  blind;  there 
was  no  Ught  at  all.  He  switched  on 
his  tubelight,  closed  the  door,  and 
bolted  it  shut. 

He  made  himself  take  the  time  to 
put  on  his  shoes.  His  lungs  ached 
in  his  chest,  and  the  air  in  the  pas- 
sage was  stale  and  dead.  He  held 
the  light  in  front  of  him,  and  tried 
to  run.  He  soon  slowed  to  a fast 
walk. 

He  listened  carefully,  but  heard  no 
sounds  of  pursuit. 

The  corridor  was  different  from 
the  others.  It  seemed  older  somehow, 
and  he  had  the  eerie  feeling  that  no 
man  had  walked  these  floors  for  cen- 
turies. There  were  oil  slicks  on  the 
walls,  and  the  floor  was  gritty. 

Sam  kept  going. 

He  came  to  another  door  that 


14 

sealed  off  the  passage.  There  was  a 
sign  on  it,  but  it  was  streaked  and 
dirty;  he  couldn’t  read  it.  He  fum- 
bled the  catch  open,  shoved  on  the 
door. 

It  didn’t  open. 

Sam  bit  his  lip.  He  backed  off, 
took  a deep  breath,  and  threw  his 
shoulder  into  the  door.  It  gave  a 
little.  He  hit  it  again,  and  yet  again. 
It  swung  open  with  a rasping 
screech.  He  squeezed  through  and 
shut  it  again  behind  him.  The  bolt 
stuck  and  he  couldn’t  throw  it. 

He  flashed  the  light  around.  The 
corridor  was  smaller  now;  his  head 
almost  scraped  the  ceiling.  The  air 
was  so  flat  he  could  hardly  breathe 
it.  There  was  a layer  of  fine,  white 
dust  on  the  floor.  When  he  took  a 
step,  the  stuff  puffed  up  in  a cloud, 
stinging  his  eyes  and  his  nostrils. 

Sam  hesitated,  doubting  himself. 
He  could  still  go  back.  It  would  be 
rough,  but  they  probably  wouldn’t 
kill  him.  A little  conditioning  in  the 
surgery,  that  Was  all,  and  he  would 
be  the  most  placid  man  on  the  Ship. 
He  shuddered. 

There  was  a chance,  just  a chance, 
that  this  tunnel  might  eventually 
take  him  back  to  the  town,  back  to 
some  forgotten  entrance.  He  still  had 
perhaps  five  hours  before  morning, 
and  he  would  not  be  missed  until 
then. 

He  smiled  sourly.  He  had  only 
intended  to  do  a little  exploring  this 
first  night;  he  had  fully  expected  to 
be  back  at  work  tomorrow.  Now  he 
was  trapped,  cut  off,  and  he  would 


FANTASY  AND  SCIENCE  FICTION 

probably  never  be  able  to  go  back  to 
the  life  he  had  known. 

Well,  it  was  a small  loss. 

Sam  took  a bar  of  food  out  of  his 
pocket  and  wolfed  it  down.  He  felt 
a little  better,  but  he  was  desper- 
ately thirsty.  If  there  were  ever  a 
next  time,  he  would  bring  water  and 
forget  about  the  food. 

Of  course,  there  wasn’t  going  to 
be  any  next  time. 

Not  for  him. 

He  steadied  himself  and  flashed 
the  light  around  again.  There  was 
nothing  to  see.  The  black  cave 
stretched  away  as  far  as  the  light 
could  penetrate.  The  fine  dust  on 
the  floor  was  white,  like  the  snow 
he  had  seen  in  pictures. 

There  was  just  one  way  to  go. 

Sam  moved  forward  at  a fast  walk, 
the  dust  puffing  up  around  him  until 
he  could  hardly  see.  He  moved  on, 
his  mind  frozen  hard  against  the 
terror  that  seeped  in  around  him, 
walking  down  a silent  tunnel  to  no- 
where. 

He  kept  it  up  for  two  hours,  and 
then  he  couldn’t  take  it  any  longer. 
The  clouds  of  dust  hung  in  the  stale 
air  like  smoke,  and  his  throat  was 
raw  and  burning. 

He  had  seen  nothing. 

He  had  heard  nothing,  save  for 
the  pad-pad-pad  of  his  own  feet. 

The  tunnel  had  twisted  and 
curved  until  he  didn’t  have  the  faint- 
est idea  where  he  was.  There  had 
been  other  corridors  branching  off 
from  the  one  he  was  in,  but  he  had 


THE  WIND  BLOWS  FREE 


15 


been  afraid  to  try  them.  This  way, 
he  could  at  least  retrace  his  steps  if 
he  had  to.  He  had  a childish,  irra- 
tional fear  of  getting  lost,  even 
though  he  now  had  no  home  to  go 
back  to. 

But  he  had  to  get  out  of  the  dust. 

He  came  to  a door  in  the  wall  and 
forced  it  open.  He  went  through 
and  closed  it  quickly  behind  him.  He 
stood  very  still,  trying  not  to  stir  up 
the  dust. 

He  flashed  the  light  around  him. 

For  one  awful  moment,  he 
thought  all  the  stories  he  had  heard 
about  things  that  lived  in  the  for- . 
bidden  caves  were  true.  He  was  in  a 
room,  not  a tunnel,  and  the  walls 
were  lined  with  grotesque  figures — 
big  bulging  caricatures  of  men,  with 
glassy  faces  and  swollen  arms  and 
legs. 

But  the  things  were  not  alive. 

They  had  never  been  alive. 

Gingerly,  Sam  stepped  over  and 
touched  one.  It  was  made  of  some 
kind  of  smooth  stuff  that  reminded 
him  of  pottery,  and  it  glistened  dully 
in  the  light. 

How  long  had  it  been  since  this 
lost  chamber  had  seen  a light?  A 
hundred  years?  Two  hundred? 
Three  ? 

He  tapped  the  thing  with  his  fin- 
gernail. It  gave  off  only  a faint  click, 
although  he  knew  that  it  was  hollow. 
He  looked  around  him,  estimating 
rapidly.  There  must  have  been  at 
least  fifty  of  the  weird  figures  in  the 
chamber  with  him. 

He  knew  what  they  were,  and  it 


came  as  something  of  a shock  when 
he  realized  that  he  had  never  actu- 
ally seen  one  of  them  before.  * 

Spacesuits. 

He  was  in  a storeroom  full  of 
spacesuits. 

Strange,  half-formed  thoughts  be- 
gan to  well  up  in  his  mind.  He 
hardly  knew  what  to  make  of  them, 
and  for  a moment  he  feared  he  might 
be  going  mad.  Funny  I’ve  never  seen 
a spacesuit  before.  Funny  none  of 
us  were  given  training  in  their  use. 
Funny  no  one  has  ever  had  to  go 
Outside  for  repairs. 

Or  were  they  a carefully  guarded 
secret,  one  of  the  privileges  of  the 
Crew? 

But  what  was  all  this  secrecy  for, 
anyhow? 

The  puzzle  of  the  midnight  guards 
at  the  Control  Room  door  came 
back  to  plague  him.  Sure,  it  would- 
n’t do  to  have  women  and  kids  and 
questionable  characters  like  himself 
swarming  over  the  place,  getting  in 
the  way.  But  guards  in  the  middle  of 
the  night  seemed  a bit  excessive. 

What  were  they  hiding  in  the 
Control  Room  ? 

What  was  there  they  did  not  dare 
let  anyone  see  until  they  knew  they 
could  trust  him  absolutely  ? 

In  fact,  now  that  he  thought  about 
it,  there  was  one  question  that  might 
be  asked  about  a lot  of  things  on  the 
Ship. 

It  was  a deadly  question,  a ques- 
tion that  had  toppled  empires. 

Why? 

The  unvoiced  word  vibrated 


16 

against  his  brain,  and  there  was  no 
answer  to  it. 

He  looked  more  closely  at  the 
spacesuit  in  front  of  him.  The  thing 
had  a thin  film  of  dust  on  it.  He 
heaved  on  it,  turned  it  around.  There 
were  two  oxygen  tanks  clamped  to 
its  back.  He  found  the  switch  that 
activated  the  air  supply  and  threw 
it. 

Nothing  happened. 

He  picked  up  the  heavy  helmet, 
pressed  it  to  his  ear.  He  heard  noth- 
ing. He  sniffed  at  it,  and  the  air  was 
as  dead  as  ever.  There  was  no  oxy- 
gen coming  through. 

Surely,  in  a ship  in  space,  it  would 
only  be  common  sense  to  keep  the 
spacesuits  ready  for  action.  He  shook 
his  head.  Of  course,  there  must  be 
others  somewhere,  but  still — 

He  replaced  the  helmet  and 
chewed  on  another  food  bar.  He 
hated  to  go  back  into  the  dust-laden 
corridor,  but  he  couldn’t  stay  here. 
He  only  had  a few  hours  left  before 
the  working  day  began. 

A plan  ? 

He  had  no  plan.  He  thought 
vaguely  that  there  might  be  a life- 
boat of  some  sort  on  the  Ship,  but 
it  would  be  a pure  accident  if  he 
found  it.  Even  if  he  did  locate  it,  it 
would  do  him  no  good.  He  had  had 
no  training  in  operating  a ship  in 
space,  and  he  knew  enough  about 
spaceships  to  be  certain  that  he 
couldn’t  just  pile  into  one  and  go 
blasting  merrily  on  his  way. 

In  any  event,  where  could  he  go? 

One  notion  did  occur  to  him,  Un- 


F.\NTASY AND  SCIENCE  FICTION 

less  there  were  no  rhyme  or  reason 
at  all  to  the  plan  to  the  Ship,  there 
must  have  been  a purpose  in  locat- 
ing the  storeroom  where  it  was. 

And  there  was  just  one  such  pur- 
pose that  he  could  think  of. 

He  opened  the  door  again,  cough- 
ing as  the  dust' hit  him.  He  listened 
carefully,,  but  the  corridor  was  ut- 
terly silent.  It  stretched  on  before 
him,  a dead  and  lifeless  thing,  heavy 
with  the  weight  of  centuries. 

Sam  moved  on,  trying  not  to  give 
way  to  despair. 

Pad-pad-pad. 

The  fine  white  dust  swirled  and 
eddied  in  the  old,  stale  air. 

^ The  pencil  of  light  stabbed 
through  the  gloom,  becoming  a solid 
bar  of  silver  radiance  as  it  knifed 
through  the  glittering  clouds  of  dust. 

His  throat  Was  so  dry  he  could  no 
longer  swallow,  and  he  thought  of 
the  clean,  fresh,  air  of  the  hydropon- 
ics room  with  hopeless  longing. 

Pad-pad-pad, 

His  shoes  kicked  something  on  the 
floor,  and  he  looked  down.  There 
was  a heap  of  something  there,  white 
as  the  dust  that  covered  it. 

Bones. 

Bones,  and  a shrunken  skin  as 
dry  as  old  paper.  A human  skull 
gaped  at  him  with  something  that 
had  once  been  eyes.  He  knelt  and 
touched  the  thing.  The  skin  crum- 
bled at  the  slightest  pressure. 

Sam  looked  at  the  pitiful  rem- 
nants that  had  long  ago  walked  and 
breathed  and  loved.  He  felt  no  hor- 
ror, only  an  odd  surge  of  sym- 


THE  WIND  BLOWS  FREE 


17 


pathy  and  relief.  He  was  not  the 
first,  after  all!  He  was  not  the  only 
man  who  had  gotten  out  of  line. 

How  many  others  had  there  been? 

He  waved  a friendly  greeting  at 
the  pile  of  bones. 

/ wish  I could  have  \nown  you, 
he  thought.  We  might  have  done 
something,  together.  I might  have 
had  someone  to  tal\  to.  We  could 
have  been  friends,  you  and  I. 

He  stepped  over  the  bones,  being 
careful  not  to  disturb  them,  and 
walked  on. 

Within  half  an  hour,  he  came  to 
the  end  of  the  tunnel. 

A door  sealed  the  passage  before 
him,  but  this  was  no  ordinary  door. 
This  was  a massive  metal  thing  set 
into  the  very  side  of  the  Ship  itself. 

A faded  sign  read;  danger,  lock 

FOUR.  DANGER. 

Sam  stared  at  the  gleaming  metal. 
Involuntarily,  he  backed  away.  He 
had  come  to  the  end  of  his  world. 
Beyond  that  door,  he  knew,  was  the 
chamber  of  an  airlock.  And  on  the 
other  side  of  the  airlock— 

Outside. 

Deep  space. 

The  End. 

Sam  sat  down  in  the  dust,  his 
head  in  his  hands.  He  didn’t  try  to 
kid  himself.  He  was  through.  This 
was  all  there  w'as.  He  had  no  choice 
now.  He  could  only  retrace  his  steps 
along  that  dead  tunnel,  go  back  and 
give  himself  up. 

And  then.? 

He  shivered,  and  the  blood  ran 
cold  in  his  veins. 


No,  no.  I won't  give  up.  1 can’t. 
Not  yet. 

He  got  to  his  feet,  trembling. 

He  forced  himself  to  walk  up  to 
the  airlock  door.  He  reached  out 
and  touched  it.  It  felt  icy,  or  was 
that  just  his  imagination  ? 

He  wasn’t  thinking;  he  was  be- 
yond that.  He  only  knew  that  the 
Ship  and  everything  in  it  had  be- 
come horrible  to  him,  unbearable. 
Maybe  there  was  a workable  space- 
suit  inside  the  lock,  maybe  he  could 
go  Outside  and  drift  forever  among 
the  stars.  . . . 

It  would  be  a cleaner  death  than 
the  thing  that  waited  for  him  at  the 
other  end  of  the  tunnel. 

He  reached  out  and  gripped  the 
wheel  in  the  middle  of  the  lock. 

He  wrenched  it,  hard. 

It  stuck  at  first,  then  began  to  turn. 

Instantly,  the  corridor  exploded 
into  sound. 

A siren  screamed,  rising  and  fall- 
ing, screeching  through  the  Ship. 

The  noise  deafened  him  after  the 
hours  of  silence.  He  covered  his 
ears  and  the  siren  wailed  in  his 
brain. 

Oh  God,  they’ve  got  it  wired. 
They  know  where  1 am.  They’ll 
come  after  me,  kill  nte — 

Sam  didn’t  want  to  die.  Opening 
the  inner  door  of  the  airlock  had 
been  a gesture,  nothing  more.  Faced 
with  the  reality  of  death,  he  had  only 
one  instinctive  thought: 

Hide! 

Get  away! 

He  ran  back  into  the  tunnel. 


18 

He  ran  blindly,  bruising  himself 
against  the  walls,  a mindless  body 
fleeing  through  a nightmare  cave  of 
arid  white  clouds  and  the  insistent 
fury  of  the  siren’s  scream. 

With  numbing  abruptness,  Sam 
Kingsley  heard  a human  voice. 

Human  ? 

It  was  screeching  so  that  he  could 
hardly  tell,  screeching  a single  mad 
high-pitched  note  over  and  over 
again.  How  could  he  hear  it  over  the 
wail  of  the  siren  ? He  shook  his  head 
wildly,  like  an  animal. 

The  siren  had  stopped. 

He  stuffed  his  big  fist  into  his 
own  mouth,  biting  down  on  the 
knuckles.  The  screaming  voice  that 
might  have  been  human  turned  into 
a strangled  gurgle. 

It  was  his  own  voice. 

He  sobbed,  and  the  sound  was 
shatteringly  loud  in  the  sudden  si- 
lence. His  ears  were  ringing,  his  body 
was  wet  with  sweat.  The  dust  in  his 
lungs  made  him  cough,  but  he  didn’t 
have  enough  air  to  cough.  . . . 

He  stumbled  over  the  skeleton  in 
the  corridor,  scattering  the  bones.  He 
tried  to  keep  running,  but  he  was 
staggering  now. 

Hide! 

Get  away! 

If  he  could  just  reach  that  store- 
room, get  in  there  with  the  space- 
suits,  there  might  be  a chance,  a 
prayer — 

No. 

It  was  too  late. 

He  heard  voices  ahead  of  him  in 


FANTASY  AND  SCIENCE  FICTION 

the  corridor,  brushing  noises,  the 
tread  of  feet. 

“Kingsley!”  The  shout  was 
strangely  muffled.  “Kingsley!  We 
know  you’re  in  there!  Stay  where 
you  are.  Don’t  try  to  fight.  We  won’t 
hurt  you.  Kingsley!  Can  you  hear 
me?” 

Sam  collapsed  on  the  floor,  his  face 
in  the  dust,  gasping  for  breath.  He 
didn’t  answer,  he  couldn’t  answer. 
He  stayed  there  in  a huddle,  unable 
to  think,  beyond  even  despair,  the 
blood  roaring  in  his  ears. 

The  lights  in  the  ancient  tunnel 
came  on,  blinding  him,  searing 
whitely  into  his  brain. 

The  footsteps  came  closer,  closer. 

There.  He  saw  a shoe,  right  in 
front  of  his  eyes. 

Voices.  "Is  he  dead?’’  "No  such 
luchj’  "He’s  too  tough  to  hill.’’ 

A foot  nudged  his  battered  shoul- 
der, none  too  gently. 

"Come  on,  Sam  boy.  Get  up.” 

It  was  like  awakening  after  a too- 
long  sleep.  He  had  to  swim  back  to- 
ward awareness,  pulling  his  way 
through  dense  layers  of  stifling  fog. 
Every  bone  in  his  body  hurt.  He 
rolled  over  very  slowly. 

He  struggled  to  his  knees. 

The  foot  hit  him  again.  It  wasn’t 
a hard  kick,  but  it  didn’t  have  to  be. 
Sam  went  down,  his  mouth  in  the 
dust. 

"Come  on,  Sam  boy.  Stop  playing 
around.” 

"That’s  enough  of  that,  Ralph.  Let 
him  alone.” 


THE  WIND  BLOWS  FREE 


19 


Sam  tried  it  again.  He  got  to  his 
knees,  waited.  Nothing  happened. 
He  pulled  himself  erect.  His  vision 
cleared. 

There  were  three  of  them  in  the 
corridor  with  him.  They  were  all 
Crewmen,  and  they  all  had  face 
masks  on  to  protect  them  from  the 
dust.  He  recognized  Ralph  Hol- 
brook by  his  voice.  The  men  all  had 
canteens  clipped  to  their  belts. 

“Water,”  he  said.  His  voice  was  a 
dry  croak. 

The  men  were  ghostly  in  the  white 
light.  One  of  them  shook  his  head. 
“No  water,  Kingsley.  Not  until  we 
get  you  back  where  you  belong.  Af- 
ter that,  you  can  have  all  the  water 
you  want.” 

“Water,”  he  said  again.  His  throat 
was  on  fire. 

“Sorry,  Sam  boy.” 

Holbrook  moved  a little.  Sam 
could  hear  the  water  gurgling  in  his 
canteen. 

“Let’s  go,  Kingsley,”  said  the  man 
who  had  spoken  before.  He  sound- 
ed almost  bored.  “It’s  a long  walk 
back.” 

Sam  stared  at  the  canteen  on  Hol- 
brook’s belt  with  raw,  red  eyes.  He 
stood  absolutely  motionless,  and  then 
something  snapped  inside  him.  It 
was  hke  a dam  bursting,  a dam  he 
had  held  in  check  all  his  life.  His 
eyes  brightened,  and  a terrible  icy 
strength  flowed  into  his  exhausted 
body. 

He  stood  up  straight,  his  head  al- 
most touching  the  roof  of  the  tun- 
nel. His  huge  frame  seemed  to  swell 


until  he  filled  the  corridor.  His  hair 
was  white  with  dust,  but  his  eyes 
were  black  coals  in  the  light.  He 
clenched  his ' bleeding  fists  and  his 
lips  drew  back  from  his  teeth. 

Suddenly,  he  was  very  calm,  very 
sure. 

He  stood  there  like  a rock. 

He  was  through  running. 

And  then,  for  the  first  time  in  his 
life,  Sam  Kingsley  really  got  mad. 

He  took  one  quick  step  forward 
and  caught  Holbrook’s  tunic  in  his 
fist.  Holbrook’s  eyes  widened  and  a 
curious  noise  came  out  of  his  mouth. 
Sam  yanked,  and  the  fabric  ripped. 

Off  balance,  Holbrook  started  to 
fall  on  his  face. 

Sam  brought  his  beefy  right  fist 
up  from  his  knees  and  sent  it  crunch- 
ing into  Holbrook’s  jaw.  Something 
broke;  the  jaw  went  flabby.  Quite 
coldly,  Sam  drove  a piston  left  into 
Holbrook’s  stomach,  and  then 
caught  him  with  another  right  to  the 
side  of  the  head  as  the  man  crum- 
pled at  his  feet. 

Silently,  he  went  after  the  others. 

The  corridor  was  so  narrow  that 
the  two  Crewmen  got  in  each  oth- 
er’s way.  With  icy  deliberation,  Sam 
held  them  off  with  a jabbing  left 
hand,  throwing  his  right  with  merci- 
less precision. 

The  first  man  kicked  at  him  fran- 
tically. Sam  caught  the  foot,  twisted 
it  with  a wrenching  jolt.  The  man 
screamed.  Sam  picked  him  up  by  the 
feet  and  smacked  his  head  against 
the  tunnel  wall. 


20 

The  last  Crewman  turned  to  run. 

Sam  reached  out  his  long  left  arm, 
caught  his  shoulder,  spun  him 
around.  The  man  slashed  out  with 
something  that  glittered  and  Sam 
felt  a hot  wetness  in  his  chest.  He 
narrowed  his  black  eyes,  slammed 
his  right  into  the  man’s  face  with  all 
his  strength.  He  followed  it  up  re- 
lentlessly, slugging  the  man  back 
down  the  corridor.  The  man  fell, 
staggered  to  his  feet  again. 

Sam  let  him  have  it. 

It  was  all  over. 

Sam  felt  a small  warm  glow  of 
satisfaction  deep  within  himself,  and 
that  was  all.  He  stood  quietly  for  a 
moment,  gasping  for  breath  in  the 
dust-choked  air,  and  then  he  reached 
down  and  unhooked  the  man’s  can- 
teen. He  lifted  it  to  his  lips  and 
poured  cold  water  down  his  throat. 

That  was  a mistake. 

When  he  was  through  being  sick, 
he  got  Holbrook’s  canteen  and 
forced  himself  to  sip  the  water  slow- 
ly, letting  it  trickle  down  until  nau- 
sea made  him  stop.  Then  he  found 
one  of  the  face  masks  that  was  still 
relatively  intact  and  pulled  it  over 
his  face. 

Air! 

Clean,  filtered  air! 

He  breathed  deeply,  luxuriating 
in  the  stuff.  He  filled  his  lungs  with 
it,  tasting  it,  loving  it.  His  chest 
worked  like  a bellows  until  the  oxy- 
gen made  him  dizzy  and  he  had  to 
slow  down. 

He  examined  his  chest.  It  was  slip- 
pery with  blood,  blood  furred  now 


FANTASY  AND  SCIENCE  FICTION 

with  sticky  dust,  but  it  was  not  a 
deep  cut.  In  any  event,  he  wasn’t 
worried  about  it.  There  was  no  time 
left  for  worry. 

Sam  knew  that  he  had  killed  the 
man  he  had  slammed  against  the 
corridor  wall.  He  knew  it  without 
looking,  and  he  felt  no  remorse.  It 
was  simply  another  item  to  be  added 
to  the  list,  and  it  made  his  position 
more  serious  than  ever.  It  made  his 
position  completely  hopeless. 

He  laughed,  shortly. 

The  hell  with  it,  gentlemen!  I’ll 
cheat  you  yet! 

There  was  no  point  in  trying  to 
reach  the  storeroom.  It  might  gain 
him  an  hour  or  two,  nothing  more. 
And  they  would  be  after  him  very 
soon  now,  many  of  them,  far  more 
than  he  could  ever  handle. 

There  was  just  one  thing  left  to 
do. 

Sam  turned,  picked  his  way  over 
the  prone  bodies,  and  went  back  the 
way  he  had  come.  It  was  easier  with 
the  lights  on,  easier  with  decent  air 
in  his  lungs,  easier  now  that  he 
wasn’t  burning  up  with  thirst.  But 
as  he  walked  the  reaction  caught 
up  with  him,  the  adrenalin  of  battle 
faded,  and  his  legs  wobbled  precari- 
ously. 

He  almost  made  it  before  he  fell 
down,  and  then  he  just  crawled  the 
rest  of  the  way. 

The  faded  sign  was  the  same: 

DANGER.  LOCK  FOUR.  DANGER. 

The  massive  metal  door  still 
gleamed  in  the  very  side  of  the  Ship. 
Beyond  that  airlock — 


THE  WIND  BLOWS  FREE 


21 


Well,  no  matter.  He  was  through, 
cither  way. 

He  pulled  himself  to  his  feet, 
grasped  the  wheel  in  the  middle  of 
the  great  door,  twisted  it. 

The  siren  exploded  into  fury  again, 
but  this  time  he  was  ready  for  it. 
He  ignored  the  bedlam,  kept  on  turn- 
ing the  wheel.  It  came  more  easily 
now,  loosening  up,  it  was  spin- 
ning— 

There  was  a rasping  creak  he 
could  hear  above  the  siren’s  scream. 

Sam’s  hand  dropped  from  the  cold 
metal  wheel.  In  spite  of  himself,  he 
backed  away,  holding  his  breath. 

The  airlock  door  opened  with  a 
hiss. 

At  that  precise  moment,  he  heard 
a chorus  of  cries  that  cut  through 
the  racket  of  the  siren.  A glance 
down  the  tunnel  showed  a troop  of 
Crewmen  advancing  through  the 
smoke-like  dust. 

Sam  waved  his  hand  at  them 
tauntingly. 

Without  hesitation,  he  stepped 
through  the  airlock  door.  He  found 
himself  in  a small  metal  chamber. 
Remembering  the  films  he  had  seen, 
he  jabbed  a green  button  on  a wall 
panel.  The  great  door  through 
which  he  had  come  hissed  shut  again, 
just  before  the  others  reached  it. 

That  door  could  not  be  opened 
again  from  the  Ship  as  long  as  he 
was  inside  the  airlock. 

He  looked  around  him.  There  was 
little  to  see.  The  lock  was  a small 
one,  perhaps  ten  feet  square.  It  had 


been  painted  a dull  gray,  but  the 
paint  had  peeled  and  cracked,  show- 
ing the  dark  metal  beneath. 

The  chamber  was  quite  empty. 

There  was  no  providential  space- 
suit. 

Sam  stepped  across  to  the  circular 
portal  at  the  far  end  of  the  airlock. 
He  touched  it  with  his  finger.  It 
felt  cold.  Just  to  the  right  of  the 
portal  there  was  another  panel.  The 
panel  had  a red  button  set  into  it. 

Sam  reached  out  to  press  the  but- 
ton. 

His  finger  trembled  so  violently 
that  he  missed  it  altogether. 

It  was  all  very  well  to  make  up 
your  mind  to  do  something  that 
went  against  your  very  soul.  It  was 
all  very  well  to  be  convinced  that 
you  were  going  to  do  it.  It  was  all 
very  well  to  try  to  do  it. 

But  beyond  this  last  door  was  Out- 
side. 

Outside  the  Ship. 

Outside  the  world. 

Outside,  past  the  sandy  beaches  of 
a warm  and  tiny  island,  out  into  the 
vastnesses  of  a desolate  sea,  cold  and 
empty  beyond  belief.  Out  into  space 
itself,  out  into  a nightmare  death 
that  had  haunted  you  from  child- 
hood. . . . 

A hollow  clanging  filled  the  cham- 
ber. 

The  Crewmen  were  trying  to  bat- 
ter the  inner  door  down. 

Sam  took  a deep  breath,  and  held 
it.  He  pressed  the  red  button.  He 
felt  a cool  current  against  his  body 
as  air  began  to  cycle. 


22 

The  circular  portal  creaked  and 
hissed. 

It  began  to  open. 

Sam  closed  his  eyes,  held  his 
breath  with  maniac  ferocity. 

He  counted  to  ten. 

He  squared  his  shoulders  and 
walked  forward.  He  walked 
through  the  port.  He  was  Outside — 

He  began  to  fall. 

God,  can  I have  guessed  right, 
why  don’t  I explode,  why  can’t  I 
feel  anything.  . . . 

He  hit  something  with  a numbing 
crash.  The  something  gave  under 
the  impact;  it  was  flexible.  It  ripped 
at  his  arms  and  legs  as  he  fell — 

Then  it  stopped. 

It  was  over. 

Sam  couldn’t  hold  his  breath  any 
longer.  His  lungs  were  bursting,  his 
eyes  bulging  from  their  sockets.  He 
opened  his  mouth,  gasped,  swal- 
lowed. 

Air! 

The  face-mask  could  only  filter 
air;  there  had  to  be  air  there  in  the 
first  place.  And  that  meant — 

Sam  opened  his  eyes. 

Green. 

Yellow. 

Red. 

Blacl{. 

Colors!  A riot  of  colors!  He  had 
never  seen  such  colors;  they  stunned 
his  eyes.  He  looked  up,  past  a tangle 
of  green.  Light!  Bright,  golden  light. 

A sun. 

Sam  reached  up,  ripped  off  his 
face-mask. 

An  avalanche  of  smells  almost 


FANTASY  AND  SCIENCE  FICTION 

smothered  him.  It  was  like  his  hy- 
droponics room,  but  magnified  a 
million  times.  He  smelled  green 
growing  things,  flowers,  trees — 

Life. 

He  had  been  living  in  a dead 
world,  a counterfeit  world,  and  here 
was  the  real  thing,  dazzling,  incred- 
ible, wonderful,  overpowering.  A 
gentle  breeze  ruffled  the  leaves  over 
his  head,  a sweet  living  breeze  he 
could  taste  in  his  mouth. 

Sam  tried  his  body  gingerly.  No 
bones  were  broken,  as  far  as  he  could 
tell.  He  reached  out  and  pulled  the 
sticky  green  vines  apart,  making  a 
hole.  He  began  to  inch  along  pain- 
fully, like  a worm,  sucking  in  the 
earth-moist  air  as  he  went.  He 
forced  his  way  through  a tangled 
miracle  of  underbrush  for  some 
twenty  long  minutes,  and  then  he 
found  himself  in  a small  clearing. 

There  was  water  in  the  clearing, 
a little  spring  bubbling  up  from  an 
outcropping  of  glistening  black 
rocks.  Sam  stared  at  it;  it  seemed 
to  him  that  he  had  never  seen  any- 
thing so  beautiful.  Tiny  brown  root- 
lets trailed  down  into  the  pale  water. 
There  were  clean  white  pebbles  on 
the  bottom,  all  worn  and  smooth. 
He  could  see  the  pebbles  in  exact  de- 
tail, almost  as  though  the  water 
magnified  them,  but  when  he  thrust 
his  arm  into  the  spring  he  could  not 
reach  bottom. 

Sam  cupped  the  cold  water  in  his 
dirty  hands  and  drank  it.  He  had 
never  tasted  water  so  sweet,  so 
charged  with  vitality. 


THE  WIND  BLOWS  FREE 


23 


He  stood  Hp  on  shaking  legs.  He 
looked  back  the  way  he  had  come. 

He  saw  a sight  he  would  never 
forget. 

There  was  the  Ship,  the  mighty 
Ship,  rearing  its  bulk  toward  an  elec- 
tric blue  sky.  There  was  the  Ship, 
the  world  he  had  known,  and  it 
was  a dead  thing,  a defeated  thing. 

Its  once-bright  sides  were  dull 
with  rust  and  corrosion.  Its  once- 
powerful  jets  were  buried  in  dirt 
and  brambles.  Its  once-proud  out- 
line was  blurred  by  the  tangled 
green  ropes  of  creepers  and  vines. 

There  was  the  Ship,  there  was  his 
world : buried  beneath  the  decay  and 
the  growth  of  centuries. 

The  Ship  had  landed;  that  was 
obvious  enough.  It  had  touched 
down  long  ago,  generations  ago.  It 
had  found  the  world  it  had  sought, 
the  world  that  might  give  his  peo- 
ple another  chance. 

The  great  journey  had  ended  hun- 
dreds of  years  ago. 

And  the  passengers  ? 

They  had  stayed  in  the  Ship. 

They  had  been  afraid  to  come  out. 

They  had  built  their  little  safe 
sterile  society  in  their  metal  tube  of 
a world,  and  they  had  been  afraid  to 
start  again.  They  remembered  what 
had  happened  on  Earth;  they  were 
never  allowed  to  forget.  A lifetime 
of  warnings  buzzed  through  Sam’s 
brain: 

‘‘You  must  be  careful,  you  must  be 
wise.  . . ." 

“Taf{e  no  chances.  . . 

“Better  to  be  safe  than  sorry.  . . 


Sam  had  known,  somehow.  A part 
of  him  had  always  known.  This  was 
the  secret  the  Crewmen  hid  from 
their  people.  This  was  why  the  use- 
less control  room  was  guarded,  even 
in  the  midnight  hours.  This  was 
why  the  Crewmen  had  to  be  se- 
lected so  carefully.  This  was  why 
they  had  feared  him,  hated  him, 
stifled  him — 

Sam  felt  the  warm  sun  on  his 
neck,  tasted  the  living  air  in  his 
mouth,  smelled  the  breeze  that  had 
kissed  the  flowers  and  the  trees  and 
the  blue  vault  of  the  skies. 

And  he  threw  back  his  head  and 
laughed,  laughed  with  the  sheer 
blind  exultation  of  being  alive. 

He  flopped  down  on  the  ground 
by  the  bubbling  spring,  pillowed  his 
head  in  his  arms,  and  was  asleep  in 
seconds. 

When  Sam  woke  up,  the  world 
was  dark  around  him — dark  and  yet 
shot  with  a luminous  gray  that  told 
him  that  dawn  was  near.  He  had  no 
idea  how  long  he  had  slept,  since 
he  did  not  know  the  planet’s  period 
of  rotation,  but  he  felt  rested  and 
ready  to  go. 

He  was  cold,  ahd  his  body  was 
stiff  and  sore.  The  ground  that  had 
seemed  so  warm  in  the  sunlight  was 
chill  and  damp  now,  and  there  were 
tiny  beads  of  moisture  on  the  grass 
stems.  The  stars  were  fading  as 
light  seeped  over  the  horizon,  but 
they  still  dusted  the  heavens  with 
their  glory. 

He  drank  some  more  water,  but 


24 

it  failed  to  fill  the  emptiness  that 
gnawed  inside  him.  He  searched  his 
pockets,  but  he  had  no  food  left. 
He  stood  there  and  shivered,  half 
smiling  at  his  own  plight. 

He  didn’t  know  how  to  build  a 
fire. 

He  didn’t  know  what  berries  or 
nuts  were  safe  to  eat. 

He  had  no  weapons. 

He  listened,  almost  holding  his 
breath.  He  heard  the  world  around 
him,  the  world  he  could  not  see. 
He  heard  sounds  he  had  never  heard 
on  the  Ship;  the  very  air  was  filled 
with  rustlings  and  sighings  and  a 
vague  thump  as  something  heavy 
moved  in  the  brush. 

Sam  stood  quietly,  watching  the 
sunrise.  He  felt  as  though  he  were 
just  being  born,  coming  forth  as  a 
man  after  an  eternity  of  not-life  in- 
side a great  metal  egg.  . . . 

The  sun  came  up  slowly,  taking 
its  own  sweet  time,  doing  the  job 
right.  It  bathed  the  world  in  soft 
pastels,  in  rose  and  soft  yellow  and 
rich  brown.  It  warmed  the  ground, 
the  leaves,  the  grasses.  It  rolled  into 
the  sky,  almost  timidly,  and  looked 
down  on  itself,  smiling  into  the 
chuckles  of  the  spring. 

Sam  looked  again  at  the  Ship.  It 
was  a sad  thing  in  the  sunlight,  a 
tragic  thing.  It  looked  like  the  tomb- 
stone placed  over  the  grave  of  a 
giant.  It  was  hard  to  believe  that 
people  lived  and  loved  and  died 
within  those  metal  walls;  it  was  as 
if  the  ancient  Egyptians  of  Earth 
had  sealed  their  society  inside  a vast 


FANTASY  AND  SCIENCE  FICTION 

pyramid,  trying  to  preserve  it  for 
the  ages.  . . . 

Sam  felt  no  anger  now,  not  even 
triumph.  The  green  world  around 
him  was  too  big  for  that.  Instead, 
watching  that  rusting  hulk  being 
strangled  in  the  patient  coils  of  the 
vines,  he  felt  the  beginnings  of  com- 
passion, of  understanding. 

ril  be  bac\,  he  thought.  One  day 
I’ll  be  bac\. 

And  then  the  irony  of  it  welled 
up  within  him.  O my  people!  The 
door  was  always  open  to  you,  the 
door  into  sunlight  and  warmth  and 
life.  The  door  was  always  open,  if 
you  only  had  the  courage  to  wal\ 
through  it! 

He  turned  and  set  out  toward  a 
low  range  of  bluish  hiHs,  still  half 
hidden  by  mist.  He  was  desperately 
hungry,  with  no  way  of  getting 
food,  but  happiness  was  in  him  like 
a song.  He  knew  he  was  on  the 
threshold  of  a new  life,  he  \new 
that  more  miracles  waited  for  him 
beneath  that  alien,  golden  sun.  He 
had  only  to  keep  going,  to  walk 
far  enough  and  long  enough — 

He  smelled  the  smoke  first. 

He  was  walking  through  a clump 
of  tall,  cool  trees,  relishing  the 
spongy  softness  of  the  leaves  on  the 
forest  floor.  He  caught  a whiff  of 
woodsmoke,  heavy  and  pungent 
with  the  tang  of  broiling  meat.  He 
walked  faster,  almost  running,  trail- 
ing the  smoke. 

He  came  to  the  edge  of  a sea  of 
grass,  a rolling  meadow  of  green. 
He  saw  the  orange  fire  at  the  very 


THE  WIND  BLOWS  FREE 


25 


edge  of  the  timber,  blazing  up  with 
sap-rich  hissings  and  cracklings. 
He  smelled  the  dripping  meat  hang- 
ing over  the  flames.  . . . 

He  saw  the  men,  three  of  them, 
standing  around  the  fire.  Big  men, 
men  his  own  size,  their  muscles  as 
golden  as  the  sun  in  the  sky.  They 
saw  him,  smiled  at  him,  waved  to 
him. 

Sam  waved  back.  He  knew  there 


was  nothing  to  fear  here,  and  hur- 
ried toward  the  fire  with  a steady, 
eager  step.  He  walked  proudly,  his 
head  erect,  his  heart  full. 

And  Sam  Kingsley  heard  at  last 
that  far,  free  wind  that  stirs  the 
world.  He  felt  within  him  the  deep 
beat  of  a living  sea,  and  knew  that 
he  had  found  peace  at  the  end  of 
his  journey,  a peace  as  bright  with 
promise  as  the  morning  sun. 


If  you  enjoy  The  Magazine  of  Fantasy  and  Science  Fiction,  you  will  enjoy 
some  of  the  other  Mercury  Publications. 

• VENTURE — Powerful,  shocking  science  fiction  stories  of  action  and  ad- 

venture. Featured  in  the  current  issue  are  stories  by  James  E.  Gunn,  H. 
Beam  Piper,  C.  M.  Kornbluth,  and  others. 

• ELLERY  QUEEN’S  MYSTERY  MAGAZINE— Tz&e  July  issue,  now  on 

sale  leads  off  with  a brand-new  Ellery  Queen  story,  ’’Miracles  Do  Hap- 
pen,” and  features  tales  by  Dorothy  Salisbury  Davis,  Helen  McCloy,  Agatha 
Christie  and  others,  plus  a terrifying  insight  into  Juvenile  Delinquency, 
’’The  Doe  and  the  Gantlet,”  by  Pat  Stadley. 

• MERCURY  MYSTERY  BOOK-MAGAZINE— Albert’s  featured, 

original  novel  ’’Five  Hours  to  Live,” — story  of  a boy  out  for  vengeance  on 
the  town  that  branded  him  a thief — is  accompanied  by  a taut  William 
Campbell  Gault  story,  plus  pieces  by  Erie  Stanley  Gardner  and  others. 

• BESTSELLER  MYSTERY— ''Do«V  Look  Back,”  by  Miriam  Borgenicht. 

Abridged  edition.  "Sheer  suspense  . . . brilliantly  sustained,”  says  the  New 
York  Times  of  this  story  of  a girl’s  terror-stricken  flight  from  kidnappers 
in  a corrupt  town. 

• JONATHAN  PRESS  MYSTERY— 'T/&e  Basle  Express,”  by  Manning 

Coles.  Abridged  edition.  British  Agent  Tommy  Hambledon  has  his  vacation 
interrupted  by  international  gangsters  out  for  blood,  money  and  the  free 
world’s  secrets,  ’’.  . . fast-paced,  and  funny’,’  says  the  San  Francisco  News. 


Cecil  Corwin  was  once  a prolific  and  brilliant  writer  of  science  fiction. 
You’ll  find  43  entries,  under  his  own  name  and  his  many  pseudonyms, 
in  Donald  Day’s  INDEX;  he  has  appeared  in  F&SF  (The  Mask  of  De- 
meter, January,  1953)  and  he  once  received  a Jules  Verne  Award.  If 
y Old  re  wondering  why  you  have  not  seen  Mr.  Corwin’s  name  in  print 
recently,  you’ll  find  the  answer  (along  with  at  least  part  of  The  An- 
swer) in  one  of  the  oddest  stories  ever  to  turn  up  on  even  this 
editorial  desk. 


>JMS,  Found  in  a Chinese  Fortune  Coo\ie 

hy  C.  M.  KORNBLUTH 


They  say  i am  mad,  but  i am  not 
mad — damn  it,  I’ve  written  and 
sold  two  million  words  of  fiction 
and  I know  better  than  to  start  a 
story  like  that,  but  this  isn’t  a story 
and  they  do  say  I’m  mad — cata- 
tonic schizophrenia  with  assaultive 
episodes — and  I’m  not,  YThis  is 
clearly  the  first  of  the  Corwin  Pa- 
pers. Like  all  the  others  it  is  writ- 
ten on  a Riz-lM  cigarette  paper 
with  a ball  point  pen.  Lifie  all  the 
others  it  is  headed:  Urgent.  Finder 
please  send  to  C.  M.  Kornbluth, 
Wantagh,  N.  Y.  Reward!  / might 
comment  that  this  is  typical  of  Cor- 
win’s generosity  with  his  friends’ 
time  and  money,  though  his  atti- 
tude is  at  least  this  once  justified 
by  his  desperate  plight.  As  his 
longtime  friend  and,  indeed,  liter- 
ary executor,  I was  clearly  the 


person  to  turn  to.  CMK]  I have  to 
convince  you,  Cyril,  that  I am  both 
sane  and  the  victim  of  an  enor- 
mous conspiracy — and  that  you  are 
too,  and  that  everybody  is.  A tall 
order,  but  I am  going  to  try  to  fill 
it  by  writing  an  orderly  account 
of  the  events  leading  up  to  my 
present  situation.  [Here  ends  the  first 
paper.  To  fieep  the  record  clear  I 
should  state  that  it  was  forwarded 
to  me  by  a Mr.  L.  Wilmot  Shaw 
who  found  it  in  a fortune  cookie 
he  ordered  for  dessert  at  the  Great 
China  Republic  Restaurant  in  San 
Francisco.  Mr.  Shaw  suspected  it 
was  “a  publicity  gag"  but  sent  it 
to  me  nonetheless,  and  received  by 
return  mail  my  thanks  and  my 
check  for  one  dollar.  I had  not 
realized  that  Corwin  and  his  wife 
had  disappeared  from  their  home 


26 


MS.  FOUND  IN  A CHINESE  FORTUNE  COOKIE 


27 


at  Painted  Post;  I was  merely  aware 
that  it  had  been  weeks  since  I'd 
heard  from  him.  We  visited  infre- 
quently. To  be  blunt,  he  was  easier 
to  take  via  mail  than  face  to  face. 
For  the  balance  of  this  account  1 
shall  attempt  to  avoid  tedium  by 
omitting  the  provenance  of  each 
paper,  except  when  noteworthy, 
and  its  length.  The  first  is  typical — 
a little  over  a hundred  words.  I 
have,  of  course,  kept  on  file  all 
correspondence  relating  to  the 
papers,  and  am  eager  to  display  it 
to  the  authorities.  It  is  hoped  that 
publication  of  this  account  will 
nudge  them  out  of  the  apathy  with 
which  they  have  so  far  greeted  my 
attempts  to  engage  them.  CMK\ 

On  Sunday,  May  13,  1956,  at  about 
12:30  pju.,  I learned  The  Answer. 
I was  stiff  and  aching  because  all 
Saturday  my  wife  and  I had  been 
putting  in  young  fruit  trees.  I like 
to  dig,  but  I was  badly  out  of  con- 
dition from  an  unusually  long  and 
idle  winter.  Creatively,  I felt  fine. 
I’d  been  stale  for  months,  but  when 
spring  came  the  sap  began  to  run 
in  me  too.  I was  bursting  with  story 
ideas;  scenes  and  stretches  of  dialog 
were  jostling  one  another  in  my 
mind;  all  I had  to  do  was  let  them 
flow  onto  paper. 

When  The  Answer  popped  into 
my  head  I thought  at  first  it  was 
an  idea  for  a story — a very  good 
story.  I was  going  to  go  downstairs 
and  bounce  it  off  my  wife  a few 
times  to  test  it,  but  I heard  the 
sewing  machine  buzzing  and  re- 


membered she  had  said  she  was 
way  behind  on  her  mending.  In- 
stead, I put  my  feet  up,  stared 
blankly  through  the  window  at  the 
pasture-and-wooded-hills  View  we’d 
bought  the  old  place  for,  and  fondled 
the  idea. 

What  about,  I thought,  using  the 
idea  to  develop  a messy  little  local 
situation,  the  case  of  Mrs.  Clon- 
ford.'*  Mrs.  C.  is  a neighbor,  animal- 
happy,  land-poor  and  uninten- 
tionally a fearsome  oppressor  of  her 
husband  and  children.  Mr.  C.  is  a 
retired  brakeman  with  a pension 
and  his  wife  insists  on  him  making 
like  a farmer  in  all  weathers  and 
every  year  he  gets  pneumonia  and 
is  pulled  through  with  antibiotics. 
All  he  wants  is  to  sell  the  damned 
farm  and  retire  with  his  wife  to  a 
little  apartment  in  town.  All  she 
wants  is  to  mess  around  with  her 
cows  and  horses  and  sub-marginal 
acreage. 

I got  to  thinking  that  if  you 
noised  the  story  around  with  a com- 
ment based  on  The  Answer,  the 
situation  would  automatically  un- 
tangle. They’d  get  their  apartment, 
sell  the  farm  and  everybody  would 
be  happy,  including  Mrs.  C.  It  would 
be  interesting  to  write,  I thought 
idly,  and  then  I thought  not  so  idly 
that  it  would  be  interesting  to  try — 
and  then  I sat  up  sharply  with  a 
dry  mouth  and  a systemful  of  ad- 
renalin. It  would  work'  The  An- 
swer would  work. 

I ran  rapidly  down  a list  of  other 
problems,  ranging  from  the  town 


28 

drunk  to  the  guided-missile  race.  The 
Answer  worked.  Every  time. 

I was  quite  sure  I had  turned 
paranoid,  because  I’ve  seen  so  much 
of  that  kind  of  thing  in  science 
fiction.  Anybody  can  name  a dozen 
writers,  editors  and  fans  who  have 
suddenly  seen  the  light  and  deter- 
mined to  lead  the  human  race  on- 
ward and  upward  out  of  the  old 
slough.  Of  course  The  Answer 
looked  logical  and  unassailable,  but 
so  no  doubt  did  poor  Charlie  Mc- 
Gandress’  project  to  unite  man- 
kind through  science  fiction  fan- 
dom, at  least  to  him.  So,  no  doubt, 
did  [/  have  here  omitted  several 
briefly  sketched  case  histories  of  sci- 
ence fiction  personalities  as  yet  un- 
committed. The  reason  will  be  ob- 
vious to  anyone  familiar  with  the 
law  of  libel.  Suffice  it  to  say  that 
Corwin  argues  that  science  fiction 
attracts  an  unstable  type  of  mind 
and  sometimes  insidiously  under- 
mines its  foundations  on  reality. 
CMK] 

But  I couldn’t  just  throw  it  away 
without  a test.  I considered  the 
wording  carefully,  picked  up  the 
extension  phone  on  my  desk  and 
dialed  Jim  Howlett,  the  appliance 
dealer  in  town.  He  answered.  “Cor- 
win, Jim,”  I told  him.  “I  have  an 
idea — oops!  The  samovar’s  boiling 
over.  Call  me  back  in  a minute, 
will  you?”  I hung  up. 

He  called  me  back  in  a minute; 
I let  our  combination — two  shorts 
and  a long — ring  three  times  before 
I picked  up  the  phone.  “What  was 


FANTASY  AND  SCIENCii  FICTION 

that  about  a samovar?”  he  asked, 
baffled. 

“Just  kidding,”  I said.  “Listen 
Jim,  why  don’t  you  try  a short  story 
for  a change  of  pace?  Knock  off 
the  novel  for  a while — ” He’s  hope- 
fully writing  a big  historical  about 
the  SulHvan  Campaign  of  1779, 
which  is  our  local  chunk  of  the 
Revolutionary  War;  I’m  helping 
him  a little  with  advice.  Anybody 
who  wants  as  badly  as  he  docs  to 
get  out  of  the  appliance  business  is 
entitled  to  some  help. 

“Gee,  I don’t  know,”  he  said.  As 
he  spoke  the  volume  of  his  voice 
dropped  slightly  but  definitely,  three 
times.  That  meant  we  had  an  av- 
erage quota  of  party  line  snoopers 
listening  in.  “What  would  I write 
about?” 

“Well,  we  have  this  situation  with 
a neighbor,  Mrs.  Clonford,”  I be- 
gan. I went  through  the  problem 
and  made  my  comment  based  on 
The  Answer.  I heard  one  of  the 
snoopers  gasp.  Jim  said  when  I was 
finished:  “I  don’t  really  think  it’s 
for  me,  Cecil.  Of  course  it  was  nice 
of  you  to  call,  but — ” 

Eventually  a customer  came  into 
the  store  and  he  had  to  break  off. 

I went  through  an  anxious  crabby 
twenty-four  hours. 

On  Monday  afternoon  the  paper 
woman  drove  past  our  place  and 
shot  the  rolled-up  copy  of  the  Pott 
Hill  Evening  Times  into  the  orange- 
painted  tube  beside  our  mailbox.  I 
raced  for  it,  yanked  it  open  to  the 
seventh  page  and  read : 


MS.  FOUND  IN  A CHINESE  FORTUNE  COOKIE 


29 


“FARM  SALE 

Owing  to  111  Health  and  Age 
Mr.  & Mrs.  Ronald  Clonford 
Will  sell  their  Entire  Farm,  All 
Machinery  and  Furnishings  and 
All  Live  Stock  at  Auction  Sat- 
urday May  19  12:30  P.M.  Rain 
or  Shine,  Terms  Cash  Day  of 
Sale,  George  Pfennig, 

Auctioneer.” 

[This  is  one  of  the  few  things  in 
the  Corwin  Papers  which  can  be 
independently  verified.  I loo\ed  up 
the  paper  and  found  that  the  ad 
was  run  about  as  quoted.  Further, 
I interviewed  Mrs.  Clonford  in  her 
town  apartment.  She  told  me  she 
"just  got  tired  of  farmin’,  I guess. 
Kind  of  hated  to  give  up  my  ponies, 
but  people  was  beginning  to  say  it 
was  too  hard  of  a life  for  Ronnie 
and  I guess  they  was  right'.’  CMK\ 
Coincidence.'*  Perhaps.  I went  up- 
stairs with  the  paper  and  put  my 
feet  up  again.  I could  try  a hundred 
more  piddling  tests  if  I wished,  but 
why  waste  time?  If  there  was  any- 
thing to  it,  I could  type  out  The 
Answer  in  about  two  hundred 
words,  drive  to  town,  tack  it  on  the 
bulletin  board  outside  the  firehouse 
and — snowball.  Avalanche! 

I didn’t  do  it,  of  course — for  the 
same  reason  I haven’t  put  down  the 
two  hundred  words  of  The  Answer 
yet  on  a couple  of  these  cigarette 
papers.  It’s  rather  dreadful — isn’t  it 
— that  I haven’t  done  so,  that  a 
simple  feasible  plan  to  ensure  peace, 
progress  and  equality  of  opportunity 


among  all  mankind,  may  be  lost  to 
the  world  if,  say,  a big  meteorite 
hits  the  asylum  in  the  next  couple 
of  minutes.  But — I’m  a writer. 
There’s  a touch  of  intellectual  sad- 
ism in  us.  We  like  to  dominate  the 
reader  as  a matador  dominates  the 
bull;  we  like  to  tease  and  mystify 
and  at  last  show  what  great  souls 
we  are  by  generously  flipping  up 
the  shade  and  letting  the  sunshine 
in.  Don’t  worry.  Read  on.  You  will 
come  to  The  Answer  in  the  proper 
artistic  place  for  it.  [At  this  point  I 
wish  fervently  to  dissociate  myself 
from  the  attitudes  Corwin  attributes 
to  our  profession.  He  had — has,  I 
hope — his  eccentricities,  and  I con~ 
sider  it  inexcusable  of  him  to  tar  us 
all  with  his  personal  brush.  I could 
point  out,  for  example,  that  he  once 
laboriously  cultivated  a 16th  Cen- 
tury handwriting  which  was  utterly 
illegible  to  the  modern  reader.  The 
only  reason  apparent  for  this,  as  for 
so  many  of  his  traits,  seemed  to  be 
a wish  to  annoy  as  many  people  as 
possible.  CMK\ 

Yes;  I am  a writer.  A matador 
does  not  show  up  in  the  bull  ring 
with  a tommy  gun  and  a writer 
doesn’t  do  things  the  simple,  direct 
way.  He  makes  the  people  writhe 
a little  first.  So  I called  Fred  Green- 
wald.  Fred  had  been  after  me  for 
a while  to  speak  at  one  of  the  Thurs- 
day Rotary  meetings  and  I’d  been 
reluctant  to  set  a date.  I have  a little 
speech  for  such  occasions,  “The 
Business  of  Being  a Writer” — all 
about  the  archaic  royalty  system  of 


30 

payment,  the  difficulty  of  proving 
business  expenses,  the  Margaret 
Mitchell  tax  law  and  hoW  it  badly 
needs  improvement,  what  copyright 
is  and  isn’t,  how  about  all  these 
generals  and  politicians  with  their 
capital-gains  memoirs.  I pass  a few 
galley  sheets  down  the  table  and 
generally  get  a good  laugh  by  hold- 
ing up  a Doubleday  book  contract, 
silently  turning  it  over  so  they  can 
see  how  the  fine  print  goes  on  and 
on,  and  then  flipping  it  open  so 
they  see  there’s  twice  as  much  fine 
print  as  they  thought  there  was.  I 
had  done  my  stuff  for  Oswego  Ro- 
tary, Horseheads  Rotary  and  Can- 
non Hole  Rotary;  now  Fred  wanted 
me  to  do  it  for  Painted  Post  Rotary. 

So  I phoned  him  and  said  I’d  be 
willing  to  speak  this  coming  Thurs- 
day. Good,  he  said.  On  a discovery 
I’d  made  about  the  philosophy  and 
technique  of  administration  and  in- 
terpersonal relationships,  I said.  He 
sort  of  choked  up  and  said  well, 
we’re  broadminded  here. 

I’ve  got  to  start  cutting  this.  I 
have  several  packs  of  cigarette 
papers  left  but  not  enough  to  cover 
the  high  spots  if  I’m  to  do  them 
justice.  Let’s  just  say  the  announce- 
ment of  my  speech  was  run  in  the 
Tuesday  paper  [It  was.  CMK\  and 
skip  to  Wednesday,  my  place,  about 
7:30  p.M.  Dinner  was  just  over  and 
my  wife  and  I were  going  to  walk 
out  and  see  how  [At  this  point  I 
wish  to  insert  a special  note  con- 
cerning some  difficulty  I had  in 
obtaining  the  next  jour  papers.  They 


FANTASY  AND  SCIENCE  FICTION 

got  somehow  into  the  hands  of  a 
certain  literary  agent  who  is  famous 
for  a sort  of  “finders-\eepers'’  at- 
titude more  appropriate  to  the 
eighth  grade  than  to  the  law  of 
literary  property.  In  disregard  of  the 
fact  that  Corwin  retained  physical 
ownership  of  the  papers  and  liter- 
ary  rights  thereto,  and  that  1 as 
the  addressee  possessed  all  other 
rights,  he  was  blandly  endeavoring 
to  sell  them  to  various  magazines 
as  "curious  fragments  from  Corwin’s 
desl('.  Lil{e  most  people,  1 abhor 
lawsuits;  that’s  the  fact  this  agent 
lives  on.  I met  his  outrageous  price 
of  five  cents  a word  "plus  post- 
age( ! ).’’  I should  add  that  I have 
not  heard  of  any  attempt  by  this 
gentleman  to  locate  Corwin  or  his 
heirs  in  order  to  turn  over  the  pro- 
ceeds of  the  sale,  less  commission. 
CMK]  the  new  fruit  trees  were 
doing  when  a car  came  bumping 
down  our  road  and  stopped  at  our 
garden  fence  gate. 

“See  what  they  want  and  shove 
them  on  their  way,”  said  my  wife. 
“We  haven’t  got  much  daylight  left.” 
She  peered  through  tbe  kitchen 
window  at  the  car,  blinked,  rubbed 
her  eyes  and  peered  again.  She  said 
uncertainly:  “It  looks  like — no! 
Can’t  be.”  I went  out  to  the  car. 

“Anything  I can  do  for  you.'”’  I 
asked  the  two  men  in  the  front 
seat.  Then  I recognized  them.  One 
of  them  was  about  my  age,  a wiry 
lad  in  a T-shirt.  The  other  man 
was  plump  and  graying  and  min- 
isterial, but  jolly.  They  were  un- 


MS.  FOUND  IN  A CHINESE  FORTUNE  COOKIE 


31 


mistakable;  they  had  looked  out  at 
me — one  scowling,  the  other  smil- 
ing— from  a hundred  book  ads.  It 
was  almost  incredible  that  they 
knew  each  other,  but  there  they  were 
sharing  a car. 

I greeted  them  by  name  and  said: 
“This  is  odd.  I happen  to  be  a 
writer  myself.  I’ve  never  shared  the 
best-seller  list  with  you  two,  but — ” 

The  plump  ministerial  man  tut- 
tutted.  “You  are  thinking  nega- 
tively,” he  chided  me.  “Think  of 
what  you  have  accomplished.  You 
own  this  lovely  home,  the  valuation 
of  which  has  just  been  raised  two 
thousand  dollars  due  entirely  to  the 
hard  work  and  frugality  of  you  and 
your  lovely  wife;  you  give  innocent 
pleasure  to  thousands  with  your 
clever  novels;  you  help  to  keep  the 
good  local  merchants  going  with 
your  patronage.  Not  least,  you  have 
fought  for  your  country  in  the  wars 
and  you  support  it  with  your  taxes.” 

The  man  in  the  T-shirt  said 
raspily:  “Even  if  you  din’t  have  the 
dough  to  settle  in  full  on  April  15 
and  will  have  to  pay  six  per  cent 
per  month  interest  on  the  unpaid 
balance  when  and  if  you  ever  do 
pay  it,  you  poor  shnook.” 

The  plump  man  said,  distressed: 
“Please,  Michael — you  are  not  think- 
ing positively.  This  is  neither  the 
time  nor  the  place — ” 

“What’s  going  on?”  I demanded. 
Because  I hadn’t  even  told  my  wije 
I’d  been  a little  short  on  the  ’55 
federal  tax, 

“Let’s  go  inna  house,”  said  the 


T-shirted  man.  He  got  out  of  the 
car,  brushed  my  gate  open  and 
walked  coolly  down  the  path  to  the 
kitchen  door.  The  plump  man  fol- 
lowed, sniffing  our  rose-scented  gar- 
den air  appreciatively,  and  I came 
last  of  all,  on  wobbly  legs. 

When  we  filed  in  my  wife  said: 
“My  God.  It  is  them.” 

The  man  in  the  T-shirt  said: 
“Hiya,  babe,”  and  stared  at  her 
breasts.  The  plump  man  said:  “May 
I compliment  you,  my  dear,  for  a 
splendid  rose  garden.  Quite  unusual 
for  this  altitude.” 

“Thanks,”  she  said  faintly,  begin- 
ning to  rally,  “But  it’s  quite  easy 
when  your  neighbors  keep  horses.” 

“Haw!”  snorted  the  man  in  the 
T-shirt.  “That’s  the  stuff,  babe.  You 
grow  roses  like  I write  books.  Give 
’em  plenty  of — ” 

“Michael!”  said  the  plump  man. 

“Loo^,  you,”  my  wife  said  to  me. 
“Would  you  mind  telling  me  what 
this  is  all  about?  I never  knew  you 
knew  Dr. — ” 

“I  don’t,”  I said  helplessly.  “They 
seem  to  want  to  talk  to  me.” 

“Let  us  adjourn  to  your  sanctum 
sanctorum,"  said  the  plump  man 
archly,  and  we  went  upstairs.  The 
T-shirted  man  sat  on  the  couch,  the 
plump  fellow  sat  in  the  club  chair 
and  I collapsed  on  the  swivel  chair 
in  front  of  the  typewriter.  “Drink, 
anybody?”  I asked,  wanting  one  my- 
self. “Sherry,  brandy,  rye,  straight 
angostura?” 

“Never  touch  the  stinking  stuff,” 
grunted  the  man  in  the  T-shirt. 


32 


FANTASY  AND  SCIENCE  FICTION 


“I  would  enjoy  a nip  of  brandy,” 
said  the  big  man.  We  each  had  one 
straight,  no  chasers,  and  he  got 
down  to  business  with:  “I  suppose 
you  have  discovered  The  Diagonal 
Relationship  ? ” 

I thought  about  The  Answer,  and 
decided  that  The  Diagonal  Relation- 
ship would  be  a very  good  name  for 
it  too.  “Yes,”  I said.  “I  guess  I have. 
Have  you?” 

“I  have.  So  has  Michael  here.  So 
have  one  thousand,  seven  hundred 
and  twenty-four  writers.  If  you’d 
like  to  know  who  they  are,  pick 
the  one  thousand,  seven  hundred 
and  twenty-four  top-income  men  of 
the  ten  thousand  free-lance  writers 
in  this  country  and  you  have  your 
men.  The  Diagonal  Relationship  is 
discovered  on  an  average  of  three 
times  a year  by  rising  writers.” 

“Writers,”  I said.  “Good  God,  why 
writers?  Why  not  economists,  psy- 
chologists, mathematicians  — real 
thinkers?” 

He  said:  “A  writer’s  mind  is  an 
awesome  thing,  Corwin.  What  went 
into  your  discovery  of  The  Diagonal 
Relationship?” 

I thought  a bit.  “I’m  doing  a Civil 
War  thing  about  Burnside’s  Bomb,” 
I said,  “and  I realized  that  Grant 
could  have  sent  in  fresh  troops  but 
didn’t  because  Halleck  used  to  drive 
him  crazy  by  telegraphic  master- 
minding of  his  campaigns.  That’s 
a special  case  of  The  Answer — as  I 
call  it.  Then  I got  some  data  on 
medieval  attitudes  toward  personal 
astrology  out  of  a book  on  ancient 


China  I’m  reading.  Another  special 
case.  And  there’s  a joke  the  monks 
used  to  write  at  the  end  of  a long 
manuscript-copying  job.  Liddell 
Hart’s  theory  of  strategy  is  about 
half  of  the  general  military  case  of 
The  Answer.  The  merchandizing 
special  case  shows  clearly  in  a cata- 
log I have  from  a Chicago  store 
that  specializes  in  selling  strange 
clothes  to  bop-crazed  Negroes.  They 
all  add  up  to  the  general  expression, 
and  that’s  that.” 

He  was  nodding.  “Many,  many 
combinations  add  up  to  The  Di- 
agonal Relationship,”  he  said.  “But 
only  a writer  cuts  across  sufficient 
fields,  exposes  himself  to  sufficient 
apparently  unrelated  facts.  Only  a 
writer  has  wide-open  associational 
channels  capable  of  bridging  the  gap 
between  astrology  and,  ah,  ‘bop.’ 
We  write  in  our  different  idioms” — 
he  smiled  at  the  T-shirted  man — 
“but  we  are  writers  all.  Wide-rang- 
ing, omnivorous  for  data,  equipped 
with  superior  powers  of  association 
which  we  constantly  exercise.” 

“Well,”  I asked  logically  enough, 
“why  on  earth  haven’t  you  pub- 
lished The  Diagonal  Relationship? 
Are  you  here  to  keep  me  from 
publishing  it?” 

“We’re  a power  group,”  said  the 
plump  man  apologetically.  “We  have 
a vested  interest  in  things  as  they 
are.  Think  about  what  The  Diag- 
onal Relationship  would  do  to 
writers,  Corwin.” 

“Sure,”  I said,  and  thought  about 
it.  “Judas  Priest!”  I said  after  a 


MS.  FOUND  IN  A CHINESE  FORTUNE  COOKIE 


33 


couple  of  minutes.  He  was  nodding 
again.  He  said:  “Yes.  The  Diagonal 
Relationship,  if  generally  promul- 
gated, would  work  out  to  approxi- 
mate equality  of  income  for  all,  with 
incentive  pay  only  for  really  hard 
and  dangerous  work.  Writing  would 
be  regarded  as  pretty  much  its  own 
reward.” 

“That’s  the  way  it  looks,”  I said. 
“One-year  copyright,  after  all  . . .” 

[Here  occurs  the  first  hiatus  in 
the  Corwin  Papers.  I suspect  that 
three  or  jour  are  missing.  The  pre- 
ceding and  following  papers,  in- 
cidentally, come  from  a batch  of  six 
gross  of  fortune  cookies  which  I 
purchased  from  the  Hip  Sing  Res- 
taurant Provision  Company  of  New 
York  City  during  the  course  of  my 
investigations.  The  reader  no  doubt 
will  wonder  why  I was  unable  to 
determine  the  source  of  the  cookies 
themselves  and  was  forced  to  buy 
them  from  middlemen.  Apparently 
the  reason  is  the  fantastic  one  that 
by  chance  I was  wearing  a white 
shirt,  dark  tie  and  double-breasted 
blue  serge  suit  when  I attempted  to 
question  the  proprietor  of  the  Hip 
Sing  Company.  1 learned  too  late 
that  this  is  just  about  the  unofficial 
uniform  of  U.  S.  Treasury  and 
justice  Department  agents  and  that 
1 was  immediately  taken  to  be  such 
an  agent.  “You  T-man,"  said  Mr. 
Hip  tolerantly,  “you  get  cou’t  oh- 
dah,  I show  you  books.  Keep  ve’y 
nice  books,  all  in  Chinese  cha’ctahs." 
After  that  gambit  he  would  answer 
me  only  in  Chinese.  How  he  did  it 


I have  no  idea,  but  apparently  within 
days  every  Chinese  produce  dealer 
in  the  United  States  and  Canada 
had  been  notified  that  there  was^ 
a new  T-man  named  Kornbluth  on 
the  prowl.  As  a last  resort  I called 
on  the  New  York  office  of  the 
Treasury  Department  Field  Investi- 
gations Unit  in  an  attempt  to  obtain 
what  might  be  called  un-identifica- 
tion papers.  There  I was  assured  by 
Mr.  Gershon  O’Brien,  their  Chi- 
nese specialist,  that  my  errand  was 
hopeless  since  the  motto  of  Mr.  Hip 
and  his  colleagues  invariably  was 
“Safety  First.’’  To  make  matters 
worse,  as  I left  his  office  I was 
greeted  with  a polite  smile  from  a 
Chinese  lad  whom  I recognized  as 
Mr.  Hip’s  bookkeeper.  CMK\ 

“So  you  see,”  he  went  on  as  if  he 
had  just  stated  a major  and  a minor 
premise,  “we  watch  the  writers,  the 
real  ones,  through  private  detective 
agencies  which  alert  us  when  the 
first  teaser  appears  in  a newspaper 
or  on  a broadcast  or  in  local  gossip. 
There’s  always  the  teaser,  Corwin, 
the  rattle  before  the  strike.  We 
writers  are  like  that.  We’ve  been 
watching  you  for  three  years  now, 
and  to  be  perfectly  frank  I’ve  lost 
a few  dollars  wagered  on  you.  In 
my  opinion  you’re  a year  late.” 

“What’s  the  proposition.?”  I asked 
numbly. 

He  shrugged.  “You  get  to  be  a 
best-seller.  We  review  your  books, 
you  review  ours.  We  tell  your 
publisher : ‘Corwin’s  hot — promote 
him.  Advertise  him.’  And  he  does, 


34 


FANTASY  AND  SCIENCE  FICTION 


because  we’re  good  properties  and 
he  doesn’t  want  to  annoy  us.  You 
want  Hollywood?  It  can  be  ar- 
ranged. Lots  of  us  out  there.  In 
short,  you  become  rich  Hke  us  and 
all  you  have  to  do  is  keep  quiet 
about  The  Diagonal  Relationship. 
You  haven’t  told  your  wife,  by  the 
way?” 

“I  wanted  to  surprise  her,”  I said. 

He  smiled.  “They  always  do. 
Writers!  Well,  young  man,  what  do 
you  say?” 

It  had  grown  dark.  From  the 
couch  came  a raspy  voice:  “You 
heard  what  the  doc  said  about  the 
ones  that  throw  in  with  us.  I’m 
here  to  tell  you  that  we  got  pro- 
visions for  the  ones  that  don’t.” 

I laughed  at  him. 

“One  of  those  guys,”  be  said 
flatly. 

“Surely  a borderline  case,  Mi- 
chael?” said  the  plump  man.  “So 
many  of  them  are.” 

If  I’d  been  thinking  straight  I 
would  have  realized  that  “border- 
line case”  did  not  mean  “undecided” 
to  them;  it  meant  “danger — imme- 
diate action!” 

They  took  it.  The  plump  man, 
who  was  also  a fairly  big  man,  flung 
his  arms  around  me  and  the  wiry 
one  approached  in  the  gloom.  I 
yelled  something  when  I felt  a hy- 
podermic stab  my  arm.  Then  I went 
numb  and  stupid. 

My  wife,  came  running  up  the 
stairs.  “What’s  going  on?”  she  de- 
manded. I saw  her  heading  for  the 
curtain  behind  which  we  keep  an 


aged  hair-trigger  Marlin  38  rifle. 
There  was  nothing  wrong  with  her 
guts,  but  they  attacked  her  where 
courage  doesn’t  count.  I croaked  her 
name  a couple  of  times  and  heard 
the  plump  man  say  gently,  with 
great  concern:  “I’m  afraid  your  hus- 
band needs  . . . help.”  She  turned 
from  the  curtain,  her  eyes  wide.  He 
had  struck  subtly  and  knowingly; 
there  is  probably  not  one  writer’s 
wife  who  does  not  suspect  her  hus- 
band is  a potential  psychotic. 

“Dear — ” she  said  to  me  as  I 
stood  there  paralyzed. 

He  went  on:  “Michael  and  I 
dropped  in  because  we  both  admire 
your  husband’s  work;  we  were  sur- 
prised and  distressed  to  find  his 
conversation  so  . . . disconnected. 
My  dear,  as  you  must  know  I have 
some  experience  through  my  pas- 
torate with  psychotherapy.  Have  you 
ever — forgive  my  bluntness — had 
doubts  about  his  sanity?” 

“Dear,  what’s  the  matter?”  she 
asked  me  anxiously.  I just  stood 
there,  staring.  God  knows  what  they 
injected  me  with,  but  its  effect  was 
to  cloud  my  mind,  render  all  ac- 
tivity impossible,  send  my  thoughts 
spinning  after  their  tails.  I was  in- 
sane. [This  incident,  seemingly  the 
least  plausible  part  of  Corwins 
story,  actually  stands  up  better  than 
most  of  the  narrative  to  one  familiar 
with  recent  advances  in  biochem- 
istry. Corwin  could  have  been  in- 
fected with  lysergic  acid,  or  with 
protein  extracts  from  the  blood  of 
psychotics.  It  is  a matter,  of  cold 


MS.  FOUND  IN  A CHINESE  FORTUNE  COOKIE 


35 


laboratory  fact  that  such  injections 
produce  temporary  psychosis  in  the 
patient.  Indeed,  it  is  on  such  ex- 
perimental psychoses  that  the  new 
tranquilizer  drugs  are  developed 
and  tested.  CMK] 

To  herself  she  said  aloud,  dully: 
“Well,  it’s  finally  come.  Christmas 
when  I burned  the  turkey  and  he 
wouldn’t  speak  to  me  for  a week. 
The  way  he  drummed  his  fingers 
when  I talked.  All  his  little  crackpot 
ways— how  he  has  to  stay  at  the 
Walddrf  but  I have  to  cut  his  hair 
and  save  a dollar.  I hoped  it  was 
just  the  rotten  weather  and  cabin 
fever.  I hoped  when  spring  came — ” 
She  began  to  sob.  The  plump  man 
comforted  her  like  a father.  I just 
stood  there  staring  and  waiting. 
And  eventually  Mickey  glided  up 
in  the  dark  and  gave  her  a needle- 
ful too  and 

[Here  occurs  an  aggravating  and 
important  hiatus.  One  can  only 
guess  that  Corwin  and  his  wife  were 
loaded  into  the  car,  driven — Some- 
where, separated,  and  separately, 
under  false  names,  committed  to 
different  mental  institutions.  I have 
recently  learned  to  my  dismay  that 
there  are  states  which  require  only 
the  barest  sort  of  licensing  to  op- 
erate such  institutions.  One  State 
Inspector  of  Hospitals  even  wrote 
to  me  in  these  words:  . , no 

doubt  there  are  some  places  in  our 
State  which  are  not  even  licensed, 
but  we  have  never  made  any  effort 
to  close  them  and  I cannot  recall 
any  statute  making  such  operation 


illegal.  We  are  not  a wealthy  state 
like  you  up  North  and  some  care 
for  these  unfortunates  is  better  than 
none,  is  our  viewpoint  here.  . , ." 
CMK] 

three  months.  Their  injections 
last  a week.  There’s  always  some- 
body to  give  me  another.  You 
know  what  mental  hospital  attend- 
ants are  like;  an  easy  bribe.  But 
they’d  be  better  advised  to  bribe  a 
higher  type,  like  a male  nurse,  be- 
cause my  attendant  with  the  special 
needle  for  me  is  off  on  a drunk. 
My  insanity  wore  off  this  morning 
and  I’ve  been  writing  in  my  room 
ever  since.  A quick  trip  up  and 
down  the  corridor  collected  the 
cigarette  papers  and  a tiny  ball  point 
pen  from  some  breakfast-food  pre- 
mium gadget.  I think  my  best  bet 
is  to  slip  these  papers  out  in  the 
batch  of  Chinese  fortune  cookies 
they’re  doing  in  the  bakery.  Occupa- 
tional therapy,  this  is  called.  My 
own  o.t.  is  shoveling  coal  when  I’m 
under  the  needle.  Well,  enough  of 
this.  I shall  write  down  The  An- 
swer, slip  down  to  the  bakery,  de.al 
out  the  cigarette  papers  into  the 
waiting  rounds  of  cookie  dougli, 
crimp  them  over  and  return  to  my 
room.  Doubtless  my  attendant  will 
be  back  by  then  and  I’ll  get  an- 
other shot  from  him.  I shall  not 
struggle;  I can  only  wait. 

The  Answer:  human  beings 

RAISED  TO  SPEAK  AN  INDO-IRANIAN 
LANGUAGE  SUCH  AS  ENGLISH  HAVE  THE 
FOLLOWING  IN 

[That  is  the  end  of  the  last  of  the 


36 


FANTASV  AND  SCIENCE  FICTION 


Corwin  Papers  I have  been  able  to 
locate.  It  should  be  superfluous  to 
urge  all  readers  to  examine  care- 
fully  any  fortune  coo\ie  slips  they 
may  encounter.  The  next  one  you 
brea\  open  may  contain  what  my 
poor  friend  believed,  or  believes,  to 


be  a great  message  to  man\ind.  He 
may  be  right.  His  tale  is  a wild  one 
but  it  is  consistent.  And  it  embodies 
the  only  reasonable  explanation  I 
have  ever  seen  for  the  presence  of 
certain  boo\s  on  the  best-seller  list. 
CMK] 


The  cartoon  above,  by  Ronald  Searle,  appeared  in  his  collection  “The  Femtde  Ap- 
proach," © 1954  by  Ronald  Searle.  Mr.  Searle  appears  regularly  in  "Punch.” 


Jusf  a year  ago,  in  his  first  story  for  F&SP  ( Emily  and  the  Bards  Sub- 
lime), Robert  F.  Young  introduced  the  problem  of  poetical  androids, 
whose  voice-tapes  bear  a lyric  heritage  to  which  a world  no  longer 
listens.  It  is,  in  Mr.  Young’s  tender  treatment,  an  appealing  subject 
well  worth  revisiting. 


Your  Ghost  Will  Walk  . . . 

by  ROBERT  F.  YOUNG 


Betty  lived  for  the  moments  she 
spent  with  Bob,  and  he,  in  turn, 
lived  for  the  moments  he  spent  with 
her.  Naturally  those  moments  were 
limited  by  their  duties  in  the  Wade 
household,  but  quite  often  those 
same  duties  brought  them  together, 
as,  for  instance,  when  Bob  assisted  in 
the  preparation  of  the  nightly  out- 
door dinner.  Their  eyes  would  meet, 
then,  over  the  sizzling  tenderloins  or 
pork  chops  or  frankfurters,  and  Bob 
would  say,  "You’ll  love  me  yet! — 
and  I can  tarry  your  love’s  pro- 
tracted growing — " and  Betty  would 
answer  with  one  of  her  own  lines: 
"say  over  again,  and  yet  once  over 
again,  that  thou  dost  love  me  . . 

Sometimes  they  would  become  so 
engrossed  in  each  other  that  the  ten- 
derloins or  the  chops  or  the  frank- 
furters would  be  burned  to  a crisp — 
even  on  the  microwave  grill,  which 
was  supposed  to  be  above  such  culi- 
nary atrocities.  On  such  occasions 


Mr.  Wade  would  become  furious 
and  threaten  to  have  their  tapes  cut 
out.  Being  androids,  they  could  not, 
of  course,  distinguish  between  basic 
motives  and  apparent  motives,  so 
they  did  not  know  that  Mr.  Wade’s 
threat  stemmed  from  deeper  frustra- 
tions than  burnt  tenderloins,  chops, 
and  frankfurters.  But,  androids  or 
not,  they  were  aware  that  without 
their  tapes  they  would  cease  to  be 
themselves  for  each  other,  and,  sev- 
eral times,  after  Mr.  Wade  threat- 
ened them,  they  nearly  ran  away, 
and — once  upon  a time — they 
did  ... 

Outdoor  living  was  a cult  in  the 
Wade  clan.  None  of  them,  from  tall, 
exquisitely  turned-out  Mrs.  Wade  to 
little,  dominating  Dickie  Wade, 
would  have  dreamed  of  eating  din- 
ner indoors  during  the  summer 
months,  unless  it  was  raining  cats 
and  dogs  and  pitchforks.  Grilled 


38 

tenderloins  were  as  much  a part  o£ 
their  lives  as  the  portable  TV  sets 
scattered  on  the  disciplined  sward, 
the  two  custom-built  2025  Cadillacs 
(Mr.  Wade’s  gold  one  and  Mrs. 
Wade’s  silver  one),  standing  like  ju- 
venile spaceships  in  the  four-lane 
driveway,  the  huge,  two-toned  dou- 
ble garage,  the  king-size  patio  front- 
ing the  one-acre  ranch-style  house, 
the  outdoor  swimming  pool,  and  the 
pleasant  vista  of  forested  hills  and 
dales  tumbling  away  around  them. 

Outdoor  living,  Mr.  Wade  was 
fond  of  remarking,  built  sturdy 
bodies  and  keen  minds.  He  usually 
accompanied  the  remark  by  flexing 
his  biceps  and  tensing  his  pectorals 
(he  was  mesomorphic  and  proud  of 
the  fact),  and  appended  to  it  by  pull- 
ing out  his  personal  talking  cigarette 
case  (he  manufactured  them),  de- 
pressing the  little  button  that  simul- 
taneously ejected  a cigarette  and  ac- 
tivated the  microscopic  record  con- 
taining his  latest  rhyme  (he  wrote 
his  own),  and  listening  appreciative- 
ly while  he  lit  up : 

Light  me  up  and  smo\e  me. 

Blow  a ring  or  two, 

Vm  a pleasure-packed  diversion 
Created  just  for  you  I 

Ordinarily  his  verse  had  a sooth- 
ing effect  oii  him.  Tonight,  how- 
ever, the  lines  irritated  him,  left  him 
vaguely  dissatisfied.  He  recognized 
the  symptoms : the  cigarette  case 
market  was  overdue  for  a new  mas- 
terpiece, and  it  was  up  to  him  to 
compose  it. 


FANTASY  AND  SCIENCE  FICTION 

The  day  at  the  factory  had  been  a 
tiring  one,  and  he  sat  down  in  his 
Businessman’s  Lounger  (which  had 
been  moved  out  on  the  patio  for  the 
summer  months)  and  let  the  auto- 
matic massage  units  go  to  work  on 
him.  He  called  to  Betty  to  bring  him 
an  ice-cold  beer.  She  was  leaning 
across  the  microwave  grill,  talking 
to  Bob,  and  he  had  to  call  twice  be- 
fore she  responded.  Mr.  Wade’s 
mood,  which  was  already  dark,  grew 
darker  yet.  Even  the  ice-cold  beer, 
when  Betty  finally  brought  it,  failed 
to  have  its  usual  euphoric  effect. 

He  surveyed  his  domain,  endeav- 
oring to  revive  his  spirits  by  review- 
ing his  possessions.  There  were  his 
three  small  sons,  squatting,  hunched, 
and  prone  before  their  portable  TV 
sets;  there  was  his  gold  and  gleam- 
ing Caddy  waiting  to  take  him 
wherever  he  wanted  to  go;  there  was 
his  39-21-39  wife  reclining  languor- 
ously in  a nearby  lawn  chair,  absorb- 
ing the  last  rays  of  the  sun;  there 
were  his  two  rebuilt  menials  prepar- 
ing the  evening  meal  over  the  micro- 
wave  grill,  reciting  their  anachro- 
nistic poetry  to  each  other — 

Mr.  Wade’s  face  darkened  to  a hue 
that  matched  his  mood.  If  they 
burned  the  tenderloins  again  to- 
night . . . 

Abruptly  he  got  up  and  sauntered 
over  to  the  grilL  He  caught  a frag- 
ment of  verse  as  he  came  up — "/ 
shall  never,  in  the  years  remaining, 
paint  you  pictures,  no,  nor  carve  you 
statues — ” Then  Bob,  who  had  been 
speaking,  lapsed  into  silence.  It  was 


VOUR  GHOST  WILL  WALK  . . 


39 


always  so.  There  was  something 
about  Mr,  Wade’s  presence  that 
dampened  their  dialogue.  But  that 
was  all  right,  he  hastily  reassured 
himself:  he  couldn’t  endure  their  po- 
etry anyway.  Nevertheless,  he  was 
piqued,  and  he  did  something  he 
had  never  condescended  to  do  be- 
fore: he  came  out  with  some  of  his 
own  stuff — a poetic  gem  that  dated 
back  to  his  Early  Years  when  he  was 
still  searching  for  his  Muse — and 
threw  it  in  their  faces,  so  to  speak: 

My  heart’s  on  the  highways, 

My  hand’s  at  the  wheel 
Of  my  brilliant  (jtnd  beautiful 
Automobile. 

They  looked  at  him  blankly.  Mr. 
Wade  knew,  of  course,  that  the 
blankness  was  no  reflection  on  his 
art,  that  it  was  merely  the  result  of 
his  reference  to  an  object  outside  the 
realm  of  their  responses.  Mrs.  Wal- 
hurst,  their  original  owner,  had  con- 
sidered it  inappropriate  to  include 
automobiles  in  their  memory  banks, 
and  when  Mr.  Wade  had  had  them 
converted,  he  hadn’t  bothered  to 
have  the  deficiency  corrected,  not 
only  because  he  hadn’t  thought  it 
necessary  that  a maid  and  a butler 
should  be  conversant  with  such  phe- 
nomena, but  because  of  the  addi- 
tional expense  it  would  entail. 

Just  the  same,  his  pique  intensi- 
fied, turned  into  anger.  “So  maybe  it 
isn’t  immortal,”  he  said  aggressively. 
“But  it’s  in  tune  with  the  times  and 
it  pays  a tribute  to  a vital  economic 
factor!” 


“Yes,  Mr.  Wade,”  Betty  said. 

“Certainly,  Mr.  Wade,”  said  Bob. 

“The  trouble  with  you  two,”  Mr. 
Wade  went  on,  “is  your  lack  of  re- 
spect for  an  economic  system  that 
guarantees  the  prosperity  and  the  lei- 
sure necessary  for  the  creation  of  art. 
It’s  an  artist’s  duty  to  fulfill  his  obli- 
gations to  the  system  that  makes  his 
art  possible,  and  the  best  way  he  can 
do  so  is  by  helping  to  make  that 
system  permanent.  Maybe  no  one 
will  make  an  animated  dummy  out 
of  me  when  I’m  gone,  but  my  talk- 
ing cigarette  case  line  is  one  of  the 
foundations  on  which  Tomorrow 
will  be  built,  an  economic,  practical 
foundation — not  a bunch  of  silly 
words  that  no  one  wants  to  hear  any 
more!” 

“Silly  words  ...  Betty  said 
tentatively. 

“Yes,  silly  words!  The  silly  words 
you  two  whisper  to  each  other  every 
night  when  you’re  supposed  to  be 
cooking  dinner — ” 

Abruptly  Mr.  Wade  paused  and 
sniffed  the  air.  Something  was  burn- 
ing. He  didn’t  have  to  look  far  to 
find  out  what  it  was.  His  anger 
leaped  the  fence  .of  his  common 
sense,  and  he  threw  up  his  arms.  “I 
will,”  he  shouted.  “So  help  me  I 
will!  I’ll  have  your  tapes  cut  out!” 
And  he  turned  and  strode  furiously 
away. 

But  he  doubted  if  he  ever  would. 
If  he  did,  he’d  have  to  buy  new  tapes 
to  replace  the  old  ones,  and  tapes  ran 
into  money.  Betty  and  Bob  had  cost 


40 

enough  already  without  deliberately 
letting  himself  in  for  more  expense! 

Still,  he  reconsidered,  resuming  his 
seat  on  the  patio,  they  hadn’t  cost 
anywhere  near  as  much  as  a pair  of 
made-to-order  menials  would  have. 
So  maybe  they  were  a couple  of  ante- 
diluvian poets:  they  could — and  did 
— do  the  work  they’d  been  converted 
to  do.  And  so  maybe  they  did  burn  a 
tenderloin  or  two  now  and  then  and 
whisper  nonsensical  verse  to  each 
other  whenever  they  got  the  chance: 
he  was  still  getting  away  cheap. 

In  a way,  he’d  started  a trend. 
Everybody  was  buying  up  eccentric 
androids  now  and  having  them  con- 
verted for  practical  tasks.  But  he’d 
been  the  first  to  see  the  possibilities. 
None  of  the  other  businessmen 
who’d  attended  the  auction  that  en- 
sued Mrs.  Walhurst’s  death  had  rec- 
ognized the  potentialities  of  a pair  of 
androids  like  Betty  and  Bob.  They’d 
all  stood  there  on  the  unkempt  lawn 
in  front  of  Mrs.  Walhurst’s  crum- 
bling Victorian  mansion,  and  when 
Betty  and  Bob  had  been  led  up  on 
the  auctioneer’s  block,  all  any  of 
them  had  done  was  laugh.  Not  that 
there  hadn’t  been  sufficient  justifica- 
tion for  laughter.  Imagine  anyone, 
even  a half-cracked  old  recluse  like 
Mrs.  Walhurst,  having  two  poets 
built  to  order!  It  was  a miracle  that 
Androids,  Inc.  had  even  taken  on 
the  job,  and  Lord  only  knew  how 
much  they’d  charged  her. 

Mr.  Wade  had  laughed  too,  but  his 
reaction  hadn’t  stopped  there.  His 
mind  had  gone  into  action  and  he’d 


FANTASY  AND  SCIENCE  FICTION 

taken  a good  look  at  the  two  poets. 
They’d  been  a couple  of  sad-looking 
specimens  all  right,  with  their  long 
hair  and  period  clothing.  But  just 
suppose,  he  had  thought:  Suppose 
you  were  to  call  them  by  their  in- 
formal, instead  of  their  formal, 
names,  and  suppose  you  were  to  get 
a good  barber  and  a good  hairdresser 
to  go  to  work  on  their  hair,  and  a 
good  tailor  and  a good  dressmaker 
to  fit  them  out  in  modern  clothing — 
or  maybe  even  uniforms.  And  then 
suppose  you  were  to  get  a good  an- 
droid mechanic  to  convert  them  into, 
say,  a — a — why  yes,  a maid  and  a 
butler! — the  very  maid  and  butler 
Mrs.  Wade  had  wanted  for  so  long. 
Why,  with  the  money  he’d  save,  he 
could  easily  buy  the  new  auto-an- 
droid he'd  wanted  for  so  long,  to 
service  his  and  Mrs,  Wade’s  Caddies! 

Nobody  had  bid  against  him  and 
he’d  got  them  for  a song.  The  cost 
of  converting  them  had  been  a little 
more  than  he’d  anticipated,  but 
when  you  compared  the  over-all  cost 
with  what  a brand  new  pair  of  meni- 
als would  have  set  him  back,  the  dif- 
ference was  enormous. 

It  was  also  gratifying.  Mr.  Wade 
began  to  feel  better.  He  felt  even  bet- 
ter after  consuming  three  medium- 
rare  tender  Joins  (Betty  and  Bob  had 
made  haste  to  atone  for  the  fiery  fate 
of  the  first  batch),  a bowl  of  tossed 
salad,  a basket  of  French  fries,  and 
another  ice-cold  beer,  and  he  was  his 
Normal  Self  again  when  he  got  up 
from  the  rustic  backyard  table  for  his 
nightly  Walk  Around. 


VOUR  GHOST  WILL  WALK  . . . 

It  was  fun  walking  over  your  own 
land,  especially  when  you  owned  so 
much  of  it.  The  swimming  pool  was 
like  a big  silvery  cigarette  case  in  the 
light  of  the  rising  moon,  and  the 
portable  TV  sets  bloomed  on  the 
lawn  like  gaudy  chrysanthemums. 
The  staccato  sound  of  the  cowboys 
shooting  the  Indians  blended  nicely 
with  the  distant  hum  of  the  traffic  on 
highway  999. 

Mr.  Wade’s  footsteps  gravitated,  as 
they  so  often  did  of  late,  to  the 
double-garage.  Charley  had  the  gold 
Caddy  up  on  the  hydraulic  lift  and 
was  underneath  it,  giying  it  a grease 
job.  Fascinated,  Mr.  Wade  sat  down 
to  watch. 

Watching  Charley  was  a pastime 
he  never  tired  of.  Charley  had  cost 
ten  times  as  much  as  Betty  and  Bob, 
but  he  was  worth  every  cent  of  it, 
from  the  visor  of  his  blue  service 
station  attendant’s  cap  to  the  pol- 
ished tips  of  his  oil-resistant  shoes. 
And  he  just  loved  cars.  You  could 
see  his  love  in  the  way  he  went  about 
his  work;  you  could  see  it  in  his 
I shining  eyes,  in  his  gentle,  caressing 
hands.  It  was  an  inbuilt  love,  but  it 
I was  a true  love  just  the  same.  When 
I Mr.  Wade  had  set  down  his  specifi- 
j cations,  the  man  from  Androids, 
j Inc.,  who  had  come  around  to  take 
I the  order,  had  objected,  at  first,  to  all 
the  car-love  Mr.  Wade  wanted  put 
in.  “We’re  a bit  diffident  about  in- 
stalling too  much  affection  in  them,” 
the  man  from  Androids  had  said. 
“It’s  detrimental  to  their  stability.” 

“But  don’t  you  see?”  Mr.  Wade 


41 

had  said.  “If  he  loves  cars,  and  par- 
ticularly Caddies,  he’s  bound  to  do 
a better  job  servicing  them.  And  not 
only  that.  I’ll  keep  his  case  in  the 
garage  and  leave  it  open  all  the  time 
and  he’ll  make  a fine  guard.  Just  let 
anybody  try  to  steal  my  Caddy,  eh?” 

“That’s  precisely  the  point,  Mr. 
Wade.  You  see,  we  wouldn’t  want 
any  of  our  products  manhandling, 
or  perhaps  I should  say — ha  ha — 
‘android-handling’  a human,  even  if 
the  human  in  question  is  a thief.  It 
would  be  bad  publicity  for  us.” 

“I  should  think  it  would  be  good 
publicity,”  Mr.  Wade  had  said.  “Any- 
way,” he  went  on,  in  a sharper  tone 
of  voice,  “if  you  expect  to  sell  me  an 
auto-android,  he’s  going  to  love  my 
Caddy  and  that’s  all  there  is  to  it!” 

“Ob,  of  course,  sir.  We’ll  build  you 
anything  you  like.  It’s  just  that  I felt 
duty-bound  to  point  out  that  affec- 
tion is  an  unpredictable  quality,  even 
in  humans,  and — ” 

“Are  you  going  to  make  him  the 
way  I want  him  or  aren’t  you!” 

“Yes,  sir.  Androids,  Inc.  has  but 
one  aim  in  life:  Happy  Customers. 
Now  what  else  in  the  way  of  person- 
ality did  you  have  in  mind,  sir  ? ” 

“Well — ” Mr.  Wade  had  cleared  his 
throat.  “First  of  all  . . .” 

“Good  evening,  Mr.  Wade,”  Char- 
ley said,  wiping  off  a fitting. 

“Good  evening  yourself,”  Mr. 
Wade  said.  “How’s  tricks?” 

“Not  bad,  sir.  Not  bad.”  Charley 
applied  the  grease  gun  to  the  fitting, 
and  pumped  in  precisely  die  right 
amount  of  grease. 


42 


FANTASY  AND  SCIENCE  FICTION 


“Car  in  good  shape,  Charley?” 

“Well  . . The  synthetic  tissue  of 
Charley’s  face  was  one  of  Android, 
Inc.’s  latest  triumphs.  He  could — 
and  actually  did — frown.  “I  hate  to 
be  critical,  sir,  but  I don’t  think  you 
should  take  her  on  newly  tarred 
roads.  Her  undercarriage  is  a sight!” 

“Couldn’t  help  it,  Charley.  You 
can  get  the  stuff  off,  can’t  you?” 

“In  time,  sir.  In  time.  It’s  not  that 
I mind  the  work,  of  course.  It’s  the 
sacrilegious  nature  of  the  act  itself 
that  irks  me.  Couldn’t  you  have  de- 
toured ? ” 

It  was  on  the  tip  of  Mr.  Wade’s 
tongue  to  say  that  he  could  have,  but 
that  he  hadn’t,  and  it  was  none  of 
Charley’s  G.D.  business  anyway.  But 
he  caught  himself  just  in  time.  After 
all,  wasn’t  this  the  very  reaction  he 
had  wanted  in  an  auto-android? 
And  didn’t  it  go  to  show  that  An- 
droids, Inc.  had  built  Charley  exactly 
according  to  specifications  ? 

He  said  instead:  “I’m  sorry,  Char- 
ley. I’ll  be  more  considerate  next 
time.”  Then  he  got  down  to  the  real 
reason  for  his  visit.  “You  like  poetry, 
don’t  you,  Charley?” 

“I’ll  say,  sir.  Especially  yours!” 

A warm  glow  began  in  Mr.  Wade’s 
toes,  spread  deliciously  upward  to 
the  roots  of  his  hair.  “Been  mulling 
over  a new  rhyme.  Kind  of  like  to 
get  your  reaction.” 

“Shoot,  sir.” 

“Goes  like  this: 

Smo^e  me  early,  smo^e  me  late, 

Smo]{e  me  if  you’re  underweight. 


I’m  delightful  and  nutritious 

And  decidedly  delicious! 

“Why,  that’s  terrific,  sir!  You 
should  really  wow  ’em  with  that 
one!  Gee,  Mr.  Wade,  you  must  be  a 
genius  to  think  up  stuff  like  that.” 

“Well,  hardly  a genius — ” 

Charley  wiped  another  fitting,  ap- 
plied the  gun.  “Oh  yes  you  are,  sir!” 

“Well  . . 

Mr.  Wade  left  the  garage  on  light 
footsteps.  He  never  sang  in  the 
shower,  but  tonight  he  broke  tradi- 
tion and  gave  his  voice  free  rein. 
And  all  the  while  he  sang,  visions 
danced  through  his  mind;  visions  of 
people  everywhere,  filing  into  drug- 
stores and  smoke  shops,  saying,  “I’d 
like  a Wade  Talking  Cigarette  Case, 
please”;  visions  of  more  and  more 
orders  pouring  into  the  factory  and 
the  cigarette  companies  vying  with 
each  other  for  an  exclusive  option  on 
the  new  rhyme,  and  the  conveyor 
belts  going  faster  and  faster  and  the 
production-line  girls  moving  like 
figures  in  a speeded-up  movie — 

“Arthur!” 

Mr.  Wade  turned  the  shower  inter- 
com dial  to  T.  “Yes,  dear?” 

“It’s  Betty  and  Bob,”  Mrs.  Wade 
said.  “I  can’t  find  them  anywhere!” 

“Did  you  look  in  the  kitchen?” 

“I’m  in  the  kitchen  now  and  they 
aren’t  here  and  the  dishes  are  all 
stacked  in  the  sink  and  the  floor  has- 
n’t been  swept  and~” 

“I’ll  be  right  there,”  Mr.  Wade 
said. 


irOUR  GHOST  WILL  WALK 


• • > 


43 


He  toweled  himself  hurriedly  and 
slipped  into  his  shirt,  shorts,  and 
slippers,  all  the  while  telling  himself 
what  he’d  tell  them  when  he  found 
them.  He’d  lay  it  right  on  the  line 
this  time:  either  they  got  on  the  ball 
and  stayed  there  or  he’d  really  have 
their  tapes  cut  out! 

Abruptly  he  remembered  that  he’d 
already  made  the  same  threat  quite  a 
number  of  times,  that  he  had,  in  fact, 
made  it  that  very  evening.  Was  it 
possible.?  Could  his  threatening  to 
have  their  tapes  cut  out  have  had 
anything  to  do  with — 

But  of  course  it  couldn’t  have! 
They  were  only  androids.  What 
could  their  tapes  possibly  mean  to 
them.? 

Still- 

He  joined  Mrs.  Wade  in  the 
kitchen  and  together  they  searched 
the  house  from  front  to  back.  The 
children  had  retired  to  their  rooms 
with  their  'TV  sets  some  time  earlier 
and,  when  questioned,  said  they’d 
seen  nothing  of  Betty  and  Bob  either. 
After  the  house,  Mr.  and  Mrs.  Wade 
searched  the  grounds,  with  the  same 
result.  Then  they  tried  the  garage, 
but  there  was  no  one  there  except 
Charley,  who  had  just  finished  Mr. 
Wade’s  Caddy  and  was  starting  in 
on  Mrs.  Wade’s.  No,  Charley  said, 
running  an  appreciative  hand  along 
a silvery  upswept  tailfin,  he’d  seen 
nothing  of  them  all  evening. 

“If  you  ask  me,”  Mrs.  Wade  said, 
“they’ve  nm  away.” 

“Nonsense.  Androids  don’t  run 
away.” 


“Oh  yes  they  do.  Lots  of  them.  If 
you’d  watch  the  newscasts  once  in  a 
while  instead  of  mooning  all  the 
time  over  what  a great  poet  you  are, 
you’d  know  about  such  things.  Why, 
there  was  a case  just  the  other  day. 
One  of  those  old  models  like  yours, 
that  some  other  cheapskate  thought 
he  could  save  money  on,  ran  away. 
A mechanic  named  Kelly  or  Shelley 
or  something.” 

“Weil,  did  they  find  him.?” 

“They  found  him  all  right.  What 
was  left  of  him.  Can  you  imagine.? 
He  tried  to  cross  highway  656!” 

Compared  to  highway  999,  high- 
way 656  was  a sparsely  traveled 
country  road.  Mr.  Wade  felt  sick  and 
his  face  showed  it.  He’d  be  in  a fine 
fix  if  he  had  to  replace  Betty  and 
Bob  now,  after  putting  up  so  much 
for  Charley.  He’d  been  a fool  for  not 
having  had  them  completely  con- 
verted in  the  first  place. 

The  distant  hum  of  the  traffic  was 
no  longer  a pleasant  background 
sound.  There  was  an  ominous  qual- 
ity about  it  now.  Abruptly  Mr.  Wade 
snapped  into  action.  “Go  call  the  po- 
lice,” he  told  his  wife.  “Tell  them  to 
get  out  here  right  away!” 

He  turned  and  headed  for  his 
Caddy.  On  an  afterthought,  he 
called  Charley.  “Come  along,  Char- 
ley,” he  said.  “I  might  need  your 
help.”  They  were  nothing  but  a cou- 
ple of  antique  poets,  but  you  never 
could  tell.  Charley’d  be  able  to  han- 
dle them  all  right,  though;  Charley 
could  bend  a crankshaft  with  his 
bare  hands. 


44 

“Get  in,”  Mr.  Wade  said,  and 
Charley  slid  into  the  seat  beside  him. 
Mr.  Wade  gunned  the  750  h.p.  motor 
and  the  Caddy  shot  down  the  drive, 
tires  spinning. 

Charley  winced.  “Mr.  Wade, 
please!” 

“Shut  up!”  Mr.  Wade  said. 

The  drive  wound  around  forested 
hills,  dipped  deep  into  night-damp 
dales.  Moonlight  was  everywhere:  on 
trees  and  grass  and  macadam,  in  the 
very  air  itself.  But  Mr.  Wade  was  un- 
aware of  it.  His  universe  had  shrunk 
to  the  length  and  breadth  and  height 
of  the  Caddy’s  headlights. 

When  his  universe  remained  emp- 
ty, he  began  to  think  that  perhaps 
they  hadn’t  come  this  way  after  all, 
that  maybe  they’d  struck  off  through 
the  surrounding  countryside.  Then, 
rounding  the  last  curve,  he  saw  the 
two  familiar  figures  far  down  the 
drive. 

They  were  about  a hundred  yards 
from  the  highway,  walking  hand  in 
hand,  their  shoulders  touching.  Mr. 
Wade  swore.  The  fools,  he  thought. 
The  ridiculous  fools!  Talking  about 
the  moon,  probably,  or  some  equally 
asinine  subject,  and  walking  serenely 
to  their  deaths! 

He  slowed  the  Caddy  when  he 
came  opposite  them,  and  drove 
along  beside  them.  If  they  saw  the 
car,  they  gave  no  evidence  of  it. 
They  were  strolling  dreamily,  talk- 
ing now  and  then  in  low  voices.  Mr. 
Wade  hardly  recognized  their  faces. 

“Betty,”  he  called.  “Bob!  I’ve  come 
to  take  you  home.” 


FANTASY  AND  SCIENCE  EiCTION 

They  ignored  him.  Completely. 
Utterly.  Furious,  he  stopped  the  car. 
Abruptly  it  occurred  to  him  that  he 
was  acting  like  a fool,  that  they 
couldn’t  possibly  react  to  him  as 
long  as  he  remained  in  the  Caddy, 
because  automobiles,  not  being  in- 
cluded in  their  memory  banks,  could 
have  no  reality  for  them. 

He  got  out  his  cigarette  case,  in- 
tending to  light  a cigarette  and  per- 
haps calm  himself — 

Light  me  up  and  smo\e  me. 

Blow  a ring  or  two, 

I’m  a pleasure-packed  diversion  . . 

Created  just  for  you! 

For  some  reason  the  rhyme  infuri- 
ated him  all  the  more,  and  he 
jammed  the  cigarette  case  back  in  his 
pocket  and  got  out  and  started 
around  the  car.  In  his  eagerness  to 
reach  Betty  and  Bob,  he  skirted  the 
left  front  fender  too  closely  and  the 
case,  which  had  become  wedged  in 
the  opening  of  his  pocket,  scraped 
screechingly  along  the  enamel. 

Mr.  Wade  stopped  in  his  tracks. 
Instinctively  he  wetted  his  finger 
and  ran  it  over  the  long  ragged  scar. 
“Look  Charley,”  he  wailed.  “See 
what  they  made  me  do!” 

Charley  had  got  out  on  the  other 
side,  had  walked  around  the  car,  and 
was  now  standing  in  the  moonlight  a 
few  paces  away.  There  was  a strange 
expression  on  his  face.  “I  could  kill 
them,”  Mr.  Wade  went  on.  “I  could 
kill  them  with  my  bare  hands!” 

Betty  and  Bob  were  moving  away 
from  the  car,  still  walking  hand  in 


VOUR  GHOST  WILL  WALK  . . . 

hand,  still  talking  in  low  voices.  Be- 
yond them  the  highway  showed,  a 
deadly  river  of  hurtling  lights.  Bob’s 
voice  drifted  back : 

"Your  ^host  will  wal\,  you  lover  of 
trees, 

(If  our  loves  remain) 

In  an  English  lane, 

By  a cornfield  side  a-flutter  with 
poppies  . . .” 

and  suddenly  Mr.  Wade  knew. 

He  wondered  why  the  answer 
hadn’t  occurred  to  him  before.  It  was 
so  simple,  and  yet  it  solved  every- 
thing. Betty  and  Bob  would  be 
completely  destroyed  and  yet  at  the 
same  time  their  usefulness  in  the 
Wade  menage  would  be  enhanced. 
Come  to  think  of  it,  though,  he’d 
subconsciously  supplied  half  of  the 
answer  every  time  he’d  threatened  to 
have  their  tapes  cut  out.  It  was  only 
the  second  half  that  had  eluded  him: 
replace  those  tapes  with  tapes  con- 
taining his  own  poetry! 

Exhilaration  flooded  him.  “All 
right,  Charley,”  he  said.  “Go  get 
them.  Go  get  the  lousy  outdated  bas- 
tards! . . . Charley.?” 

Charley’s  expression  was  more 
than  merely  strange  now.  It  was 
frightening.  And  his  eyes — “Char- 
ley!” Mr.  Wade  shouted.  “I  gave  you 
an  order.  Obey  it!” 

Charley  said  nothing.  He  took  a 
tentative  step  toward  Mr.  Wade.  An- 
other. For  the  first  time  Mr.  Wade 
noticed  the  12"  crescent  wrench  in 
his  hand.  “Charley!”  he  screamed. 
“I’m  your  owner.  Don’t  you  remem- 


.  45 

ber,  Charley.?  I’m  your  owner!”  He 
tried  to  back  away,  felt  his  buttocks 
come  up  against  the  fender.  Then  he 
tried  to  slide  along  the  fender,  fren- 
ziedly  holding  up  his  arms  to  protect 
his  face;  but  his  arms  were  flesh  and 
bone  and  the  wrench  was  hardened 
steel,  as  were  the  sinews  of  the  arm 
that  wielded  it,  and  it  descended,  not 
deviating  an  iota  from  the  terrified 
target  of  Mr.  Wade’s  face,  and  he  slid 
limply  down  the  side  of  the  fender 
to  the  macadam  and  lay  there  in  the 
widening  pool  of  his  blood. 

Charley  got  the  flashlight  and  the 
auto-first-aid  kit  out  of  the  trunk 
and,  kneeling  by  the  fender,  began 
to  repaint  the  ragged  wound. 

The  road  was  a weird  and  wind- 
ing Wimpolc  Street.  They  walked 
along  it,  hand  in  hand,  lost  in  a 
world  they’d  never  made,  a world 
that  liad  no  room  for  them,  not  even 
for  their  ghosts. 

And  before  them,  in  the  alien 
night,  the  highway  purred  and 
throbbed.  It  waited  . . . 

"How  do  I love  thee — " Betty  said. 

"The  year’s  at  the  spring — " said 
Bob. 

Making  love,  saly? 

The  happier  they! 

Draw  yourself  up  from  the  light  of 
the  moon. 

And  let  them  pass,  as  they  will  too 
soon. 

With  the  bean  flower/  boon. 

And  the  blackbird's  tune. 

And  May,  and  fund  . . . 


The  pleasing  notions  of  Novotny  have  ranged,  in  these  pages,  from  a 
lake  of  pure  bourbon  to  a lottery  with  Helen  of  Troy  as  prize;  but  the 
peculiar  talent  of  Jesse  Haimes  may  well  be  the  most  enviable  idea 
that  Novotny  has  yet  conceived,  f WARNING:  / have  gathered  that 
there  are  a few  readers  who  object  to  sex  in  fantasy.  It  seems  only  fair 
to  warn  these  poor  abstainers  from  the  splendid  source  that  they 
should  immediately  and  rapidly  skip  to  page  53.} 


0/4  Trick  or  Two 

JOHN  NOVOTNY 

At  nine  that  evening  laura 
walked  beautifully  into  the  apart- 
ment. 

“Hello,  Jesse,”  she  said  softly. 
“For  some  reason  I thought  you 
had  given  up.” 

“You  underestimate  me,  Laura,” 
he  said,  removing  her  coat.  “And 
yourself.  You  never  looked  lovelier.” 

“Thank  you,  Jesse,”  she  smiled, 
accepting  a glass  of  champagne. 
“I’ve  never  been  in  better  shape. 
I’m  ready  to  go  ten  rounds,  if 
necessary.” 

“That  was  uncalled-for,  darling,” 
lie  said,  hurt.  “You  make  me  sound 
crude.  Perhaps  in  other  days  . . . 
but  now  I’m  of  a different  mind.” 

“Fine,”  Laura  applauded,  laugh- 
ing  gayly.  “Don’t  tell  me  what  role 
you’re  playing  tonight.  It  will  be 
more  fun  if  I have  to  guess.” 

Jesse  had  a wonderful  dinner 
waiting  and  they  ate  by  candelight. 


Later  they  sipped  benedictine  by  the 
picture  window  overlooking  the 
river. 

“You  make  it  seem  so  worthwhile, 
Jesse,”  Laura  murmured.  “There  are 
moments  when  I almost  feel  like 
giving  the  devil  his  due.” 

“That’s  what  I’m  planning  on,” 
Jesse  said  casually. 

“Oh.?”  Laura  answered  question- 
ingly.  “You  expect  me  to  succumb, 
to  offer  myself  to  you,  out  of  the 
goodness  of  my  heart.?” 

“Or  the  badness,”  Jesse  added. 

“I  wish  you  luck.” 

“Thank  you,”  Jesse  said.  “Then 
you  agree  that  should  you  stand 
before  me  unclothed,  I might  as- 
sume, rightfully,  that  I have  won 
the  game.?” 

“Unclothed — ^by  force?” 

“No,  my  dear.  No  force,”  he 
smiled. 

“I  agree  that  under  those  circum- 


46 


A TRICK  OR  TWO 


47 


stances  you’d  have  a pretty  good 
assumption,”  Laura  said.  “When  do 
you  expect  me  to  go  into  this  dis- 
robing act.?” 

“Most  anytime,”  Jesse  said.  “To 
hasten  your  decision,  let  me  show 
you  a few  little  presents  I have  for 
you.” 

Jesse  kept  himself  from  hurrying 
as  he  led  her  to  the  two  closet  doors. 
He  opened  one  and  pointed  to  the 
furs  hanging  inside. 

“My  choice.?”  Laura  asked. 

“All  of  them,”  Jesse  said.  “Look 
them  over.” 

She  stepped  inside  the  cbset  and 
Jesse  smiled.  His  mind  raced  over 
the  events  of  the  past  week. 

Jesse  Haimes  sipped  his  Scotch 
pensively,  then  placed  the  glass 
decisively  on  the  table  and  leaned 
toward  his  friend. 

“Mind  you,  Tom,”  he  said,  “it 
isn’t  that  I haven’t  tried.  Lord 
knows.  I’ve  played  the  gentleman, 
the  brother,  and  the  man-of-the- 
world.  I’ve  been  patient,  impatient, 
persuasive.” 

“Generous?”  Tom  inquired. 

“Abundantly,”  Jesse  insisted,  “I 
even  bought  her  a poodle.” 

“And  through  it  all,”  Tom  Casey 
smiled,  “Miss  Laura  Carson  remains 
unconquered,  unsullied,  unbowed.” 

“Disgustingly  so,”  Jesse  admitted. 

“Let’s  have  another  drink,”  Tom 
suggested,  signaling  the  waiter.  “Or 
do  you  have  a conference  this 
afternoon?” 

“Nothing,”  Jesse  said.  “A  few 


letters  to  get  out  and  some  desks 
must  be  moved.  We’re  changing  the 
accounting  room  to  the  Forty-eighth 
Street  side.” 

“Dry  work,”  Tom  Casey  said. 
“Another  scotch  is  definitely  in 
order.” 

They  sat  back,  waiting  for  the 
drinks,  and  pondered  the  enigma  of 
Miss  Laura  Carson.  Tom  watched 
Jesse  light  a cigarette.  As  Jesse 
brought  his  hand  down  to  drop  the 
match  in  the  ash  tray,  Tom  reached 
forward  and  snapped  his  fingers. 

“Abra-ca-dabra,”  he  said.  The  ash 
tray  vanished.  Jesse’s  hand  froze  and 
he  stared  at  the  spot  where  the  glass 
container  had  rested.  Finally  he 
smiled  foolishly. 

“Well  done,  Tom,”  he  said.  “How 
did  you  do  it?” 

“Magic,”  Tom  said,  self-con- 
sciously. “I  don’t  usually  fool 
around  in  public,  but  I just  had 
the  urge.” 

“I  didn’t  know  that  was  your 
hobby.” 

“It’s  not,”  Tom  laughed.  “That’s 
my  trick.  Nothing  else.” 

“Bring  it  back,”  Jesse  said. 

“I  can’t,”  Tom  confessed.  “I  can 
make  small  items  disappear.  Where 
they  go,  I have  no  idea.” 

Jesse  stopped  smiling  and  began 
to  frown.  He  restrained  himself  as 
the  waiter  approached  and  served 
the  drinks.  He  watched  the  man 
walk  away;  then  he  turned  hur- 
riedly back  to  Tom  Casey. 

“Are  you  trying  to  tell  me  that 
this  business  is  on  the  level?”  he 


48 

demanded,  gesturing  aimlessly  at 
the  center  of  the  table.  Tom  nodded 
foolishly. 

“I  don’t  believe  it,”  Jesse  said. 
“After  all  . . . come  now,  Tom.” 

“Put  your  swizzle  stick  out  there,” 
Tom  said. 

Jesse  slowly  pushed  the  plastic 
stirring  rod  to  the  spot  indicated. 
Tom  snapped  his  fingers  at  the 
stick. 

“Abra-ca-dabra,”  he  said.  The  ob- 
ject disappeared. 

“Good  Lord,”  Jesse  breathed, 
“And  to  think  I doubted  Dun- 
ninger.” 

The  two  men  sat  silently  until 
Jesse  called  the  waiter. 

“Two  more  scotches,”  he  ordered, 
“and  an  ash  tray.” 

The  waiter  brought  the  drinks 
and  the  ash  tray,  surveyed  the  table 
and  its  occupants  suspiciously,  and 
departed. 

“Can  you  teach  me.?”  Jesse  asked. 

“I  don’t  think  so,”  Tom  ex- 
plained. “An  old  proofreader  out  in 
Denver  told  me  about  it.  Everybody 
has  one  trick  he  can  do.  The  proof- 
reader could  change  water  into 
whisky.  That  was  his  trick  and  a 
very  handy  one.” 

“Do  you  mean  I have  some  bit 
of  magic  I can  do.?”  Jesse  asked 
excitedly. 

“Everyone  has,”  Tom  said.  “Mine 
you  just  saw.” 

“How  does  a person  find  out  his 
trick — if  that’s  what  you  call  it.?” 

Tom  shrugged. 

“Most  people  never  do,  I guess,” 


FANTASY  AND  SCIENCE  FICTION 

he  said.  “I  just  stumbled  on  mine.” 

“Maybe  mine  is  the  same  as 
yours,”  Jesse  suggested. 

“Try  it,”  Tom  said,  isolating  the 
ash  tray.  Jesse  replaced  it  with  a 
swizzle  stick. 

“The  waiter  would  raise  hell 
about  another  ash  tray,”  he  ex- 
plained. He  took  a deep  breath, 
snapped  his  fingers,  and  intoned 
the  necessary  phrase.  The  stirrer 
remained. 

“Did  I do  something  wrong?” 
Jesse  asked  hopefully.  Tom  shook 
his  head. 

“Perfect  technique,”  he  said. 
“Negative  result.” 

“I  guess  I have  a different  talent,” 
Jesse  murmured.  “Damn  it!  How 
am  I going  to  find  out  what  it  is.?” 

“It’s  not  that  important,”  Tom 
Casey  said.  “Unless  it’s  the  water 
and  whisky  deal,  of  course.” 

The  waiter  was  summoned  again 
and  soon  Jesse  was  glaring  bale- 
fully  at  a glass  of  water. 

“No  luck,”  Tom  said.  “I  wouldn’t 
worry  about  it.  As  I said,  I hardly 
ever  use  mine.  It’s  embarrassing 
when  people  ask  questions.  I can’t 
explain  the  trick,  so  I automatically 
am  classified  as  a stinker  or  a 
drunken  bum.  I’d  just  forget  about 
it  if  I were  you.” 

Jesse  shook  his  head.  The  two 
men  finished  their  drinks  and  left 
the  restaurant.  As  they  parted  at 
Madison  and  49th,  Jesse  smiled  at 
his  companion, 

“First  time  in  weeks  I’ve  been 
able  to  think  about  something  other 


A TRICK  OR  TWO 


49 


than  Laura  Carson,”  he  said.  “See 
you  next  week.” 

“These  letters,  Mr.  Haimes — ” 

Jesse  smiled  at  the  slim  brunette. 

“Yes,  Carol?” 

“They’re  ready  for  your  signa- 
ture. And  Mr.  Wigmann  would  like 
to  have  two  more  cabinets  in  Ac- 
counts Payable.” 

“Fine,”  Jesse  said,  accepting  the 
papers.  “Tell  Wiggy  he’ll  have  his 
cabinets  in  a few  days.” 

He  watched  his  secretary  walk  to 
her  desk  in  the  far  corner  of  the 
large,  tastefully  decorated  office  they 
shared.  After  the  girl  settled  at  the 
desk  and  was  busy  calling  Wig- 
mann’s  secretary,  Jesse  drew  his 
hand  out  from  under  his  own  desk. 
He  looked  down  expectantly  at  the 
hat  he  held. 

“Abra-ca-dabra,”  he  muttered.  No 
rabbit  materialized. 

“Thank  God,”  he  whispered.  “I 
wasn’t  particularly  anxious  to  have 
that  ability.” 

Carol  finished  her  call  and  came 
across  the  office. 

“Yes,  Carol?” 

“Mr.  Wigmann  requests  that  if  the 
cabinets  are  among  tbe  surplus  items 
in  the  next  room,  could  he  look  at 
them,  in  order  to  plan  where  they 
will  be  placed.” 

“Tell  him  to  come  over  in  five 
minutes.  We  may  have  to  move  a 
few  things.” 

The  girl  returned  to  the  phone 
and  then  joined  Jesse  as  he  unlocked 
the  door  to  the  small  office  next  to 


his.  It  had  been  pressed  into  use  as 
a storage  area  during  the  reorgan- 
ization period  and  was  filled  with 
varied  pieces  of  office  equipment. 
Jesse  pointed. 

“As  I suspected,”  he  said.  “Damn! 
All  the  way  in  the  back.  I’ll  push 
these  desks  aside  if  you’ll  move  the 
lamps  and  chairs.” 

After  a few  moments  of  coopera- 
tive endeavor  Carol  and  Jesse 
Haimes  stood  before  the  two  cabi- 
nets. Each  was  two  and  a half  feet 
wide  by  seven  feet  tall.  The  cabinets 
had  no  shelves  and  were  intended 
to  hold  clothing.  Jesse  opened  one 
of  the  metal  doors  and  looked  in- 
side. 

“Wiggy  will  have  to  arrange  for 
shelves,”  he  said,  closing  the  door. 
“He  can  call  Griswold  and — ” 

Jesse  stopped  and  looked  at  the 
cabinet.  Dimly  he  recalled  a vaude- 
ville act  he  had  once  enjoyed. 

“Carol,”  he  said,  hesitantly. 
“Would  you — well,  this  may  seem 
odd-” 

“Yes,  Mr.  Haimes?” 

Jesse  decided  that  wording  was 
less  important  than  results. 

“Would  you  mind  stepping  into 
this  cabinet  for  one  moment?” 

Carol  smiled. 

“Into  the — cabinet?” 

“Yes.  Into  the  cabinet.” 

“I  don’t  understand.” 

“In  all  probability,”  Jesse  said, 
“there  will  be  nothing  to  under- 
stand. If  there  is  I will  explain  la- 
ter.” 

“I  hope  so,”  Carol  said,  still  smil- 


50 

ing.  She  lifted  the  hem  of  her  skirt 
slightly  and  stepped  up  into  the 
locker-like  affair. 

“Thank  you,”  Jesse  said.  He 
closed  the  door  and  stepped  back. 
With  squared  shoulders  he  faced  the 
cabinet. 

“Abra-ca-dabra,”  he  said,  softly 
enough  so  that  Carol  couldn’t  hear. 
He  opened  the  cabinet  and  smiled 
in  assuringly.  Jesse  swallowed  hard 
as  he  looked  at  the  empty  space.  Hur- 
riedly he  leaped  to  the  remaining 
cabinet  and  opened  the  door. 

“Don’t  be  alarmed,  Car — Oh, 
Lord!” 

Carol  stood  framed  in  the  cabinet. 
She  was  nude  and  she  was  angry. 
Jesse  looked  away  and  then,  decid- 
ing the  hell  with  it,  he  looked  back. 

“What  have  you  done  with  your 
clothes .?  ” he  asked. 

“What  have  / done?”  Carol  said, 
ominously.  She  pushed  one  bare  foot 
forward,  then  pointed  to  her  neck. 
“From  pumps  to  my  black  choker 
ribbon.  Whsst.  You’ve  never  been 
better.” 

She  stepped  carelessly  from  the 
cabinet  and  sank  into  one  of  the 
surplus  swivel  chairs. 

“You  said  you’d  explain,”  she  said. 
“This  had  better  be  good.  Your 
apartment  is  one  thing,  the  office  is 
entirely  different.  I’ve  always  in- 
sisted— ” 

She  stopped  and  looked  at  the 
cabinet  she  had  just  vacated. 

“That’s  not  the  one  I — Oh  broth- 
er, you  better  start  talking.  I think 
I’ll  scream.” 


FANTASY  AND  SCIENCE  FICTION 

She  opened  her  mouth  and  Jesse 
leaped  forward  to  cover  it  with  his 
hand. 

“I  can  explain!”  he  said  quickly. 
Carol  relaxed  and  Jesse  took  his 
hand  away. 

“OK,”  she  said.  “Explain,” 

Jesse  looked  at  the  two  cabinets 
and  then  back  at  Carol. 

“I  can’t,”  he  said  unhappily.  Carol 
opened  her  mouth  wide. 

“Wait!”  Jesse  pleaded.  “I  mean  I 
don’t  know  how  it  happened.  Pass- 
ing you  from  one  cabinet  to  another 
just  happens  to  be  my  trick.” 

“Oh,”  Carol  said,  raising  her  eye- 
brows. “Your  trick,  eh?  Do  you 
mind  if  your  naked  little  secretary 
says  you  certainly  have  a fine  collec- 
tion. And  may  I ask  what  you  in- 
tend to  do  right  now?” 

She  swiveled  in  the  chair  and 
made  a complete  circle. 

“Not  very  much  room  in  here,” 
she  said  tersely. 

“Carol,  I—” 

“Apartments  are  apartments.  Of- 
fices are  offices.  And  I don’t  care  for 
that  trick.  If  you — ” 

"Mr.  Haimes.  Mr.  Haimes." 

They  both  leaped  up  as  Mr.  Wig- 
mann’s  voice  floated  in  from  Jesse’s 
office. 

“Wait  there!”  Jesse  shouted. 

“Oh,  I can  come  in  and — ” 

“No,”  Jesse  shouted  frantically. 
“Just  wait  a moment.  Until  I get 
things — straightened  out.” 

“Very  well,”  Wiggy  answered. 
They  could  hear  his  steps  as  he 
wandered  about  the  office. 


A TRICK  OR  TWO 


51 


“Get  in  the  cabinet,”  Jesse  whis- 
pered to  Carol. 

“Like  hell,”  Carol  whispered, 
“Never  again.” 

“Carol,”  Jesse  pleaded.  He  leaned 
down  and  kissed  her  full  on  the  lips. 
“Ten  dollars  a week  raise.  The  Win- 
ter Garden  and  the  Stork  Club  one 
evening  next  week.  A new  gown.” 

Carol  melted. 

“Mr.  Haimes.  That  isn’t  neces- 
sary.” 

“It  certainly  is,”  he  said.  “I’ve  done 
you  an  injustice.  Offices  are  offices. 
I promise  to  remember.” 

She  threw  both  bare  arms  around 
his  neck  and  kissed  him.  Drawing 
away,  she  smiled,  “Into  the  cabinet.” 
As  she  stepped  in,  Jesse  permitted 
himself  one  light  pat  on  Carol’s  pert 
rump  and  closed  the  door. 

“Wiggy,”  he  called.  “Now  you  can 
come  in.  I’ve  finally  located  them.” 

Mr.  Wigmann  walked  into  the 
smaller  room  and  approached  the 
cabinets. 

“Excellent,  perfect,”  he  said. 
“Good  of  you,  Haimes,  to  go  to 
the  trouble.  Heavens,  you’re  perspir- 
ing something  fierce.  I assure  you  I 
could  have  waited.” 

“Not  at  all,”  Jesse  assured  him, 
leading  him  away. 

“But  the  insides — ” 

“Nothing.  Bare,”  Jesse  coughed 
on  the  last  word.  “You’ll  have  to 
arrange  for  shelves.  See  Griswold.” 

He  ushered  Wiggy  to  the  door, 
shook  hands,  and  propelled  the  little 
man  into  the  hall.  Jesse  then  went 
to  the  phone  and  dialed. 


“Miss  Devins.?  Jesse  Haimes,”  he 
announced.  “No,  don’t  call  B.  J.  I 
want  to  speak  to  you.  I have  a favor 
to  ask.  My  club  is  putting  on  a show 
and  we’re  missing  one  outfit — a 
girl’s.  I’d  have  asked  Carol  but  she 
is  out  on  business  at  the  moment. — 
You  will?  Fine. — Size? — Oh,  about 
Carol’s  size.  One  each  of  the  follow- 
ing; dress  . . .” 

A little  later  he  returned  to  the 
small  office  and  released  Carol. 

“Don’t  worry  about  your  clothes,” 
he  said.  “I’ve  sent  down  for  a com- 
plete new  outfit.” 

“Who?” 

“B.  J.’s  secretary.  Miss  Devins,”  he 
told  her. 

“Good,”  Carol  smiled.  “She  has 
excellent  taste  and  is  very  conscien- 
tious. She’ll  take  at  least  an  hour.” 

Hand  in  hand  they  returned  to 
Jesse’s  office. 

Three  days  later  he  completed  the 
construction  work  in  his  apartment. 
The  two  cabinets  were  built  in  flush 
with  the  wall  and  looked  like  noth- 
ing else  than  closet  doors.  Jesse  put 
his  tools  away  and  prepared  the  final 
test.  He  took  the  small  kewpie  doll 
and  placed  it  on  the  floor  of  closet 
number  one.  Carefully  he  patted  the 
lace  dress  in  place  and  rearranged 
the  tiny  cap.  Finally  he  stood  up, 
closed  the  door,  and  backed  off. 

“Abra-ca-dabra,”  he  said,  waving 
a few  fingers  negligently.  He  strode 
to  cabinet  number  two,  opened  the 
door,  and  smiled  as  he  picked  up 
the  shiny  little  plastic  body. 


52 

“Excellent,”  he  murmured.  “Now 
to  call  Miss  Laura  Carson.” 

Jesse  silently  closed  the  cabinet 
door  behind  Laura  as  she  hummed 
through  the  furs.  Quickly  he  stepped 
back  and  raised  his  arm. 

“Abra-ca-dabra,”  he  sang. 

The  room  was  quiet  except  for 
the  soft  music  Jesse  had  playing  in  the 
background.  He  walked  to  cabinet 
two  and  opened  the  door.  Laura 
stood  there  and  Jesse  drew  a deep 
breath  even  tliough  he  was  prepared. 
She  smiled,  unflustered  and  com- 
pletely calm,  as  she  stepped  from  the 
cabinet.  Her  body  was  flawless,  per- 
fect, warm  and  soft.  Graceful  move- 
ments shadowed  ivory-tan  skin  as 
she  walked  in  the  soft  hghts.  Her 
dark  hair  was  long  and  lay  tan- 
talizingly  on  exquisite  shoulders. 
Jesse  was  forced  to  lock  his  hands 
behind  his  back.  Laura  walked  half- 
way across  the  room,  then  turned 
and  looked  at  the  two  doors. 

“You’re  naked,”  Jesse  said  hoarse- 
ly. Laura  looked  down  at  herself. 

“Never  more  so,”  she  laughed.  As 
her  body  moved  in  laughter  Jesse 


FANTASY  AND  SCIENCE  FICTION 

was  forced  to  remove  his  tie.  Laura 
walked  to  the  big  window  where 
moonlight  crept  across  her  body. 
Jesse  removed  his  shirt. 

“You  seem  very  much  at  ease,”  he 
remarked.  “No  surprise.?” 

Laura  shook  her  head  as  he  con- 
tinued undressing. 

“It’s  quite  obvious  that  you  have 
discovered  your  trick,”  she  said. 

For  a moment  Jesse  stopped,  bal- 
ancing on  one  leg. 

“Even  so,”  he  said,  determined 
not  to  lose  the  advantage,  “the  cir- 
cumstances have  worked  out.” 

“That’s  true,”  Laura  said,  “but 
please  do  me  a favor.” 

“Yes.?” 

“Will  you  hold  that  fire  iron  out 
at  arm’s  length?” 

Jesse  walked  wonderingly  to  the 
fireplace,  picked  up  the  poker,  and 
held  it  out.  Laura  raised  a long  slen- 
der forefinger  and  pointed  at  the 
brass  tool;  and  in  Jesse’s  hand  the 
poker  became  pliable,  soft,  and  wilt- 
ed like  wax  before  a flame.  He 
stared  at  it  in  horror. 

“Jesse,”  Laura  said.  “I  discovered 
my  trick  long  ago.” 


The  Unfortunate  TopologiSl 

A burleycue  dancer,  a pip 
Named  Virginia,  could  peel  in  a zip; 
But  she  read  science  fiction 
And  died  of  constriction 
Attempting  a Mdbius  strip. 


S.  D.  GOTTESMAN 


Those  who  skipped  the  Novotny  story  because  it  contained  sex  may 
safely  resume  their  reading  here,  even  though  Mr.  Anderson’s  narrative 
is,  as  its  title  indicates,  primarily  concerned  with  nothing  else.  For  it  is 
surely  a corollary  to  Comstock’s  First  Law  ("the  censorability  of 
mammae  varies  in  inverse  ratio  to  the  amount  of  melanin  in  the 
skin”)  that  the  obscenity  of  the  sexual  processes  of  any  race  varies  in 
direct  ratio  to  the  kinship  of  that  race  with  the  race  judging;  and  An- 
derson’s wholly  alien  Mercurians  are  much  too  silicious  to  be  salacious. 
But  their  sex-life,  if  unalluring,  offers  a mystery  upon  the  solution  to 
which  depend  the  lives  of  two  Earthmen — and  possibly  the  future 
of  Earth. 


Life  Cycle 

hy  POUL  ANDERSON 


“Well,  all  right!  I’ll  go  to  their 
damned  temple  myself!” 

“You  must  be  crazy  even  to  think 
of  such  a tonteria,”  said  Juan  Navar- 
ro. He  sucked  hard  on  his  pipe,  de- 
cided it  was  finished,  and  knocked 
out  the  dottle.  “They  would  tear  you 
in  pieces.” 

“Quicker  than  starving  to  death 
on  this  hellhound  lump  of  rock.” 

“Very  small  pieces.”  Navarro. sat 
down  on  a workbench  and  swung 
his  legs.  He  was  a Basque,  medium- 
sized, longheaded,  dark-haired, 
with  the  mountaineer’s  bony  inde- 
pendence in  his  face.  He  was  also  a 
biologist  of  distinction,  an  amateur 
violinist,  and  a hungry  man  waiting 
to  die.  “You  don’t  understand,  Joe. 


Those  Dayside  beings  are  not  just 
another  race.  They  are  gods.” 

Joe  Kingsbury  Thayendanegea, 
who  was  a stocky  Mohawk  from 
upper  New  York  State,  paced  the 
caging  space  of  the  room,  hands  be- 
hind his  back,  and  swore.  If  he  had 
had  a tail,  he  would  have  lashed  it. 
He  was  the  pilot  and  engineer,  the 
only  other  Terrestrial  on  Mercury. 
When  you  dove  this  far  down  into 
the  sun’s  monstrous  gravitational 
well,  you  couldn’t  take  a big  crew 
along. 

“So  what  else  can  you  think  of?” 
he  challenged.  “Shall  we  draw 
straws  and  barbecue  the  loser?” 

Antella,  the  owl-faced  Martian 
mineralogist,  made  a harsh  cawing 


54 

in  his  gray-feathered  throat.  “Best  it 
be  me,”  he  advised.  “Then  no  one  is 
technically  guilty  of  cannibalism.” 

“Not  much  meat  on  that  skinny 
little  frame  of  yours,  amigo,"  said 
Navarro.  “And  a human  body 
would  have  so  many  other  uses  after 
one  was  finished  with  the  organic 
parts.  Make  the  vertebrae  into  chess- 
men— the  ribs  into  Venetian  blinds 
for  bay  windows — yes,  and  the  skulls 
would  make  distinctive  mousetraps.” 

Kingsbury  shook  heavy  shoulders 
and  thrust  his  beaky  face  forward. 
“What  are  we  yattering  about?”  he 
demanded.  “We’ve  got  a week’s  slim 
rations  left  aboard  this  clunk.  After 
that  we  start  starving.” 

“So  you  are  going  to  the  temple 
and  confront  the  gods  and  convince 
them  of  the  error  of  their  ways.  Ka!” 
Antella  clicked  his  short,  curved  bill. 
“Or  did  you  think  to  threaten  them 
with  our  one  solitary  pistol?” 

“I’m  going  to  try  and  find  out 
what  the  Twonks — or  their  gods,  if 
you  insist — have  against  us,”  said 
Kingsbury.  “Here’s  the  idea;  it’s  get- 
ting close  to  sunrise  time,  and  there’ll 
be  a crowd  of  ’em  at  the  temple.  I’ll 
go  out  on  Dayside  and  find  me  an 
empty  Twonk  shell  and  get  into  it. 
With  luck,  I’ll  pass  unnoticed  long 
enough  to — ” 

Antella’s  brass-colored  eyes  wid- 
ened. “The  scheme  is  a bold  one,”  he 
admitted.  “As  far  as  I know,  there 
is  strict  silence  during  the  ceremo- 
nies, whatever  they  are.  You  just 
might  accomplish  it.” 

Navarro  leered.  “I  know  exactly 


FANTASY  AND  SCIENCE  FICTION 

what  you  would  accomplish,  Joe.  Do 
you  remember  that  story  you  tell  me, 
oh,  last  year  I think  it  was?  About 
the  tourist  in  the  North  forest,  and 
the  Canuck  guide,  and  the  moose 
call?” 

“Yeah.  ‘Ze  moose,  she — ’ Hey! 
What  do  you  mean?” 

“Precisely.  That  temple  is  a breed- 
ing place.  They  go  there  to  breed.” 

“How  do  you  know?  I’ve  been 
tramping  around  arguing  with  the 
damn  Twonks,  and  you’ve  just  sat 
here  in  the  lab.” 

Navarro  shrugged.  “What  else 
could  I do  but  my  research?  I stud- 
ied the  biochemistry  of  Mercurian 
life.  I worked  out  the  life  cycle  of  a 
few  plants  and  one  insectoidal 
form.” 

“They  all  look  like  insects.  But  go 
on.” 

“The  first  expedition  established 
no  more  than  that  Mercurian  life  has 
a silicate  base,”  recapitulated  Navar- 
ro. “Otherwise  they  were  too  busy 
staying  alive  and  teaching  English  to 
the  natives  and  making  maps.  But 
they  brought  home  specimens,  which 
were  analyzed.  And  one  strange  fact 
became  evident:  those  specimens 
could  not  reproduce  under  Twilight 
Zone  conditions.  Yet  they  live  herd 
And  we  see  the  natives  lay  eggs, 
which  hatch;  and  lower  forms  bring 
forth  their  own  kind  in  various 
ways — ” 

“I  know,”  grunted  Kingsbury. 
“But  why?  I mean,  what’s  so  puz- 
zling about  their  reproduction?” 

“The  cells  are  totally  different, 


LIFE  CYCLE 


55 


both  physically  and  chemically,  from 
protoplasmic  life,”  said  Navarro. 
“But  there  are  analogues;  there  have 
to  be.  The  basic  process  is  the  same, 
meiosis  and  mitosis,  governed  by  a 
molecular  ‘blueprint’  not  unlike  our 
chromosomes.  However,  though  we 
know  that  such  processes  must  take 
place,  the  silicate  materials  involved 
are  too  stable  to  undergo  them.  The 
ordinary  exothermic  reactions  which 
fuel  Mercurian  hfe  do  not  produce 
enough  energy  for  the  cell-duplica- 
tion which  is  growth.  In  fact,  adult 
Mercurians  are  even  incapable  of 
self-repair;  wounds  do  not  heal,  they 
must  depend  on  being  so  tough  that 
in  this  low  gravity  they  suffer  few 
injuries.” 

“So  what  happens?” 

Navarro  shrugged.  “I  do  not 
know,  except  this  much:  that  some- 
how, at  breeding  time,  they  must 
pick  up  an  extra  charge  of  energy. 
Analyzing  small  animals,  I have 
identified  the  compound  which  is 
formed  to  store  this  energy  and  re- 
lease it,  by  gradually  breaking 
down,  as  the  organism  grows.  It  is 
all  used  up  at  maturity.  But  where 
is  the  temperature  necessary  to  build 
up  this  molecule?  Only  on  Dayside. 

“Now  these  gods  are  said  to  live 
on  Dayside  and  meet  the  Twonks  of 
Twilight  at  the  temple.  You  know 
the  breeding  ceremonies  take  place 
when  hbration  has  brought  the  tem- 
ple into  the  sunlight.” 

“Go  on,”  said  Antella  thought- 
fully. 

“Pues,  one  of  the  plants  has  this 


life  cycle:  it  grows  in  the  Twilight 
Zone,  on  the  sunward  side,  and  its 
vines  are  phototropic.  Eventually 
their  growth  and  the  libration  bring 
them  into  the  light.  The  spore-pods 
burst  and  the  spores  are  scattered 
into  the  air.  A few  are  blown  back 
into  Twilight,  and  they  are  now 
fertile;  radiation  has  formed  the  nec- 
essary compound.  Or  consider  one 
of  the  small  insectoids  I studied.  It 
breeds  here  in  the  usual  manner, 
then  the  female  crawls  out  into  the 
light  to  lay  her  eggs.  When  they 
hatch,  the  little  ones  scurry  back  to 
the  shade,  and  some  of  them  reach 
shelter  before  they  fry.  Wasteful,  of 
course,  but  even  on  this  barren  plan- 
et nature  is  a notorious  spendthrift.” 

“Wait  a minute!”  interrupted 
Kingsbury.  Navarro  liked  to  hear 
himself  talk,  but  there  are  limits. 
“Are  you  implying  that  the  Dayside 
gods  are  merely  the  sun?  That  be- 
cause the  Twonks  have  to  have  light 
when  they  breed,  they’ve  built  up  a 
sort  of  Apollo-cum-fertility  cult?” 

“Why  not?  There  are  races  on 
Earth  and  Mars  with  similar  beliefs. 
To  this  day,  here  and  there  in  my 
own  Pyrenees,  many  women  believe 
the  wind  can  make  them  pregnant.” 
Navarro  laughed.  “It  is  a good  ex- 
cuse anyhow,  no?” 

“But  damn  it,  there’s  Dayside  life 
too.  Life  that  never  comes  into  Twi- 
light.” 

“Yes,  yes,  of  course.  Quite  differ- 
ent from  Twilight  biology — after  all, 
it  has  to  live  at  a temperature  of  four 
hundred  degrees  Centigrade.  Possi- 


56 

bly  the  Twonks  regard  some  Day- 
side  animal  as  a sort  of  fertility 
totem.  I am  only  saying  this:  that  if 
the  gods  are  actually  the  sun,  you 
will  have  Satan’s  own  time  persuad- 
ing the  sun  to  take  back  its  edict 
that  we  must  die.” 

In  the  end,  there  was  a decision. 
Navarro  thought  Kingsbury  a sui- 
cidal idiot  . . . but  what  choice  was 
there  They  would  go  to  the  temple 
together,  disguised,  and  find  out 
what  they  could;  if  there  were  no 
gods,  but  only  some  fanatically  con- 
servative priestess  behind  the  death 
sentence,  a .20-caliber  Magnum  auto- 
matic might  make  her  see  reason. 
Amelia  would  stay  behind  to  guard 
the  ship;  he  couldn’t  take  heat  as 
well  as  an  Earthling. 

The  humans  donned  their  space- 
suits  and  went  through  the  airlock. 
Navarro  had  the  gun,  Kingsbury 
armed  himself  with  a crowbar;  at 
last  and  worst,  he  thought  savagely, 
he’d  crack  a few  Mercurian  cara- 
paces. 

They  stepped  out  into  desolation. 
Behind  them  lay  the  Explorer,  a 
crippled  metal  giant,  no  more  to 
them  than  a shelter.  In  the  end,  per- 
haps, a coffin.  There  was  no  possi- 
bility of  rescue  from  Earth — radio 
communication  was  out,  with  the 
sun  so  close,  and  Mercury  Expedi- 
tion Two  wasn’t  due  back  for  six 
months.  Earth  wouldn’t  even  realize 
they  were  in  trouble  till  they  had 
already  died. 

To  right  and  left,  the  dry  valley 


FANTASY  AND  SCIENCE  FICTION 

lifted  into  gaunt  ocherous  peaks, 
against  a dusky  sky  where  a few 
hard  stars  glittered.  There  were 
bushes  scattered  about,  low  things 
with  blue  metallic-looking  leaves.  A 
small  animal  bounded  from  them, 
its  shell  agleam  in  the  wan  light. 
The  ground  was  slaty  rubble,  flaked 
off  in  departed  ages  when  Mercury 
Still  had  weather.  Above  the  peaks  to 
the  left  hung  a white  glare,  the  in- 
visible sun.  It  would  never  be  seen 
from  here,  but  a few  miles  further 
west  the  planet’s  libration  would 
lift  it  briefly  and  unendurably  over 
the  near  horizon. 

There  was  a wind  blorving;  the 
wind  is  never  quiet  on  Mercury, 
where  one  side  is  hot  enough  to  melt 
lead  and  the  other  close  to  absolute 
zero.  It  sent  a ghostly  whirl  of  dust- 
devils  across  the  valley.  There 
wasn’t  much  air:  a man  would  have 
called  it  a soft  vacuum,  and  not  fit 
to  breathe  at  any  density.  Most  of  it 
had  long  ago  escaped  into  space  or 
frozen  on  Darkside,  but  now  vapor 
pressure  had  struck  a balance  and 
there  was  some  carbon  dioxide,  nitro- 
gen, ammonia,  and  inert  gas  free. 
Enough  to  blow  fine  dust  up  against 
the  weak  gravity,  and  to  form  an 
ionosphere  which  made  radio  com- 
munication possible  over  the 
horizon. 

Kingsbury  shuddered,  remember- 
ing green  forests  and  clear  streams 
under  the  lordly  sky  of  Earth.  What 
the  devil  had  inspired  him  to  come 
here?  Money,  he  supposed.  Earth 
needed  fissionable  ores  and  Mercury 


life  cycle 


57 


had  them,  and  Expedition  Two  was 
sent  to  negotiate  an  agreement  with 
the  natives.  The  pay  was  propor- 
tional to  the  risk  . . . but  what  use 
is  all  the  money  in  the  cosmos  to  a 
dead  man? 

“When  I get  home,”  said  Navarro 
wistfully,  “after  the  parades  and  ban- 
quets— yes,  surely  there  will  be  par- 
ades, with  all  the  pretty  girls  throw- 
ing flowers  and  kisses  at  us — after 
that  I shall  retire  to  my  own  village 
and  sit  down  before  the  tavern  and 
order  a bottle  of  the  best  Amontil- 
lado. Three  days  later  I will  ask 
them  to  sweep  the  cobwebs  off  me. 
A week  later  I shall  go  home  and 
sleep.” 

“I’ll  settle  for  a tall  cold  beer  in 
Gavagan’s,”  said  Kingsbury.  “You 
ought  to  let  me  take  you  pubcrawl- 
ing in  New  York  sometime — Bah!” 
His  gauntleted  hand  made  a vicious 
gesture  at  the  tumbled  ruin  of  a 
landscape.  “What  makes  you  think 
we  ever  will  get  home?” 

“Nothing,”  said  Navarro  gently, 
“except  that  I will  not  permit  my- 
self to  think  otherwise.” 

They  rounded  a tall  red  crag  and 
saw  how  the  valley  broadened  into 
cultivated  fields,  ironberry  bushes 
and  flintgrain  stalks.  On  the  dusky 
edge  of  vision  was  the  Mercurian 
hive,  a giant  dome  of  crushed  rock 
in  which  several  thousand  natives 
dwelt.  There  were  hundreds  of  such 
barracks,  scattered  around  the  Twi- 
light Zone,  with  a temple  for  every 
dozen  or  so.  Apparently  there  was 
no  variation  in  language  or  culture 


over  the  whole  planet — understand- 
able when  the  habitable  area  was  so 
small.  And  it  was  an  open  question 
how  much  individual  personality  a 
Mercurian  had,  and  how  much  of 
her  belonged  to  the  hive-mind. 

Close  at  hand  was  the  hut  which 
held  their  lives.  It  was  a crude,  roof- 
less structure,  four  stone  walls  and 
an  open  doorway.  The  first  expedi- 
tion had  erected  it  with  native  help, 
to  store  supplies  and  tools — it  made 
the  ship  roomier.  The  Explorer’s 
crew  had  used  it  similarly,  putting 
in  most  of  their  food  and  the  bulky 
ion<ontrol  rings  from  the  reaction 
drive.  Again  the  natives  had  lent  a 
willing  hand. 

There  were  four  guards  outside 
the  hut.  They  were  armed  only  with 
spears  and  clubs.  It  would  be  easy 
enough  to  shoot  them  down.  But 
before  anything  could  be  transferred 
back  to  the  ship,  the  entire  hive 
would  come  swarming,  and  there 
weren’t  that  many  bullets. 

“Let’s  go  talk  to  them,”  said  Na- 
varro. 

“What’s  the  use?”  asked  Kings- 
bury. “I’ve  talked  to  those  animated 
hulks  till  my  larynx  needs  a re- 
tread.” 

“I  have  an  idea — I want  to  check 
on  it.”  Navarro’s  clumsy  suit  went 
skimming  over  the  ashen  ground. 
Kingsbury  followed  with  a mum- 
bled oath. 

The  nearest  guard  hefted  her  spear 
and  swiveled  antennae  in  their  direc- 
tion. Otherwise  there  was  no  move- 
ment in  her.  She  stood  six  feet  tall. 


58 


FANTASY  AND  SCIENCE  FICTION 


broad  as  a spacesuited  man,  her  exo- 
skeleton shimmering  blue,  her  head 
featureless  except  for  the  glassy  eyes. 
With  four  three-fingered  arms,  tight- 
ly curled  ovipositor,  and  sliding 
joints  of  armor,  she  looked  like  a 
nightmare  insect.  But  she  wasn’t; 
a dragonfly  or  a beetle  was  man’s 
brother  beside  this  creature  of  sili- 
cone cells  and  silicate  blood  and 
shell  of  beryllium  alloy.  Kingsbury 
thought  of  her  as  a kind  of  robot — 
well,  yes,  she  was  alive,  but  where 
did  you  draw  the  line  between  the 
robot  and  the  animal  ? 

Navarro  stopped  before  her.  She 
waited.  None  of  her  sisters  moved. 
It  was  a disconcerting  habit,  never 
to  open  conversation. 

The  Basque  cleared  his  throat.  “I 
have  come — oh,  hell.”  With  his  teeth 
he  switched  his  helmet  radio  to  the 
band  the  natives  could  sense.  “I  wish 
to  ask  again  why  you  deny  us  per- 
mission to  use  our  own  food.” 

The  answer  crackled  in  their  ear- 
phones. “It  is  the  command  of  the 
gods.” 

Kingsbury  stood  listening  to  that 
nonhuman  accent  and  speculating 
just  what  sort  of  religion  these  en- 
tities did  have.  They  had  emotions — 
they  must,  being  alive — ^but  the  de- 
gree of  correspondence  to  human  or 
Martian  feeling  was  doubtful. 

It  wasn’t  strange  that  they  com- 
municated by  organically  generated 
FM  radio  pulses.  The  atmosphere 
didn’t  carry  enough  sound  to  make 
ears  worthwhile.  But  constant  sub- 
mergence in  the  thoughts  of  every 


other  Mercurian  within  ten  miles 
...  it  must  do  something  to  the 
personality.  Make  the  society  as  a 
whole  more  intelligent,  perhaps— 
the  natives  had  readily  learned  Eng- 
lish from  the  first  expedition,  while 
men  hadn’t  yet  made  sense  out  of  the 
native  language.  But  there  was  prob- 
ably little  individual  awareness.  A 
sort  of  ant  mind:  ants  collectively 
did  remarkable  things  but  were  hope- 
less when  alone. 

Navarro  smiled,  a meaningless  au- 
tomatic grimace  behind  his  face- 
plate. “Can  you  not  tell  me  why  the 
gods  have  so  decreed.?  You  were  all 
friendly  enough  when  my  race  last 
visited  you.  What  made  the  gods 
change  their  minds?” 

No  answer.  That  probably  meant 
the  Twonk  didn’t  know  either. 

“You  could  at  least  let  us  have 
back  our  control  rings  and  enough 
food  for  the  journey  home.  I assure 
you,  we  would  leave  at  once.” 

“No.”  The  voice  was  alike  empty 
of  rancor  and  mercy.  “It  is  required 
that  you  die.  The  next  strangers  to 
come  will,  then,  not  be  forewarned 
and  we  can  dispose  of  them  too. 
This  land  will  be  shunned.” 

“If  we  get  desperate  enough,  we 
will  start  fighting  you.  We  will  kill 
many.” 

“That  I — we  do  not  understand. 
We  are  letting  you  die  this  way 
because  it  is  easiest.  If  you  fight  us, 
then  we  shall  fight  you,  and  over- 
whelm you  with  numbers;  so  why 
do  you  not  die  without  making  use- 
less trouble  for  yourselves?” 


Lira  CYCLE 


“That  isn’t  in  our  nature.” 

“I — we  do  not  know  what  you 
mean  by  ‘nature.’  Every  She,  when 
she  has  laid  as  many  eggs  as  she  can, 
goes  out  to  the  sun  and  returns  to 
those  which  you  name  gods.  Death 
is  a correct  termination  when  there 
is  no  further  use  for  the  organism.” 

“Men  think  differently,”  said  Na- 
varro. “Of  course,  as  a more  or  less 
good  Catholic,  I consider  my  body 
only  a husk  . . . but  I still  want  to 
keep  it  as  long  as  possible.” 

No  reply,  except  for  some  crack- 
ling gibberish.  The  Mercurians  were 
talking  to  each  other.  Weaker  over- 
tones made  Kingsbury  suspect  that 
several  Twonks  within  the  hive  were 
joining  the  discussion — or  the  stream 
of  consciousness,  or  whatever  you 
wanted  to  call  the  rumination  of  a 
semi-collective  mind. 

“Look  here,  my  friend,”  said  Na- 
varro. “You  know  our  purposes.  We 
want  to  get  certain  minerals  from 
you.  You  have  no  use  for  them,  and 
we  would  pay  you  well,  in  tools  and 
machinery  you  cannot  make  for 
yourselves.” 

“It  would  be  mutually  advantage- 
ous,” agreed  the  Twonk.  “When 
the  first  ship  came,  we  considered  it 
an  excellent  idea.  But  since  then  the 
gods  have  told  us  your  sort  must  not 
be  allowed  to  live,” 

‘Tor  Dios!  Why?” 

“The  gods  did  not  say.” 

“You  serve  these  gods,”  said  Na- 
varro harshly.  “I  believe  you  give 
them  food  . . . right?  And  tools  and 
anything  else  they  want.  You  obey 


59 

their  least  whim.  What  do  you  gain 
from  them?” 

No  answer, 

“Can  we  talk  to  these  gods?  May- 
be we  can  persuade  them — ” 

“It  is  forbidden  you  to  see  the 
Living  Light.”  Another  conference. 
“Perhaps  you  will  agree  to  die  and 
stop  bothering  us  if  we  tell  you  the 
gods  are  needful  to  our  life.  They 
give  us  pure  metal — ” 

“Most  of  which  you  make  into 
tools  for  them,”  snapped  Navarro. 
“We  could  do  the  same  for  you.” 

“That  is  a small  thing.  But  the 
gods  are  needful  to  our  life.  It  is  the 
gods  who  put  life  into  our  eggs. 
Without  them  no  young  would  be 
hatched.  It  is  thus  necessary  that  we 
obey  them.” 

“Cut  it  out,  Juan,”  snarled  Kings- 
bury. “I’ve  been  through  this  rig- 
marole a hundred  times.  It’s  no  use.” 

Navarro  nodded  absent-mindedly 
and  trudged  off.  They  switched  to  a 
different  radio  band,  one  the  natives 
could  not  “hear,”  but  said  nothing 
for  a while. 

“Has  it  ever  occurred  to  you,” 
asked  Navarro  finally,  “that  nobody 
has  ever  seen  a male  Mercurian?” 

“Sure.  They’re  hermaphrodites.” 

“That  was  assumed  by  the  first 
expedition.  An  assumption  only,  of 
course.  They  could  not  vivisect  a live 
Twonk—” 

“/  sure  could!” 

“ — and  the  old  ones  all  go  out  on 
Dayside  to  die.  The  only  chance  for 
anatomical  studies  would  be  to  find 
one  which  had  met  a violent  end 


60 

here  in  Twilight,  and  there  was  al- 
ways too  much  else  to  do.” 

“Well,  why  shouldn’t  they  be  her- 
maphrodites? Oysters  are.” 

“At  certain  times  of  the  year.  But 
oysters  are  a low  form  of  life.  On 
Earth,  Mars  and  Venus,  the  higher 
one  goes  on  the  evolutionary  scale, 
the  more  sharp  the  distinction  be- 
tween the  sexes." 

“All  right,  maybe  their  males  are 
very  small.” 

“As  with  some  fish?  Possibly.  But 
most  improbable.  All  their  eggs  are 
about  the  same  size,  you  know,” 

“Who  cares?”  snorted  Kingsbury, 
“I  just  want  to  go  home.” 

“I  care.  I have  a tidy  mind.  And, 
too — Earth  needs  that  uranium  and 
thorium.  We  will  never  get  it  unless 
we  can  circumvent  this  religion  of 
theirs,  either  by  persuading  the  gods 
or  by  . . . hm  . . . destroying  the 
cult.  But  to  accomplish  the  latter,  we 
will  first  have  to  understand  the 
creed.” 

They  came  out  on  a road  of  sorts, 
a narrow  track  in  the  shale,  stamped 
out  by  thousands  of  years  of  feet. 
There  were  natives  working  in  the 
fields,  and  before  the  hive  they  could 
see  smiths  hammering  cold  iron  and 
copper  into  implements.  A few 
young  were  in  sight,  unhumanly 
solemn  at  their  play.  None  paid  any 
attention  to  the  outworlders. 

Navarro  pointed  to  a smith.  “It  is 
true  what  the  Twonk  said,  that  the 
gods  supply  their  metal?” 

“Yes,”  said  Kingsbury.  “At  least, 
so  I’ve  been  told,  and  I do  think  the 


FANTASY  AND  SCIENCE  FICTION 

Twonks  are  unable  to  tell  a lie.  Be- 
ing radio-telepathic,  y’know,  they 
couldn’t  lie  to  each  other,  so  the 
idea  would  never  occur  to  them.” 

“Hm  . . . they  do  not  have  fire 
here,  not  in  this  sleazy  atmosphere. 
They  must  have  been  in  a crude 
neolithic  stage  until  the  gods  started 
smelting  ores  for  them.  I imagine 
that  could  be  done  with  mirrors 
focusing  the  Dayside  heat  on — oh,  a 
mixture  of  crushed  hematite  and 
some  reducing  material.” 

“Uh-huh.  And  the  gods  get  the 
pick  of  whatever  the  Twonks  make 
out  of  the  metal.”  Kingsbury  cleared 
his  throat  to  spit,  remembered  he 
was  in  a spacesuit,  and  swallowed, 
“It’s  perfectly  clear,  Juan.  There  are 
two  intelligent  races  on  Mercury. 
The  Daysiders  have  set  up  in  busi- 
ness as  gods.  They  don’t  want 
humans  around  because  they’re 
afraid  we’ll  spoil  their  racket  and 
make  ’em  work  for  a living.” 

“Obviously,”  said  Navarro.  “The 
problem  is,  how  to  convince  the 
Twonks  of  this?  To  do  that,  we 
shall  first  have  to  study  the  nature 
of  the  Dayside  beings.” 

They  mounted  a razorback  ridge 
and  clapped  down  glare  filters.  Be- 
fore them  was  the  sun. 

It  burned  monstrous  on  the  hori- 
zon, a white  fury  that  drowned  the 
stars  and  leaped  back  off  the  with- 
ered land.  Even  here,  with  shadows 
lapping  his  feet  and  the  refrigera- 
tion unit  at  full  blast,  Kingsbury 
felt  how  the  heat  licked  at  him. 

“God!”  he  whispered.  “How  far 


LIFE  CYCLE 


61 


can  we  go  into  that  blazing  hell?” 

“Not  very  far,”  said  Navarro.  “We 
shall  have  to  hope  some  Twonks 
died  close  by.  Come!”  He  broke 
into  long  low-gravity  bounds,  down 
the  slope  and  out  onto  the  plain. 

Squinting  through  tormented  eyes, 
Kingsbury  made  out  a shimmering 
pool  at  the  horizon.  It  spouted  as  he 
watched  . . . molten  lead?  With  the 
speed  he  had  and  the  sharp  curvature 
of  the  surface,  the  sun  was  rising 
visibly  as  he  ran. 

Even  here  there  was  life.  A crystal- 
line tree  squatted  near  a raw  pin- 
nacle, stiff  and  improbable.  A small 
thing  with  many  legs  scuttcred 
away,  shell  too  bright  to  look  at.  Bas- 
ically, Dayside  life  had  the  silicate 
form  of  Twilight,  many  of  the  com- 
pounds identical — a common  ances- 
try a billion  years  ago,  when  Mer- 
cury still  had  water — but  this  life 
was  adapted  to  a heat  that  made  lead 
run  liquid. 

“This  . . . road  . . . goes  on,” 
panted  Kingsbury.  “Must  be  ...  a 
graveyard  . . , somewhere — ” 

His  skin  was  prickling  now,  as 
charged  particles  ate  in  through  the 
armor.  His  underclothing  was  limp 
with  sweat.  His  tongue  felt  like  a 
swollen  lump  of  wood. 

This  was  farther  into  Dayside 
than  men  had  ever  gone  before. 
Through  the  dizziness,  he  won- 
dered how  even  a Twonk  could  sur- 
vive the  trip  . . . only,  of  course, 
they  didn’t.  The  natives  had  told 
the  first  expedition  that  their  old 
ones  went  out  into  the  sunlight  to 


die.  There’d  be  no  one  to  bury  them, 
and  the  shells  weren’t  volatile — 

He  stumbled  over  the  first  one 
before  he  knew  it.  When  his  gaunt- 
lets touched  the  ground,  he  yelled. 
Navarro  pulled  him  up  again.  There 
was  a dazzle  in  their  helmets,  they 
squinted  and  gasped  with  dry  lungs 
and  thought  they  heard  their  brains 
sizzling. 

Dead  Twonks,  thousands  of  them, 
scattered  around  like  broken  ma- 
chines, empty-eyed,  but  the  light  de- 
monic on  their  carapaces  . . . Kings- 
bury picked  one  up.  Even  in  Mercur- 
ian gravity,  it  seemed  to  have  oddly 
little  weight.  Navarro  took  another. 
Its  arms  and  legs  flapped  horribly 
as  he  ran  back  eastward. 

They  never  remembered  that  run- 
ning. After  they  had  fallen  on  the 
dark  side  of  the  ridge,  they  must 
have  fainted,  for  the  next  memory 
was  of  stirring  and  a slow  awareness 
that  they  were  embracing  dead  Mer- 
curians. 

Kingsbury  put  his  lips  to  his  can- 
teen nozzle  and  sucked  water  up 
the  hose.  It  was  nearly  scalding,  but 
he  had  never  drained  so  sweet  a 
draught.  Then  he.  lay  and  shud- 
dered for  another  long  while. 

“Bueno"  croaked  his  companion. 
“We  made  it.” 

They  sat  up  and  regarded  their 
loot.  Both  shells  had  split  open 
down  the  front,  along  the  line  of 
weakness  where  the  ventral  scutes 
joined.  They  had  expected  to  find 
the  shriveled  remnants  of  “organic” 
material,  dried  flesh  and  blackened 


62 

tendons  and  collapsed  veins.  But 
there  was  nothing. 

The  shells  were  empty. 

It  was  a long  circuitous  walk  back 
to  the  ship.  They  didn’t  want  any 
natives  to  see  them.  After  that  there 
was  a wonderful  time  of  sleeping 
while  Amelia  worked. 

They  didn’t  stop  to  think  about 
the  implications  until  it  was  too  late 
to  think  very  much  at  all.  Sunrise 
would  occur  at  the  temple  in  a few 
hours,  and  it  was  quite  a ways  from 
here. 

Antella’s  claw-like  hands  gestured 
proudly  at  the  shells.  “See,  I have 
hinged  the  front  plates  so  you  can 
get  in  and  out.  Your  radios  are  con- 
nected to  the  antennae,  though  how 
you  expect  to  talk  Mercurian  if  any- 
one converses  with  you,  I do  not 
understand.  This  harness  will  sup- 
port the  shells  around  your  suits.  Na- 
turally, you  cannot  use  the  lower 
arms,  but  I have  wired  them  into  a 
life-like  position.” 

Kingsbury  drew  hard  on  a cigaret. 
It  might  be  the  last  one  he  ever 
smoked.  “Nice  work,”  he  said. 
“Now  as  for  the  plan  itself,  we’ll  just 
have  to  play  by  ear.  We’II  get  inside 
the  temple  with  the  others,  see  what 
we  can  see,  and  hope  to  get  out 
again  undamaged.  If  necessary,  we’ll 
shuck  these  disguises  and  fight  our 
way  back  here.  Even  in  spacesuits, 
we  can  outrun  any  Twonk.” 

Navarro  shook  his  head.  “A  most 
forlorn  hope,”  he  muttered.  “And  if 
we  should  succeed,  do  you  realize 


FANTASY  AND  SCIENCE  FICTION 

how  many  xenologists  will  pour  the 
vials  of  wrath  on  our  heads  for 
disrupting  native  culture?” 

“That  bothers  me  a lot,”  snorted 
Kingsbury. 

“I,  of  course,  can  claim  to  be 
carrying  out  the  historic  traditions 
of  my  own  people,”  said  Navarro 
blandly.  “It  was  not  the  Saracens, 
but  the  Basques  who  slew  Roland  at 
Roncesvalles.” 

“Why’d  they  do  that?” 

“They  didn’t  like  the  way  Charle- 
magne was  throwing  his  weight 
around.  Unfortunately,  you,  my 
friend,  cannot  say  you  are  merely 
preserving  your  own  culture.  These 
Twonks  have  no  scalps  to  lift.” 

“Hell,”  said  Kingsbury,  “my  cul- 
ture for  the  past  hundred  years  has 
been  building  skyscrapers  and 
bridges.  Come  on,  let’s  shove.” 

It  was  a clumsy  business  getting 
into  the  shells,  but  once  the  plates 
were  latched  shut  and  the  harness 
adjusted,  it  was  not  too  awkward  a 
disguise.  The  heads  could  not  be 
turned  on  their  necks  when  you 
wore  a spacehelmet  inside,  but  An- 
tella  had  filled  the  empty  eye-sockets 
with  wide-angle  lenses.  Kingsbury 
hoped  he  wouldn’t  be  required  to 
wink,  or  move  all  four  arms,  or 
waggle  the  ovipositor,  or  speak  Mer- 
curian; but  otherwise,  if  he  was 
careful,  he  ought  to  pass  muster. 

The  humans  left  the  ship  and 
went  down  the  valley,  moving  with 
the  stiff  native  stride.  Not  till  they 
were  past  the  hive  did  they  speak. 
Kingsbury’s  belly  muscles  were  taut. 


LIFE  CYCLE 


63 


but  none  of  the  autochthones  paid 
him  any  special  heed.  It  was  for- 
tunate that  the  Mercurians  were  not 
given  to  idle  gossip. 

Presently  he  found  himself  on  a 
broad,  smoothly  laid  road.  It  ran 
straight  northwest,  through  a forest 
of  gleaming  barrel-shaped  plants 
where  the  small  wildlife  of  Twilight 
scuttled  off  into  the  dusk.  More  and 
more  natives  joined  them,  tall  sol- 
emn figures  streaming  in  from  side 
roads  onto  the  highway.  Many  were 
laden  with  gifts,  iron  tools  and  flash- 
ing gems  and  exquisitely  wrought 
stone  vessels  . . . did  the  gods  drink 
molten  lead  out  of  those?  There  was 
no  speech  on  the  communication 
band,  only  the  quiet  pulse  of  cur- 
rents oscillating  in  nerves  that  were 
silver  wires. 

Ghostly  journey,  through  a dark 
chaotic  wilderness  of  rock  and  crys- 
talline forest,  among  a swarm  of 
creatures  out  of  dreams.  It  shocked 
Kingsbury  how  small  man  and 
man’s  knowledge  were  in  the  illimit- 
able universe. 

He  switched  to  the  other  band 
and  said  harshly,  “Juan,  maybe  we 
are  nuts.  Even  if  we  get  away  with 
it,  what  can  we  hope  to  do?  Suppose 
one  of  these  Twonks  pulled  a simi- 
lar stunt  in  your  church  — wouldn’t 
that  just  make  you  fighting  mad?’’ 

“Yes,  of  course,”  answered  the 
other  man.  “Unless  by  such  means 
the  Twonk  proved  to  me  that  my 
faith  was  based  on  a fraud.  Natur- 
ally, she  would  not  be  able  to  do  so; 
but  assuming  for  the  sake  of  dis- 


cussion that  she  did,  my  philosophy 
would  come  crashing  down  about 
my  ears.  Then  I should  be  quite 
ready  to  listen  to  her.” 

“But  God!  How  can  we  imagine 
these  critters  think  like  us?” 

“They  don’t.  But  that  is  in  our 
favor,  because  they  are  actually  more 
logical  than  we  humans.  They  have 
freely  admitted  that  the  only  reason 
they  obey  the  gods  is  that  those  are 
essential  to  fertility.” 

“Well  . . . maybe  the  gods  are!” 

“Yes,  yes,  I am  quite  sure  of  it. 
But  I am  equally  sure  that  there  is 
nothing  supernatural  about  it.  Sup- 
pose, for  instance,  that  a dose  of 
sunlight  is  necessary  for  reproduc- 
tion. A class  of  priestesses  may  have 
capitalized  on  this  fact — I am  not 
sure  how,  given  the  Mercurian  tele- 
pathy, but  perhaps  the  priestesses  can 
think  on  a different  band.  Now  if 
we  can  show  that  the  sunlight  alone 
is  required,  and  the  priestesses  are 
mere  window-dressing,  then  I am 
sure  the  Twonks  will  get  rid  of 
them.” 

Kingsbury  grinned  with  scant 
mirth.  “And  we’re  supposed  to  find 
this  out  and  prove  it  in  one 
ghmpse?” 

“This  was  originally  your  idea, 
amigo.” 

“Yeh.  Please  don’t  rub  it  in.” 

They  walked  on,  silent,  thinking 
of  Earth’s  remote  loveliness.  An  hour 
passed.  It  grew  hotter,  and  the  west- 
ern blaze  climbed  into  the  sky  until 
you  could  see  the  great  lens  of 
zodiacal  light  just  above  the  hills. 


64 

and  more  natives  joined  the  proces- 
sion until  there  were  several  thous- 
and pouring  along  the  road.  Kings- 
bury and  Navarro  stayed  close  to- 
gether, near  the  middle  of  the  crowd. 

Black  against  the  blinding  sky, 
they  saw  the  temple.  It  stood  on  a 
high  ridge,  a columned  building  of 
red  granite,  curiously  reminiscent  of 
old  Egyptian  work.  A flat  roof  cov- 
ered the  front  half;  the  rear  was 
open,  but  walled  off  from  sight. 

The  pilgrimage  moved  between 
basalt  statues  onto  a flagged  plaza 
before  the  temple.  There  it  halted, 
motionless  as  only  a non-breathing 
Mercurian  can  be.  Kingsbury  tuned 
back  to  the  communication  band 
and  heard  that  they  were  chanting — 
at  least,  he  supposed  the  eery  whin- 
ing rise-and-fall  of  radio  pulses  was 
music.  He  kept  his  own  mouth  shut; 
no  one  in  that  entranced  collectivity 
would  realize  he  wasn’t  joining  in. 

A line  of  Mercurians  emerged  from 
the  colonnade.  They  must  be  priest- 
esses or  servitors,  for  there  were 
geometric  patterns  daubed  on  their 
shells.  They  halted  before  the  wor- 
shipers. Gravely,  those  who  bore 
gifts  advanced,  bowed  down,  and 
laid  them  at  the  feet  of  the  clergy. 
The  articles  were  picked  up  and 
carried  back  into  the  temple. 

Kingsbury  sweated  and  shivered 
in  his  spacesuit.  What  if  the  ritual 
included  some  fancy  dance.'*  He 
hoped  Navarro,  who  had  the  gun, 
could  break  out  of  his  shell  fast 
enough  to  use  it.  None  of  the 
natives  were  armed,  and  a human 


FANTASY  AND  SCIENCE  FICTION 

was  a match  for  any  ten  Mercurians, 
but  there  must  be  five  thousand  of 
them  around  him. 

The  glare  became  a sudden  flame. 
Sunrise!  The  shadow  of  the  temple 
fell  over  the  plaza,  but  Kingsbury 
narrowed  his  eyes  to  slits  and  still 
his  head  ached. 

He  was  dimly  aware  of  the  priest- 
esses returning.  Their  voices  twit- 
tered, and  the  chant  ended.  A hun- 
dred Mercurians  walked  forth,  up 
the  stairs  and  into  the  doorway.  An- 
other hundred  and  another  hundred 
. . . They  were  not  quite  so  impas- 
sive now.  Kingsbury  could  see  that 
those  near  him  were  trembling  with 
excitement. 

Now  his  and  Navarro’s  line  was 
on  the  move.  He  saw  that  one  of  the 
priestesses  was  leading  them.  They 
entered  between  the  pillars  and  went 
across  a room  of  mosaics  and  down 
a hall.  At  its  end  were  passages 
leading  to  a number  of  roofless 
courts  into  which  the  sunlight  fell. 
His  party  took  one. 

The  priestess  stood  aside,  and  the 
procession  went  on  in. 

Against  the  radiance,  Kingsbury 
could  just  see  that  there  was  a door- 
way on  the  western  side  and  that 
daises  were  built  into  the  floor.  The 
Twonks  were  settling  themselves  on 
those,  waiting — He  switched  to  the 
private  band:  “Juan,  what  happens 
now.?’’ 

“What  do  you  think.?”  answered 
the  Basque.  His  voice  shook,  but 
there  was  a wryness  in  it.  “This  is 
where  they  breed,  isn’t  it.?” 


LIFE  CYCLE 


65 


“If  one  of  ’em  makes  a pass  at  me 
—shall  I try  to  play  along?” 

“I  think  there  is  something  against 
it  in  Leviticus — nor  could  you,  ah, 
respond.  ...  We  shall  probably  have 
to  run  for  our  lives.  But  they  are  all 
lying  down.  Find  yourself  a couch!” 

There  was  a stillness  that 
stretched.  The  heat  blasted  and 
gnawed.  Even  the  Twonks  couldn’t 
endure  it  for  very  long  at  a time. 
Something  would  have  to  take  place 
-soon,  unless — 

“Juan!  Maybe  they’re  what-you- 
call-it,  virgin  birth.  Maybe  the  sun 
fertilizes  them.” 

“No.  Not  parthenogenetic.  It  has 
not  the  evolutionary  potentiality  to 
produce  intelligent  life — it  does  not 
■give  variant  zygotes.  Sunlight  is  nec- 
essary but  not  sufficient,  I think. 
And  I still  cannot  believe  they  are 
true  hermaphrodites.  Somewhere 
there  must  be  males.” 

Almost,  Kingsbury  jerked.  It  was 
a tremendous  effort  to  hold  himself 
rigid,  to  wait  in  the  shimmering, 
dazzling  devil-dance  of  light  as  all 
the  natives  were  waiting.  “I’ve  got 
it!  The  gods — they  are  the  males!” 

“That  is  clear  enough,”  said  Na- 
varro impatiently.  “I  deduced  it 
hours  ago.  But  if  the  case  is  so  sim- 
ple, I am  not  hopeful.  The  males 
can  still  claim  to  be  a different, 
superior  order  of  life,  as  they  indeed 
already  do.  We  shall  need  a more 
fundamental  discovery  to  upset  this 
male-worshiping  cult.” 

Navarro’s  voice  snapped  off. 
Flame  stood  in  the  doorway. 


No  . . . the  tall  lizard-like  forms, 
in  burnished  coppery  scales, 
wreathed  in  silvery  vapor — they 
glowed,  walking  dragons,  but  they 
did  not  burn  . . . they  advanced, 
through  the  doorway  and  into  the 
courtyard.  Their  beaks  gaped,  and 
the  small  dark  eyes  held  sun-sparks, 
and  the  tails  lashed  their  taloned 
feet.  More  and  more  of  them,  stalk- 
ing in,  one  to  a Twonk,  and  ap- 
proaching with  hands  held  out. 

The  males  of  Mercury  . . . Day- 
side  life,  charged  with  the  energy 
from  the  sun  which  made  new  life 
possible,  sweating  out  pure  quick- 
silver to  cool  them  so  they  wouldn’t 
fry  their  mates  . . . was  it  any  won- 
der they  were  thought  divine? 

But  Judas!  It  wasn’t  possible!  Male 
and  female  had  to  come  from  the 
same  race,  evolving  together — they 
couldn’t  have  arisen  separately,  one 
in  the  hell  of  Dayside  and  one  in 
the  endless  purgatorial  dusk  of  Twi- 
light. The  same  mothers  had  to  bear 
them;  and  yet,  and  yet,  Twonk  eggs 
only  brought  forth  Twonks — 

Then — 

The  knowledge  bit  home  as  a 
dragon  neared  Kingsbury.  The  male 
was  hesitating,  the  lean  head  wove 
back  and  forth  ...  an  alien  smell? 
A subtle  wrongness  of  posture? 

The  Mohawk  sat  up  and  yelled. 
The  dragon  spouted  mercury  vapor 
and  crouched.  Teeth  made  to  shear 
through  rock  flashed  in  the  open 
mouth. 

“Juan,  I’ve  got  it!  I know  what 
they  are!  Let’s  get  back!” 


66 


FANTASY  AND  SCIENCE  FICTION 


Navarro  was  on  his  feet,  fumbling 
at  the  belly  of  his  disguise.  Latches 
clicked  free,  and  he  scrambled  out 
of  it.  The  nearest  dragon  leaped. 
Navarro’s  gun  bucked.  The  male 
fell  with  a hole  blown  through  him 
...  so  much  for  the  immortal  gods, 
the  heavenly  showmen.  Kingsbury 
was  out  of  his  own  shell  now.  A 
female  lunged  at  him.  He  got  her 
around  the  waist  and  pitched  her 
into  the  mob.  Whirling,  he  slugged 
his  way  toward  the  door,  Navarro 
covering  his  back. 

The  dragons  snapped  at  them  but 
didn’t  dare  attack.  There  was  a mo- 
ment of  fury,  then  the  humans  were 
out  on  the  plaza.  They  began  run- 
ning. 

“Now  we’ve  got  to  beat  them  back 
to  the  ship,”  panted  Kingsbury. 

‘-More  than  that,”  said  Navarro. 
“We  must  reach  safety  before  they 
come  near  enough  to  call  the  hive 
and  have  us  intercepted.  I wonder 
if  we  can.” 

“A  man  might  try,”  said  Kings- 
bury. 

The  forward  port  showed  some 
thousands  of  armed  Mercurian  fe- 
males. They  ringed  in  the  ship,  wait- 
ing, too  rational  to  batter  with  use- 
less clubs  at  the  hull  and  too  angry 
to  depart.  There  were  more  of  them 
arriving  every  minute. 

“I  wonder — ” Antella  peered  out. 
He  spoke  coolly,  but  his  feathers 
stood  erect  with  tension.  “I  wonder 
if  they  can  do  worse  to  us  than  they 
have  already  done.  We  will  starve  iio 


faster  besieged  in  here  than  walking 
freely  around.” 

“They  can  get  to  us  if  they  want 
to  work  at  it,”  said  Kingsbury.  “And 
I think  they  do.  They  could  rig  up 
some  kind  of  battering  ram — ” 

Navarro  lit  his  pipe  and  puffed 
hard.  “It  is  our  task  to  persuade 
them  otherwise,”  he  said.  “Do  you 
believe  they  will  listen.?” 

Kingsbury  went  over  to  the  ship’s 
radio  and  sat  down  and  operated 
the  controls  with  nervous  fingers. 
“Let’s  hope  so.  It’s  our  only  chance. 
Do  you  want  to  talk  to  ’em.?” 

“Go  ahead.  You  are  better  with 
the  English  language  than  I.  I will 
perhaps  put  in  an  oar.” 

Kingsbury  switched  on  the  speak- 
er and  brought  bis  lips  to  the  micro- 
phone. “Hello,  out  there,”  he  said. 

His  voice  cut  through  the  seething 
of  Mercurian  tones.  It  was  eldritch 
how  they  snapped  off  all  at  once. 
English,  clear  and  grammatical  and 
subtly  distorted,  answered  him: 

“What  do  you  wish  to  say?  You 
have  violated  the  temple.  The  gods 
order  that  you  must  die." 

“The  gods  would  say  that,”  re- 
plied Kingsbury.  “But  they  are  not 
gods  at  all.  They  want  to  get  rid  of 
us  because  we  can  tell  you  the  truth. 
They’ve  lied  and  cheated  you  for  I 
don’t  know  how  many  centuries.” 

“Truth,  lie,  cheat.  Those  are  words 
we  do  not  know.” 

“Well  . . . uh  . . . truth  is  a cor- 
rect statement,  a statement  of  what  is 
real.  A lie  is  a statement  which  is 
not  truth,  but  made  on  purpose, 


LIFE  CYCLE 


67 


knowing  it  to  be  false.  Cheating  is 
. . . well  . . . damn  it,  I wish  we 
had  a dictionary  along!  The  gods 
have  lied  to  you  so  you  would  do 
what  they  wanted.  That’s  cheating.” 

“We  think  we  understand,”  said 
the  toneless  voice.  “It  is  a new  con- 
cept to  us,  but  a possible  one.  The 
gods  do  not  speak  so  we  can  hear 
them.  They—”  conference,  presum- 
ably recalling  what  the  first  expedi- 
tion had  told  about  radio — “they 
use  a different  band.  They  com- 
municate with  us  by  gestures  only. 
So  are  you  implying  that  they  are 
not  what  they  claim  to  be  and  have 
made  life  unnecessarily  difficult  for 
us  ? ” 

“That’s  it,  pal.”  Kingsbury  still 
didn’t  hke  the  Twonks  much,  but 
he  was  grateful  they  were  so  quick 
on  the  uptake.  “Having  seen  what 
goes  on  in  the  temple,  we  know 
what  these  self-appointed  gods  are. 
They’re  nothing  but  the  males  of 
your  own  species.” 

“What  does  the  word  ‘male’  de- 
note.^” 

“Well — ” Kingsbury  ground  to  a 
halt.  Precisely  how  did  you  explain 
it  in  nickel  words  when  Junior  asked 
where  he  came  from?  He  gave  Na- 
varro a helpless  look.  The  Basque 
grinned,  leaned  over  the  itiicrophone, 
and  gave  a simple  account. 

The  female  collectivity  thought 
about  it  for  a while,  standing  in 
burnished  motionlessness,  then  said 
with  an  unaccustomed  slowness: 
“That  is  logical.  We  have  long  ob- 
served that  certain  of  the  animals 


go  through  the  same  motions  of 
fertilization  as  we  with  the  gods. 
But  whether  you  wish  to  call  them 
gods  or  males  makes  no  difference. 
They  are  still  the  great  ones  who 
give  life.” 

“They  don’t  give  any  more  life 
than  you  do,”  snapped  Kingsbury. 
“They  need  you  just  as  much  as  you 
need  them.  In  fact  . . . they  are 
yourselves!" 

“That  is  an  irrational  statement.” 
Was  there  a defensive  overtone  in 
the  voice?  “Our  eggs  bring  forth 
only  females,  so  it  is  reasonable  to 
suppose  that  the  gods  are  born 
directly  of  the  sun.  A Mercurian 
hatches  from  an  egg  after  the  god- 
male  has  given  life.  She  grows  up 
and  in  her  turn  visits  the  godmales 
and  brings  forth  eggs.  At  last,  grown 
old,  she  goes  to  the  sunlands  and 
dies.  There  is  no  missing  period  in 
which  she  could  become  a godmale,” 

“Oh,  yeah  ? What  about  after  she’s 
gone  sunside?” 

Mercurian  language  gabbled  at 
them. 

Kingsbury  spoke  fast:  “We  went 
out  there  ourselves  and  found  the 
shells  of  those  you  thought  had 
died.  But  the  shells  were  empty! 
You  know  you  have  muscles,  nerves, 
guts,  organs.  Those  ought  to  remain 
in  a dried-out  condition.  But  I re- 
peat, the  shells  were  empty!” 

“Then  . . . but  we  have  only  your 
statement.” 

“You  can  check  up  on  it.  We  can 
rebuild  a spacesuit  for  one  of  you, 
furnish  enough  protection  from  the 


68 


FANTASY  AND  SCIENCE  FICTION 


sun  for  you  to  go  out  there  a while, 
long  enough  to  see.” 

“But  what  happens?  What  is  the 
significance  of  the  empty  shells?” 

“Isn’t  it  obvious,  you  dunder- 
heads? You’re  a kind  of  larval  stage. 
At  the  proper  time,  you  go  out  into 
the  sun.  Its  radiation  changes  you. 
You’re  changed  so  much  that  all 
memory  of  your  past  state  disap- 
pears— your  whole  bodies  have  to  be 
reconstructed,  to  live  on  Dayside. 
But  when  the  process  is  finished, 
you  break  out  of  the  shell  . . . and 
now  you’re  male. 

“Yom  don’t  know  that.  The  male 
comes  out  as  if  newly  born — 
hatched,  I mean.  Probably  his  kind 
meet  him  and  help  him  and  teach 
him.  The  males  discovered  the  truth 
somehow  . . . well,  it  was  easy 
enough  for  them,  since  they  can 
watch  the  whole  life  cycle.  Instead 
of  helping  you  females,  as  nature 
intended,  they  set  themselves  up  as 
gods  and  lived  off  you,  taking  more 
than  they  gave.  And  when  they 
learned  about  us,  they  forbade  you 
to  have  dealings  with  us — because 
they  were  afraid  we’d  learn  the  truth 
and  expose  them. 

“But  they  need  you!  All  you  have 
to  do  is  refuse  to  visit  the  temples 
for  a few  sunrises.  Then  see  how 
fast  they  come  to  terms!” 


“Lysistrata,”  murmured  Navarro. 

For  a time,  then,  the  radio  hissed 
and  crackled  with  the  thinking  of 
many  minds  linked  into  one.  Amelia 
sat  unmoving,  Navarro  fumbled 
with  his  pipe,  Kingsbury  gnawed 
his  lips  and  drummed  on  the  radio 
panel. 

Finally:  “This  is  astonishing  news. 
We  must  investigate.  You  will  pro- 
vide one  of  us  with  a suit  in  which 
to  inspect  Dayside.” 

“Easy  enough,”  said  Kingsbury. 
His  tone  jittered.  “And  if  you  find 
the  shells  really  are  empty,  as  you 
will— what  then?” 

“We  shall  follow  your  advice.  You 
will  be  given  admittance  to  your 
supplies,  and  we  will  discuss  ar- 
rangements for  the  mining  of  those 
ores  which  you  desire.” 

Navarro  found  himself  uncon- 
trollably shaking.  “Saint  Nicholas, 
patron  of  wanderers,”  he  whispered, 
“I  will  build  you  a shrine  for  this.” 

“The  males  may  make  trouble,” 
warned  Antella. 

“If  their  nature  is  as  you  claim,” 
said  the  Twonk  horde,  “they  will 
not  be  difficult  to  control.” 

Kingsbury,  the  American,  won- 
dered if  he  had  planted  the  seeds  of 
another  matriarchy.  Underneath  all 
the  rejoicing,  he  felt  a vague  sense  of 
guilt. 


I’ve  often  referred  to  Ellery  Queen’s  Mystery  Magazine  as  our  sister 
publication.  It’s  now  evident  that  the  sistership  is  virtually  Siamese: 
we  share  much  of  the  same  bloodstream.  Winners  in  EQMM’s  re- 
cently concluded  Twelfth  Annual  Contest  include  Poul  Anderson, 
Robert  Bloch,  Miriam  Allen  dePord,  G.  C.  Edmondson  and  Manly 
Wade  Wellman,  along  with  a half  dozen  less  frequent  P&SP  contribu- 
tors; and  the  winner  of  the  $1500  Pirst  Prize  was  Avram  Davidson. 
In  introducing  Davidson’s  fine  The  Necessity  of  His  Condition 
(EQMM,  April,  1957),  Queen  writes,  "He  has  the  astonishing  knack 
of  being  able  to  write  about  any  geographical  background,  and  about 
any  culture,  ancient  or  modern,  alien  or  native — and  always  with  the 
most  startling  authenticity.”  1 concur  wholeheartedly:  Davidson’s 
EQMM  winner  is  about  the  ante  helium  South;  his  last  P&SP  story 
was  about  Hanoverian  England;  and  each,  one  would  think,  could 
have  been  written  only  by  an  intensive  specialist.  Nor  is  Davidson’s 
ability  to  get  under  the  skin  of  a culture  limited  to  the  long-ago  and 
far-away;  this  new  story,  brief  but  sharply  limned,  could  give  an  alien 
anthropologist  a valuable  insight  into  the  mores  of  prosperous  middle- 
class  Southern  California. 


Summerland 

by  AVRAM  DAVIDSON 


Mary  King  said — and  i’m  sure  it 
was  true — that  she  couldn’t  remem- 
ber a thing  about  the  s&nce  at  Mrs. 
Porteous’s.  Of  course  no  one  tried  to 
refresh  her  memory.  Mary  is  a large 
woman,  with  a handsome,  ruddy 
face,  and  the  sound  of  that  heavy 
body  hitting  the  floor  and  the  sight 
of  her  face  at  that  moment — it  was 
gray  and  loose-mouthed  and  flac- 


cid— so  unnerved  me  that  I am 
ashamed  to  say  I just  sat  there, 
numb.  Others  scurried  around  and 
cried  for  water  or  thrust  cushions 
under  her  head  or  waved  vials  of 
ammoniated  lavender  in  front  of 
her,  but  I just  sat  frozen,  looking 
at  her,  looking  at  Mrs.  Porteous  loll- 
ing back  in  the  armchair,  Charley 
King’s  voice  still  ringing  in  my  ears. 


69 


70 

and  my  heart  thudding  with  shock. 

I would  not  have  thought,  nor 
would  anyone  else,  at  first  impres- 
sion, that  the  Kings  were  the  s&nce 
type.  My  natural  tendency  is  to  as- 
sociate that  sort  of  thing  with  wheat 
germ  and  vegeburgers  and  complete 
syndromes  of  psychosomatic  illness- 
es, but  Charley  and  his  wife  were 
beef-eaters  ail  the  way  and  they 
shone  with  health  and  cheer  and 
never  reported  a snifSe,  Be  exceed- 
ingly wary  of  categories,  I told  my- 
self; despise  no  man’s  madness. 
Their  hearty  goodwill,  if  it  palled 
upon  me,  was  certainly  better  for 
my  mother  than  another  neighbor’s 
whining  or  gossip  would  have  been. 
The  Kings,  who  were  her  best 
friends,  devoted  to  her  about  500% 
of  the  time  I myself  was  willing  to 
give.  For  years  I had  lived  away 
from  home,  our  interests  and  activi- 
ties were  too  different,  there  seemed 
little  either  of  us  could  do  when 
long  silences  fell  upon  us  as  we  sat 
alone.  It  was  much  better  to  join 
the  Kings. 

“Funny  thing  happened  down  at 
the  office  today — ” Charley  often  be- 
gan like  that.  Ordinarily  this  open- 
ing would  have  shaken  me  into 
thoughts  of  a quick  escape.  Some- 
how, though,  as  Charley  told  it,  his 
fingers  rippling  the  thick,  iron-gray 
hair,  his  ruddy  face  quivering  not 
to  release  a smile  or  laugh  before 
the  point  of  the  story  was  revealed 
— somehow,  it  did  seem  funny  when 
Charley  told  it.  To  me,  the  Kings 
were  older  people,  but  they  were 


FANTASY  AND  SCIENCE  FICTION 

younger  than  my  mother,  and  I am 
sure  they  helped  keep  her  from 
growing  old  too  fast.  It  was  worth 
it  to  me  to  eat  vast  helpings  of  but- 
ter-pecan ice  cream  when  the  Real 
Me  hungered  and  slavered  for  a 
glass  of  beer  with  pretzel  sticks  on 
the  side. 

If  tarot  cards,  Rosicrucian  litera- 
ture, s&nces,  and  milder  non-con- 
tortionistic  exercises  made  an  incon- 
gruous note  in  the  middle<lass, 
middle-aged  atmosphere  the  Kings 
trailed  with  them  like  “rays  of  lam- 
bent dullness” — why,  it  was  harm- 
less. It  was  better  to  lap  up  pyramid- 
ology  than  lunatic-fringe  politics. 
Rather  let  Mother  join  hands  on  the 
ouija  board  than  start  cruising  the 
Great  Circle  of  quack  doctors  to 
find  a cure  for  imaginary  backaches. 
So  I ate  baked  alaska  and  discussed 
the  I Am  and  astral  projection,  and 
said  “Be  still,  my  soul”  to  inner 
yearnings  for  highballs  and  carnal 
conversation.  After  ail,  it  was  only 
once  a week.  And  I never  saw  any 
signs  that  my  mother  took  any  of 
it  more  seriously  than  the  parchesi 
game  which  followed  the  pistachio 
or  peanut-crunch. 

I am  an  architect.  Charley  was  In 
The  Real  Estate  Game.  A good 
chance,  you  might  think,  for  one 
hand  to  wash  the  other,  but  it  hardly 
ever  happened  that  our  commercial 
paths  crossed.  Lanais,  kidney- 
shaped swimming  pools,  picture 
windows,  copper-hooded  fireplaces, 
hi-fi  sets  in  the  walls — that  was  my 
sort  of  thing.  “Income  property” — 


SUMMERLAND 


71 


that  was  Charley’s.  And  a nice  in- 
come it  was,  too.  Much  better  than 
mine. 

How  does  that  go? — Evil  com- 
munications corrupt  good  manners? 
— Charley  might  have  said  some- 
thing of  that  sort  if  I’d  ever  told 
him  what  Ed  Hokinson  told  me. 
Hoke  is  on  the  planning  commis- 
sion, so  what  with  this  and  that, 
we  see  each  other  fairly  often.  Co- 
incidence’s arm  didn’t  stretch  too 
long  before  Charley  king’s  name 
came  up  between  us.  Idly  talking,  I 
repeated  to  Hoke  a typical  Charlcy- 
ism.  Charley  had  been  having  ten- 
ant trouble. 

“Of  course  there  are  always  what 
you  might  call  the  Inescapable 
Workings  of  Fate,  which  all  of  us 
are  subject  to,  just  as  we  are  to,  oh, 
say,  the  Law  of  Supply  and  De- 
mand,” said  Charley,  getting  out- 
side some  dessert.  “But  by  and  large 
whatever  troubles  people  of  that 
sort” — meaning  the  tenants — “think 
they  have,  it’s  due  to  their  own  im- 
providence, for  they  won’t  save,  and 
each  week  or  month  the  rent  comes 
as  a fresh  surprise.  And  then  you 
have  certain  politicians  stirring  them 
up  and  making  them  think  they’re 
badly  off  when  really  they’re  just 
the  victims  of  Maya,  or  Illusion.” 
Little  flecks  of  whipped  cream  were 
on  his  ruddy  jowels.  Mary  nodded 
solemnly,  two  hundred  pounds  of 
well-fed,  well-dressed,  well-housed 
approbation. 

“Maya,”  said  Hoke.  “That  what 
he  calls  it?  Like  to  come  with  me 


and  see  for  yourself?  / know  Char- 
ley King,”  Hoke  said.  In  the  end 
I did  go.  Interesting,  in  its  own  way, 
what  I saw,  but  not  my  kind  of 
thing  at  all.  And  the  next  day  was 
the  day  Charley  died.  He  was  in- 
terred with  much  ceremony  and  ex- 
pense in  a fabulous  City  of  the 
Dead,  which  has  been  too  well  de- 
scribed by  British  novelists  for  me 
to  try.  Big,  jolly,  handsome,  life-lov- 
ing Mr.  Charley  King.  In  a way, 
I missed  him.  And  after  that,  of 
course,  Mary  and  my  mother  were 
together  even’ more.  After  that  there 
was  even  less  of  the  Akashic  Docu- 
ments or  Anthroposophism  or  Ve- 
danta, and  more  and  more  of  se- 
ances. 

"1  know  I have  no  cause  to 
grieve,”  Mary  said.  “1  know  that 
Charley  is  happy.  I just  want  him 
to  tell  me  so.  That’s  not  asking  too 
much,  is  it?” 

How  should  I know?  What  is 
“too  much”?  I never  do  any  asking, 
myself,  or  any  answering  for  that 
matter. 

So  off  they  went,  my  mother  and 
Mrs.  Mary  King,  and — ^if  I couldn’t 
beg  off — I.  Mrs.  Victory’s,  Mrs.  Rev- 
erend Ella  Maybelle  Snyder’s,  Ma- 
dame Sophia’s,  Mother  Honeywell’s 
— every  spirit-trumpet  in  the  city 
must  have  been  on  time-and-a-half 
those  days.  They  got  little-girl  an- 
gels and  old-lady  angels.  They  got 
doctors,  lawyers,  Indian  chiefs,  and 
young  boy-babies — they  must  even 
have  gotten  Radio  Andorra — but 
they  didn’t  get  Charley.  There  were 


72 


FANTASY  AND  SCIENCE  FICTION 


slate-messages  and  automatic  writ- 
ings and  ectoplasm  enough  to  reach 
from  here  to  Punxatawney,  P.  A, 
but  if  it  reached  to  Charley  he  did- 
n’t reach  back.  All  the  mediums 
and  all  their  customers  had  the  same 
line:  There  is  no  grief  in  Summer- 
land,  there  is  no  pain  in  Summer- 
land — Summerland  being  the  choice 
real  estate  development  Upstairs,  at 
least  in  the  Spiritualist  hep-talk. 
They  all  believed  it,  but  somehow 
they  all  wanted  to  be  assured.  And 
after  the  seance,  when  all  the  spooks 
had  gone  back  to  Summerland, 
what  a consumption  of  coffee,  cup- 
cakes, and  cold  cuts. 

Some  of  the  places  were  fancy, 
you  bought  “subscription”  for  the 
season’s  performance  and  discussed 
parapsychology  over  canapes  and 
sherry.  Mrs.  Porteous’  place,  how- 
ever, was  right  out  of  the  1920’s,  red 
velveteen  por/eerr  on  wooden  rings, 
and  all.  I almost  fancied  I could  feel 
the  ectoplasm  when  we  came  in, 
but  it  was  just  a heavy  condensation 
of  boiled  cabbage  steam  and  ham- 
burger smoke. 

Mrs.  Porteous  looked  like  a cari- 
cature of  herself — down-at-hem  eve- 
ning gown,  gaudy  but  clumsy-  cos- 
metic job,  huge  rings  on  each  fin- 
ger, and,  oh,  that  voice.  Mrs.  Porte- 
ous was  the  phoniest-looking,  phon- 
iest-sounding, phoniest-aeftKg  medi- 
um I have  ever  come  across.  She 
had  a lady-in-waiting:  sagging 
cheeks,  jet-black  page-boy  bob  or 
banp  or  whatever  you  call  it,  velvet 
tunic,  so  on. 


“Dear  friends,”  says  the  gentle- 
woman, striking  a Woolworth  gong, 
“might  I have  your  attention  please. 
I shall  now  request  that  there  be  no 
further  smoking  or  talking  whilst 
the  seance  is  going  on.  ’We  guaran- 
tee— nothing.  We  shall  attempt — all. 
If  there  is  doubt — if  there  is  discord 
— the  spirits  may  not  come.  For 
there  is  no  doubt,  no  discord,  there 
is  no  grief  nor  pain,  in  Summer- 
land.”  So  on.  Let  us  join  our  hands 
...  let  us  bow  our  heads  ...  I,  of 
course,  peeked.  The  Duchess  was 
sitting  on  the  starboard  side  of  the 
incense,  next  to  Mrs.  Porteous,  who 
was  rolling  her  eyes  and  muttering. 
Then  Charley  King  screamed. 

It  was  Mrs.  Porteous’  mouth  that 
it  came  from,  it  was  her  chest  that 
heaved,  but  it  was  Charley  King’s 
voice — I know  his  voice,  don’t  you 
think  I know  his  voice?  He 
screamed.  My  mother’s  hand  jerked 
away  from  mine. 

“The  fire!  The  fire!  Oh,  Mary, 
how  it  burns,  how — /" 

Then  Mary  fell  forward  from  her 
seat,  the  lights  went  on,  went  off, 
then  on  again,  everyone  scurried 
around  except  me — I was  frozen  to 
my  seat — and  Mrs.  Porteous — she 
lay  back  in  her  arm  chair.  Finally  I 
got  to  my  feet  and  somehow  we 
managed  to  lift  Mary  onto  a couch. 
The  color  came  back  to  her  face 
and  she  opened  her  eyes. 

“That’s  all  right,  dear,”  my  moth- 
er said. 

“Oh  my  goodness  1”  said  Mary. 
“What  happened?  Did  I faint?  Isn’t 


SUMMERLAND 


73 


that  silly.  No,  no,  let  me  get  up; 
we  must  start  the  s&nce.” 

Someone  tugged  at  my  sleeve.  It 
was  the  Duchess. 

“Who  was  that?”  she  asked,  look- 
ing at  me  shrewdly.  “It  was  her 
husband,  wasn’t  it?  Oh-yes-it-twas! 
He  was  burned  to  death,  wasn’t  he? 
And  he  hasn’t  yet  freed  himself  from 
his  earthly  ties  so  he  can  enter  Sum- 
merland.  He  must  of  been  a skep- 
tic.” 

“He  didn’t  burn  to  death,”  I said. 
“He  fell  and  broke  his  neck.  And 
he  wasn’t  a skeptic.” 

(Hoke  had  said  to  me;  “Of  course 
the  board  was  rotten;  the  whole 
house  was  rotten.  All  his  property 


was  like  that.  It  should  have  been 
condemned  years  ago.  No  repairs, 
a family  in  each  room,  and  the  rent 
sky-higb — he  must  have  been  mak- 
ing a fortune.  You  saw  those  rats, 
didn’t  you?”  Hoke  had  asked.  “Do 
you  know  what  the  death  rate  is  in 
those  buildings?”) 

The  Duchess  shook  her  head.  Her 
face  was  puzzled. 

“Then  it  couldn’t  of  been  her  hus- 
band,” she  said.  “There  is  no  pain,” 
she  pointed  out  reasonably,  “in  Sum- 
merland.” 

“No,”  I said  to  her.  “No,  I’m  sure 
there  isn’t.  I know  that.” 

But  I knew  Charley  King.  And 
I know  his  voice. 


Coming  Next  Month 

Very  rare,  in  recent  years,  have  been  any  Heinlein  stories  short  of  book-length 
novels;  but  next  month  we’ll  have  the  pleasure  of  presenting  a new  short  novelet 
by  Robert  A.  Heinlein,  The  Menace  from  Earth — a charming  story  of  young 
love  and  a wonderfully  detailed  picture,  in  the  inimitable  Heinlein  manner,  of 
civilization  on  the  Moon.  'The  same  issue,  on  the  stands  around  July  1,  will  fea- 
ture a short  novel.  The  Lineman,  by  Walter  M.  Miller,  Jr.,  who  proves  himself 
a very  difiFerent  writer  from  the  creator  of  the  canticles  of  St.  Leibowitz  in  this 
harshly  realistic  and  bitterly  violent  story  of  work  and  sex  on  Mars.  Other  stories 
(all  new — no  reprints)  include  a bittersweet  fantasy  of  childhood  by  Mildred 
Clingerman,  the  first  F&SF  appearance  of  Old  Pro  Rog  Phillips,  and  a dream- 
satire  by  mystery  novelist  and  TV-writer  Stuart  Palmer. 

FANTASY  AND  SCIENCE  FICTION  F.July.7  I 

527  MadUon  Avsnue,  New  York  22,  N.  Y.  I 

Plaaie  enter  my  subscription  at  once,  to  start  with  next  Issue,  ■ 

I enclose  Q $4  for  1 year  G $7  for  2 years  J 

Name. . 

Address, 

City. 


mail  \ 
this  ) 

money-  f 
saving  ( 
coupon  \ 
today  / 


Zone. 


State. 


^he  hit er ate  <^onster 

by  WILLIAM  CHAPMAN  WHITE 


If  science  keeps  on  conquering 
the  unconquerable  there  just  isn’t 
going  to  be  anything  left  for  the  hu- 
man race  to  do.  The  news  out  of 
England,  sent  round  the  world  by 
Reuters,  shows  to  what  ends  science 
will  reach. 

Scientists  at  Manchester  Univer- 
sity, so  the  story  says,  have  built  an 
electronic  computer  into  which  a 
scattered  collection  of  words  can  be 
fed.  Deep  down  in  the  brain  of  the 
machine  the  words  are  put  together 
and  rearranged  into  complete  sen- 
tences which  are  then  poured  out  in 
legible  form.  The  mere  rumor  of 
the  existence  of  such  a machine 
ought  to  strike  terror  into  the  hearts 
of  the  writers  of  radio  and  television 
serials,  one-a-year  novelists,  and 
even  columnists. 

With  the  story  of  the  machine’s 
invention  comes  a sample  of  the 
machine’s  work.  One  of  the  inven- 
tors, obviously  tongue-tied  in  the 
presence  of  his  beloved,  decided  to 
feed  into  the  machine  a whole  series 
of  endearing  words,  in  the  hope  that 
the  machine  would  grunt  and  grum- 
ble and  give  out  with  a love  letter. 
Sure  enough,  it  did.  Presumably 
that  inventor  sent  it  off  at  once  to 
his  girl. 


Its  text,  verbatim,  was:  “Darling 
sweetheart,  you  are  my  avid  fellow 
feeling.  My  affection  curiously  clings 
to  your  passionate  wish.  My  liking 
yearns  for  your  heart.  You  are  my 
wistful  sympathy,  my  tender  liking. 
Yours  beautifully.” 

If  the  girl  fell  for  that  and  married 
the  man  she  got  what  she  deserved. 
Without  the  machine  handy,  the 
inventor  is  still  tongue-tied.  Break- 
fast conversation  in  that  newly  wed 
couple’s  home  must  be  odd  at  times. 

“I  certainly  don’t  understand  you, 
Cecil,”  says  the  wife.  “You  used  to 
write  me  such  beautiful  things  be- 
fore we  were  married  and  now  you 
never  say  a word.” 

Cecil  just  stares,  wordless  and 
helpless. 

“If  you  don’t  want  to  show  me 
any  avid  fellow  feeling  any  more,” 
says  the  unhappy  bride,  “you  might 
at  least  show  me  some  wistful  sym- 
pathy.” 

In  the  meantime  Cecil  and  his 
friends,  having  solved  the  problem 
of  writing  love  letters,  are  now  busily 
working  on  a new  machine  that  will 
carry  on  the  rest  of  the  courtship 
and  let  a man  free  for  more  impor- 
tant things,  like  inventing  more  such 
machines. 


© tgS4  by  the  New  Yor\  Herald  Tribune;  reprinted  by  permission 
William  Chapman  White  and  the  New  York_  Herald  Tribune 

74 


Miss  Seahright,  who  usually  scries  into  the  future,  this  time  casts  her 
sensitive  gaze  upon  the  past,  to  bring  us  a bittersweet  and  touching 
fantasy  of  a Victorian  wife  who  was  offered  an  unexpected  way  out  of 
the  fetters  of  conventional  propriety. 


£ithne 

by  IDRIS  SEABRIGHT 


When  Eithne’s  carrying  a child 
began  to  be  noticeable,  Herbert  sent 
her  away  from  Corstophine,  their 
villa,  to  Wracksand,  a little  hamlet 
on  the  North  coast.  He  said  he  did 
it  because  the  air  at  Corstophine 
was  too  heavy  for  a female  in  her 
condition,  and  it  was  true,  the  air 
at  Corstophine  was  always  dark 
with  smoke  and  sharp  with  sulphur 
from  the  mills.  But  Eithne  thought 
he  was  sending  her  away  because 
he  was  ashamed  of  her. 

She  did  not  much  mind.  Her 
maid  was  traveling  with  her,  and 
Herbert,  parting  from  her  at  the 
station,  had  put  a generous  number 
of  ten  pound  notes  in  her  reticule. 
Besides,  though  the  obsessive  grip 
of  his  dark,  shamefaced  feeling  for 
her  had  begun  to  relax  a little  in 
the  last  month,  she  was  still  easier 
away  from  him.  She  was  supposed 
to  return  to  Corstophine  for  her 
confinement.  Herbert  had  engaged 
a medical  man  in  the  neighborhood 
to  attend  her.  Dr.  Trevin  was  a 


modern  practitioner,  well  thought- 
of,  up-to-date  in  his  methods.  He,^ 
would  give  her  chloroform  wheo" 
her  pains  got  bad.  The  Queen  had 
had  chloroform  in  1853  when  Prince 
Leopold  was  born. 

When  Eithne  and  her  companion 
got  to  Wracksand,  there  turned  out 
to  be  no  suitable  place  for  Dawkins, 
the  maid,  to  stay.  Eithne  bore  her 
complaints  patiently  for  perhaps  fif- 
teen minutes.  Then — her  temper  was 
uncertain  these  days;  sometimes  she 
was  happy  at  her  condition,  some- 
times fiercely  resentful  of  it — she 
told  the  woman  abruptly  to  go  back 
to  Corstophine.  Eithne  could  get 
along  quite  well  with  nobody  but 
Mrs.  Neville,  her  landlady,  to  attend 
her.  She  had  liked  Mrs.  Neville  on 
sight. 

Dawkins  left,  sulky  and  hysterical 
When  Eithne  had  had  time  to  rest  a 
little  from  her  journey,  Mrs,  Neville 
suggested  ^that  she  might  like  to 
walk  down  to  the  sea  and  sit  in  the 
sun.  Though  it  was  October,  it  was 


75 


76 

a fine  warm  day,  and  a litde  exercise 
was  good  for  a woman  who  was 
carrying. 

Eithne  was  pleased.  She  got  Mat- 
thew Arnold’s  latest  volume  of 
poems  from  her  valise — she  liked 
poetry,  though  Herbert  didn’t — and 
started  toward  the  water.  The  coast 
at  Wracksand  was  rocky,  but  Mrs. 
Neville’s  directions  had  been  care- 
ful. Eithne  had  no  difficulty  in  find- 
ing the  little  sandy  beach,  enclosed 
between  two  jutting  spits  of  rock. 

The  sun  was  warm*.  Eithne  did 
not  open  her  book.  She  sat  with  her 
hands  loosely  about  her  knees,  think- 
ing languidly  of  Herbert  . . . Cor- 
stophine  . . . Dawkins  . . . Her- 
bert again.  Herbert  talked  so  much 
of  duty.  It  was,  she  supposed,  her 
duty  to  have  the  baby.  At  any  rate, 
she  was  having  it. 

How  warm  the  sun  was!  Sudden- 
ly Eithne  felt  like  a prisoner  within 
the  heavy  black  serge  of  her  dress. 
She  stood  up.  Mrs.  Neville  had  said 
that  nobody  ever  came  to  the  beach, 
not  even  fishermen.  With  eager, 
guilty  fingers  Eithne  began  to  un- 
button the  buttons — the  dozens  of 
buttons — on  her  bodice.  She  pulled 
the  dress  off  over  her  shoulders, 
thinking:  how  heavy,  heavier  even 
than  the  child  I’m  carrying.  And 
her  underclothing,  stiff  with  hand- 
made lace  and  much  embroidery, 
was  heavy  too. 

She  stood  naked  at  last.  She 
looked  about  herself  anxiously,  but, 
no,  nobody  ever  came  here.  The 
waves  that  broke  on  the  little  beach 


FANTASY  AND  SCIENCE  FICTION 

were  white  with  foam,  but  the  water 
itself  was  a tender  dark  gray-blue. 
Her  eyes  half-shut  against  the 
shameful  sight  of  her  own  body,  she 
waded  hesitantly  out  until  she  stood 
in  water  over  her  knees. 

She  had  never  been  in  the  sea  be- 
fore without  a bathing-dress.  The 
water  was  cold,  but  there  was  some- 
thing delicious  in  its  very  iciness. 
Hastily  she  knelt,  and  sluiced  the 
next  waves  over  her  shoulders  and 
her  breasts.  Oh!  Oh!  How  cold,  how 
sweet!  Then  she  hurried  back  to  the 
pile  of  clothing  she  had  left  on  the 
sand. 

She  had  nothing  to  dry  on.  The 
air  dried  her,  and  left  a prickle  of 
salt  on  her  skin.  She  got  into  her 
clothing  again,  finding  that  she  re- 
sented its  weight  less  now  that  she 
had  been  out  of  it. 

She  was  almost  done  with  the  but- 
tons on  the  heavy  black  bodice  when 
she  saw,  far  out  beyond  the  jutting 
rocks,  forty  yards  or  so  from  the 
shore,  a cluster  of  bobbing  heads. 
For  a moment  shame  froze  her. 
Then  she  laughed.  Seals,  only  seals, 
ft  didn’t  matter  if  they  had  been 
watching  her. 

When  she  got  back  to  the  cottage 
Mrs.  Neville  was  preparing  a meal, 
something  between  an  early  supper 
and  a late  tea.  “Was  it  pleasant  by 
the  water,  ma’am?’’  she  asked  as  she 
scalded  out  the  teapot. 

“Very  pleasant,’’  Eithne  answered. 
“The  sun  was  nicely  warm.  Oh,  and 
I saw  some  seals.” 

“Seals!”  Mrs.  Neville  set  the 


EITHNE 

brown-glazed  teapot  down  with  a 
thump.  “Fancy  that!  Excuse  me  for 
asking,  ma’am,  but  are  you  quite 
sure?  There  haven’t  been  seals  at 
Wracksand  since  my  grandmother’s 
day,  thirty  or  forty  years  ago.” 

“Quite  sure,”  Eithne  answered.  “I 
saw  their  heads,  you  know.  Round, 
dark  heads.” 

“Yes.  . . . 'Well,  I’m  glad  to  hear 
they  are  back.  The  people  of  the  sea 
— that’s  what  folk  in  these  parts  call 
them,  ma’am — are  lucky.  Fancy  their 
coming  back,  after  all  these  years!” 

“I  suppose  it  was  the  seal  fishers 
drove  them  away?”  Eithne  asked, 
sinking  down  in  the  chair  Mrs.  Ne- 
ville had  pulled  out  for  her. 

“So  some  say.  My  grandmother  al- 
ways’ held  it  was  the  wickedness  of 
folk  nowadays  that  made  them  leave. 
She  said  it  wasn’t  natural  to  dig  the 
earth  for  iron  and  coal.  And  oh,  she 
thought  it  dreadful  to  make  the  lit- 
tle ones  work  so  hard  beside  the 
looms  in  the  cruel  cotton  factories. 
The  dogs,  she  used  to  say,  were  bet- 
ter off  than  many  an  English  child.” 

“That’s  progress,”  Eithne  said, 
echoing  Herbert.  “We  have  to  have 
progress.” 

“Progress!”  Mrs,  Neville’s  dark 
eyes  flashed.  “Nay,  but  it’s  wicked- 
ness! . . . Excuse  me,  ma’am.  Eat 
your  supper,  do.  There’s  a fresh 
hearth-baked  loaf  for  you,  and  sweet 
butter  from  Mrs.  May’s  churning.  A 
bit  of  lettuce  from  the  garden.  And 
I boiled  two  of  the  speckled  eggs. 
They’re  the  tasty  ones.” 

Eithne  buttered  a slice  of  the 


77 

crumbly  warm  bread  and  began  to 
pour  herself  a cup  of  tea.  “Put  lots  of 
milk  to  your  tea,  ma’am,”  Mrs.  Ne- 
ville advised  her.  “Milk’s  the  staff  of 
life  to  a childing  woman.” 

When  she  undressed  for  bed  that 
night,  Eithne  touched  her  tongue  to 
her  wrist.  She  laughed  to  find  she 
could  still  taste  salt  on  it. 

The  weather  held  on  fine,  and 
Eithne  went  every  day  to  the  little 
beach.  She  took  her  lunch  with  her 
— eggs  or  cheese,  slices  of  brown 
loaf,  and  milk  in  a flask — in  a little 
wicker  basket,  and  stayed  until  the 
sun  was  low  and  it  began  to  grow 
chill.  She  sat  with  her  hands  in  her 
lap,  not  thinking,  watching  the 
waves  eternally  washing  against  the 
sand.  She  often  saw  the  heads  of 
seals,  sometimes  far  out,  sometimes 
so  near  that  she  could  have  tossed  a 
pebble  out  to  them. 

She  wrote  to  Herbert  weekly,  and 
got  letters  as  often  from  him.  Busi- 
ness was  good,  he  wrote,  he  missed 
her.  There  had  been  an  accident  at 
the  mills;  two  workingmen  had 
been  badly  scalded  when  one  of  the 
vats  that  held  the  molten  steel  broke. 
Nothing  serious.  The  firm  had  two 
new  contracts.  He  would  send  Daw- 
kins to  fetch  her  back  to  Corstophine 
at  the  middle  of  January.  He  had 
told  the  maid  to  use  her  time  in 
making  dresses  for  Eithne’s  child. 

Eithne  crumpled  up  the  letters 
from  Herbert  as  soon  as  she  read 
them,  and  tossed  them  in  the  fire- 
place. She  disliked  thinking  about 


78 

Corstophine,  Herbert,  the  mills.  She 
was  impatient  to  get  back  to  the 
beach  and  forget  them. 

She  longed  to  undress  again  and 
let  the  wonderful  cold  sea  water  ca- 
ress her.  No,  it  might  be  bad  for  the 
child.  But  the  nagging  backache 
that  had  troubled  her  so  at  Cor- 
stophine had  left  her.  Her  body  felt 
relaxed  and  sound. 

Toward  the  end  of  November  the 
long  spell  of  fine  weather  broke.  It 
rained  hard;  day  after  day  there  was 
driving  wind  or  choking  fog.  Eithne 
had  to  stay  in  the  house  by  the  fire. 
She  tried  crocheting,  but  she  had 
never  cared  for  fancy  work.  She  was 
always  laying  the  hook  down  and 
yawning.  She  preferred  to  help  Mrs. 
Neville  with  the  household  tasks,  or 
to  listen  to  the  older  woman  talk. 

At  first  Mrs.  Neville  talked  of  the 
people  of  the  village:  of  Parson,  who 
was  a good  man,  and  so  learned  that 
he  could  read  books  in  those  old 
hard  languages;  of  Mrs.  May,  who 
kept  two  cows  and  had  been  mid- 
wife to  Mrs.  Neville  when  she  had 
had  her  own  children;  of  Billy  At- 
kins, who  had  run  away  to  sea,  and 
of  Norah  Pollock,  who  had  run  off 
to  London  and  come  to  no  good 
end,  and  of  a host  of  others  who  had 
lived  in  the  village,  fished  or  farmed 
there,  and  died  where  they  had  been 
born. 

Then,  when  she  grew  more  at  ease 
with  Eithne,  she  began  to  tell  her  the 
stories  her  own  mother  had  told  her. 
Fairy  stories,  Eithne  supposed  one 
would  call  them.  She  told  of  brown- 


FANTASY AND  SCIENCB  FICTION 

ies  and  sea  fairies,  of  the  Good 
Neighbors,  who  Eithne  gathered 
were  land  spirits,  of  hags  and  de- 
mons, of  the  people  of  the  sea,  and 
of  the  paths  that  lead  to  fairyland. 
Eithne  listened  with  drowsy  pleas- 
ure. Sometimes  Mrs.  Neville  would 
interrupt  herself  to  say  with  a laugh 
that  Parson  liked  her  to  tell  the  old 
stories,  and  she  supposed  she  had 
got  into  the  way  of  telling  them  to 
the  quality. 

At  last,  after  nearly  three  weeks  of 
bad  weather,  the  sky  cleared.  Mrs. 
Neville  bundled  Eithne  up  in  layer 
on  layer  of  woolen  shawls,  and  sent 
her  out  to  take  the  air.  Eithne 
walked  down  to  the  beach. 

The  sun’s  rays  were  weak,  but  he 
rode  in  a sky  of  pale,  unclouded 
blue.  The  water  today  was  choppy, 
vexed  by  cross-currents,  but  from  ev- 
ery broken  pale  blue  surface  there 
was  reflected  a dazzle  of  light. 
Eithne  sat  down  in  the  sun,  out  of 
the  wind.  The  light  on  the  water 
hurt  her  eyes.  She  dozed. 

She  woke  with  a start.  What  had 
she  been  dreaming?  Some  nonsense, 
out  of  the  stories  Mrs.  Neville  had 
been  telling  her — something  about 
the  two  paths  that  human  beings 
took,  the  hard  road  to  heaven  and 
the  broad  pleasant  road  to  hell,  and 
the  third  path,  the  pretty  winding 
path  that  leads  to  fairyland. 

Nonsense.  But  suppose  it  were 
true.  Suppose  that,  besides  the  two 
known  ways,  there  were  a tliird  one. 
the  road  to  fairyland?  Nonsense. 
Nonsense.  There  was  only  one  path 


EITHNE 


79 


to  be  taken,  the  path  of  duty — ^Her- 
bert spoke  so  much  of  duty — and 
Eithne’s  next  duty  was  returning  to 
Corstophine  to  have  her  child. 

Eithne  felt  a throb  of  hatred  to- 
ward Corstophine.  The  rooms  were 
too  large,  always  cold,  dank  with  the 
raw  smell  of  new 'plaster.  The  serv- 
ants were  obsequious  and  attentive, 
but  they  had  spiteful  eyes.  Even  the 
garden,  that  might  have  given  her 
pleasure,  had  been  frozen  by  topiary 
work  and  formal  parterres  into  a 
rigid,  distasteful  lesson  in  geometry. 
And  Dr.  Trevin — how  could  she  ex- 
pose her  travailing  body  to  his  cold 
scrutiny } He  was  a formal,  dry  little 
man  with  sharp  manners.  For  all  his 
modernity  and  his  neat  pince-nez, 
she  disliked  him  and  was  afraid  of 
him. 

Oh,  but  she  had  to.  It  was  her 
duty. — Why  shouldn’t  she  stay  in 
Wracksand  and  have  her  baby  here? 

Eithne  knotted  her  fingers  togeth- 
er. She  felt  giddy  with  excitement. 
Was  it  really  so  foolish?  Mrs.  May 
was  a clever  midwife;  Mrs.  Neville 
said  that  she  had  saved  the  life  of  a 
woman  in  Pawlish  that  two  doctors 
had  given  up.  And  Mrs.  Neville  her- 
self was  so  kind.  She  treated  Eithne 
like  a daughter.  Eithne  felt  safe  and 
happy  with  her.  It  would  be  easy  to 
have  a baby  here. 

Herbert  would  be  furious.  He  was 
a choleric  man;  Eithne  had  seen 
him,  in  moments  of  exasperation, 
actually  gnashing  his  teeth.  But 
though  he  might  send  Dawkins  to 
fetch  her  back  to  Corstophine,  Daw- 


kins was  only  a servant.  Dawkins 
could  not  compel  her.  And  Herbert 
himself  was  much  too  fond  of  his 
dignity  to  make  himself  ridiculous 
by  attempting  to  coerce  a woman  in 
the  last  stages  of  pregnancy.  There 
were  some  advantages  in  being  a 
woman,  after  all.  No.  She  would 
stay  here.  She  would  write  to  Her- 
bert tonight. 

When  she  got  back  to  the  cottage, 
she  told  Mrs.  Neville  what  she  had 
decided.  “I’m  so  glad,’’  the  older 
woman  said.  Her  eyes  glowed.  “Just 
fancy,  a baby  in  the  house  again!  It 
will  be  like  old  times. 

“I’m  sure  you  won’t  regret  it,  my 
dear.  There  never  was  a better  mid- 
wife than  Mrs.  May.  Folk  in  the  vil- 
lage say  she’s  kin  to  the  Good 
Neighbors,  she’s  so  wise.  And  I can 
help  you  get  things  ready  for  the  lit- 
tle one.  I.’ve  still  got  baby  clothes  put 
away  in  my  old  dresser.  After  you 
drink  your  tea,  we’ll  have  a look.” 

Herbert’s  answer,  when  it  came, 
was  even  angrier  than  Eithne  had 
feared.  She  was,  he  wrote,  making 
him  look  like  a fool.  And  she  was  a 
fool  herself,  to  trust  herself  to  igno- 
rant old  women  at  such  a dangerous 
moment  of  her  life.  Had  she  no  con- 
ception of  the  trouble  he  had  gone 
to  on  her  account?  He  had  put  him- 
self out  to  make  suitable  arrange- 
ments for  her;  for  a momentary 
whim,  a wild,  unregulated  fancy,  she 
was  willing  to  upset  everything.  She 
had  never  had  the  proper  views  of 
what  duty  in  a wife  meant.  And  so 
on  for  three  pages. 


80 

His  letter,  however,  ended  on  a 
note  o£  acquiescence,  as  Eithne  had 
foreseen  it  would.  She  fancied  he 
might  be  secretly  relieved  at  being 
spared  the  discomfort  and  inconven- 
ience of  having  her  confined  at  Cor- 
stophinc.  She  only  hoped  he  would 
not  make  her  pay  for  the  affront  to 
his  dignity  when  she  did  go  back. 

Eithne’s  child  was  due  at  the 
end  of  January.  Just  before  bedtime 
on  the  night  of  the  twenty-eighth 
she  called  Mrs.  Neville,  saying  she 
thought  her  pains  had  begun. 

Mrs.  Neville  went  for  Mrs.  May 
at  once.  Eithne,  left  alone  in  the  lit- 
tle cottage  with  only  the  oil  lamp 
for  company,  gave  way  to  a moment 
of  terrible  fear.  Herbert  was  right, 
she  was  a fool.  Women  died  in  child- 
bed, even  when  they  had  good  doc- 
tors. She  had  put  her  life  into  the 
hands  of  two  ignorant  old  women. 
Mrs.  Neville  could  not  even  read. 
What  a fool  she  had  been!  She  was 
almost  groaning  with  fear  when 
Mrs.  Neville  and  the  midwife  came 
back. 

Mrs.  May  gave  her  a long,  search- 
ing look.  Then  she  smiled.  “Take  off 
your  things,  my  dear,”  she  said.  “We 
want  to  wash  you.  And  then,  if  you 
have  a short,  loose  nightdress,  put  it 
on.  Better  no  nightdress  at  all,  if 
you’re  warm  enough.” 

Clumsily  Eithne  stood  up.  She  was 
shaking  with  fear.  A contraction 
bent  her  almost  double.  Mrs.  May 
put  her  arms  around  her  shoulders 
to  support  her. 

“Nay,  you’re  doing  it  wrong,”  she 


FANTASY  AND  SCIENCE  FICTION 

said.  “You  mustn’t  try  to  help  it  yet, 
my  dear.  And  don’t  be  afraid.  It’s 
natural.  You  must  just  open  to  it, 
like  a door.” 

Eithne  was  undressed  and  washed. 
Mrs.  May  sat  beside  her,  holding  her 
hand  and  talking  quietly.  Gradu- 
ally Eithne’s  fear  abated.  Herbert 
had  been  wrong,  after  all,  and 
she  right.  Mrs.  May  might  be  igno- 
rant of  more  than  her  ABC’s.  But 
she  was  wise. 

About  ten  o’clock  Mrs.  May  said, 
“Draw  a deep  breath  and  hold  it, 
my  dear.  There.  Do  you  feel  like 
bearing  down  a bit?” 

Eithne  tried.  “Why,  that’s  better,” 
she  said,  surprised. 

“Yes,  now  you  can  help.”  Mrs. 
May  smiled.  “And  scream  if  you’ve 
a mind  to,  dear.  Some  women  do.” 

The  contractions  were  coming 
faster.  Eithne  shook  her  head.  She 
couldn’t  spare  breath  to  tell  Mrs. 
May  the  surprising  thing  she  had 
just  discovered.  But  the  truth  was 
that  it  was  not  really  pain. 

The  baby  was  born  a little  after 
one  o’clock.  Eithne,  looking  up  into 
Mrs.  May’s  face,  saw  a strange  ex- 
pression, like  wind  blowing  over 
water,  pass  across  it.  “Is  it  all  right?” 
she  asked  anxiously. 

“Yes.  It’s  a girl.  A perfect,  beauti- 
ful little  girl.” 

The  afterbirth  had  come.  Eithne 
held  out  her  tired  arms.  “Give  her 
to  me,”  she  said. 

She  was  astonished  at  how  much 
she  enjoyed  motherhood.  The  baby’s 


EITHNE 


81 


tininess  and  physical  perfection  en- 
chanted her.  she  never  wanted  to 
let  the  little  thing  out  of  her  arms. 
She  had  been  afraid  she  would  not 
be  able  to  suckle  her  daughter,  since 
her  breasts  were  small,  but  Mrs.  Ne- 
ville encouraged  her,  saying  size 
went  for  naught  in  a matter  like 
that.  Eithne  tried,  and  was  filled 
with  delicious  pride  when  the  baby 
throve.  The  only  cloud  on  her  hap- 
piness was  the  knowledge  that  she 
would  soon  have  to  return  to  Cor- 
stophine. 

She  had  written  to  Herbert  a few 
days  after  her  confinement,  telling 
him  the  news.  He  waited  almost  two 
weeks  to  answer,  and  his  letter, 
when  it  came,  was  short  and  cold, 
expressing  regret  for  the  child’s  sex. 
He  said  nothing  about  Eithne’s  re- 
turning to  the  villa.  Yet  Eithne 
knew  that  she  would  have  to  return. 

The  weather  stayed  bad  until  early 
in  March.  Then  it  cleared.  There 
was  a feel  of  spring  in  the  air.  Eithne 
went  down  to  the  beach  with  the 
baby. 

she  had  her  lunch  and  then,  since 
little  Una  seemed  hungry,  gave  her 
the  breast.  She  leaned  against  a rock, 
drowsy  with  the  relaxation  of  suck- 
ling, thinking  of  the  story  Mrs.  Ne- 
ville had  told  her  last  night — of  how 
some  seals  are  nothing  but  seals, 
and  how  others  are  the  true  People 
of  the  Sea,  powerful  beings  who  can 
doff  their  furry  skins  at  will  and  go 
among  land  people  in  the  human 
shape.  Their  number  is  always  the 
same,  and  if  one  of  them  dies  his 


skin  must  be  given  to  another.  The 
seals  are  their  loved  flocks,  and  they 
care  for  them  tenderly. 

The  baby  sank  back  from  the 
breast,  satisfied.  Eithne  buttoned  up 
her  bodice.  She  looked  out  over  the 
water.  There  were  no  seals  at  all  to- 
day. Wait,  though.  Far  out,  almost 
farther  than  she  could  see,  there  was 
one  head. 

There  was  a crunch  of  footsteps 
over  the  sand.  Eithne  turned,  star- 
tled. A man  was  coming  toward  her 
around  one  of  the  points  of  rock. 

He  wore  corduroy  trousers  and  a 
jersey,  and  there  was  a fishnet  over 
his  shoulders.  He  must  be  a fisher, 
though  Eithne,  who  thought  she 
knew  every  face  in  the  village  by 
now,  didn’t  recognize  him. 

“Good  day,  missis,’’  he  said  when 
he  got  nearer. 

“Good  day,”  Eithne  replied  se- 
dately. She  wasn’t  alarmed,  though 
Mrs.  Neville  had  said  nobody  ever 
came  to  the  beach.  He  had  a gentle 
look. 

When  he  got  up  to  them,  the  baby 
murmured  and  crowed.  He  smiled. 
“So  you’ve  a little  one!”  he  said,  as  if 
pleased.  “Missis,  could  I have  a look 
at  her?” 

Eithne  frowned  a little.  There  was 
a strong,  sharp  smell  of  the  sea  about 
him.  But  she  was  so  proud  of  her 
baby,  she  couldn’t  resist  the  tempta- 
tion. “Yes,  if  you  like,”  she  said. 

He  sank  down  beside  them  on  his 
heels  in  the  sand.  Very  gently  he  put 
out  a finger  and  touched  the  baby’s 
flushed  cheek.  Her  blue  eyes  opened 


82 

at  the  contact.  She  began  to  gurgle 
and  smile. 

“A  beautiful  baby,”  he  said.  He 
was  looking  at  little  Una  intently. 
“Yes,  missis,  a beautiful  child.” 

“Thank  you,”  Eithne  answered. 
She  was  hoping  he  would  not  ask  to 
hold  the  baby.  She  did  not  want  to 
entrust  her  child  to  a strange  man. 

He  got  to  his  feet.  “I  am  glad  you 
let  me  see  her,”  he  said.  “Good  day, 
missis.”  He  walked  off  around  the 
other  point  of  rock. 

Eithne  gazed  after  him.  She  knew 
she  had  never  seen  him  before,  and 
yet  she  was  troubled  by  a haunting 
sense  of  familiarity  in  his  bearing. 
After  a moment  she  placed  it.  It  was 
Mrs.  May  he  resembled.  He  looked 
enough  like  her  to  be,  not  her  broth- 
er, but  her  cousin.  Perhaps  he  was. 
In  a small  village,  it  was  likely 
enough. 

Three  days  later  Herbert,  quite 
unexpectedly,  came  to  Wracksand. 

Eithne  was  just  finishing  her 
breakfast  when  he  knocked  at  the 
cottage  door.  When  she  saw  who  it 
was,  she  felt  the  blood  leaving  her 
face.  Had  he  come  to  take  her  . . . 
home,  back  to  Corstophine.'* 

He  embraced  her,  saying,  “Good 
morning,  my  dear,”  and  then  looked 
around  the  little  cottage  disparag- 
ingly. “I  wish  to  talk  to  you,”  he 
said.  “Is  there  not  some  spot  where 
we  can  be  by  ourselves?” 

Mrs.  Neville  was  peering  at  them. 
Eithne  was  loath  to  take  him  to  the 
little  beach,  where  she  had  spent  so 
many  peaceful  hours,  but  she  knew 


FANTASY  AND  SCIENCE  FICTION 

of  nowhere  else.  She  picked  up  little 
Una  and  unwillingly  led  him  down 
to  the  shore. 

They  sat  down  in  the  sand.  He 
fumbled  in  his  pocket  and  brought 
out  a book.  “It  is  a gift  I purchased 
for  you,”  he  said. 

Eithne  unwrapped  the  parcel.  It 
was  a book  of  poetry,  the  same  book 
of  Matthew  Arnold’s,  in  fact,  that 
she  already  had.  Still,  he  had  meant 
it  kindly.  “Thank  you,  Herbert,”  she 
said. 

“Yes  . . . When  I saw  it,  I 
thought  of  you.”  He  turned  over  the 
pages.  When  he  came  to  “Dover 
Beach”  he  began  to  read  the  poem 
aloud  haltingly.  . Ah,  love,  let 
us  be  true  /To  one  anotherl’ " he 
read.  “ ‘For  the  world,  which  seems/ 
To  lie  before  us  li\e  a land  of 
dreams, /So  various,  so  beautiful,  so 
new,/Hath  really  neither  joy,  nor 
love,  nor  light, /Nor  certitude  . . 

He  closed  the  book.  Eithne  waited. 
“I  am  beginning  to  think,”  he  said 
slowly,  “that  I have  not  given 
enough  . . . heed  to  love.  There  are 
other  things  in  life  besides  duty. 
Yes.” 

Eithne  listened  in  cold  surprise. 
She  had  been  gone  from  Corstophine 
a long  time — ^more  than  five  months, 
in  fact.  Was  Herbert  trying  to  tell 
her  that  he  had  become  interested  in 
another  woman?  Or  was  this  but  the 
prelude  to  more  of  the  dark,  obses- 
sive desire  with  which  he  had  al- 
ways regarded  her  person  ? 

What  did  it  matter?  What  did  she 
care?  Now  that  she  was  face  to  face 


IITHNE 


83 


with  him  again,  she  realized  that  the 
spark  of  feeling  she  had  had  toward 
him  at  the  time  of  their  marriage 
had  died  utterly.  She  was  sorry.  He 
had  brought  her  the  poetry  book. 
But  he  was  less  to  her  than  the  seals 
out  yonder  in  the  water  were. 

The  baby  stirred  and  woke.  She 
gave  a hungry  wail.  Eithne  undid 
her  dress  and  began  to  nurse  her. 

Herbert  looked  on.  His  lips  had 
parted  and  a shine  had  come  into  his 
eyes.  Eithne,  meeting  his  glance,  felt 
the  blood  rising  hotly  in  her  cheeks. 
No.  No.  She  would  not.  But  he  was 
her  husband.  In  the  end,  she  would. 

When  the  feeding  was  finished,  he 
said,  “You  spoil  the  child.  Must  you 
put  her  to  the  breast  the  moment  she 
cries?  Even  a baby  must  learn  to 
recognize  duty  and  discipline.” 

“She  was  hungry,”  Eithne  defend- 
ed feebly. 

“She  can  learn  to  wait.”  He 
cleared  his  throat.  “There  is  another 
thing.  She  must  be  baptized.  I have 
always  thought,  Eithne,  that  perhaps 
your  own  lack  of  proper  awareness 
of  a wife’s  duties  comes  from  your 
not  having  been  baptized  until  so 
late  in  life.  I have  already  selected 
her  godparents.  And  I have  chosen 
her  name  too.  She  will  be  called 
Mary  Gertrude.” 

"I  call  her  Una,”  Eithne  said  sul- 
lenly. 

“It  is  not  a suitable  name. — Eithne, 
you  must  return  to  Corstophinc.” 

Eithne’s  eyes  moved.  “I  ...  I am 
not  yet  well  enough.” 

“Perhaps.  But  I have  consulted  Dr. 


Trevin.  He  informs  me  that  you  will 
be  quite  well  enough  to  resume  your 
duties  at  the  end  of  another  week.” 

What  did  he  know  about  it? 
Eithne  thought  passionately.  Duties! 
Duties!  And  Herbert’s  cold,  abrupt 
lust  in  the  dark.  He  talked  of  love. 
How  she  hated  . . . But  when  he 
got  up  from  the  beach  with  an  air  of 
finality,  brushing  the  sand  from  his 
knees,  she  rose  obediently  and  fol- 
lowed him. 

She  told  her  landlady  she  would 
be  leaving  on  Wednesday  week.  Mrs. 
Neville  nodded,  but  said  nothing. 
Eithne  was  grateful  that  she  made 
no  comment.  She  couldn’t  have 
borne  to  talk  about  her  going  back. 

For  the  next  few  days  Eithne  rose 
early  and  went  down  to  the  beach  as 
soon  as  she  had  eaten.  She  sat  all  day 
looking  out  expectantly  over  the  wa- 
ter. She  seemed  to  be  waiting  for 
something — she  didn’t  know  what — 
that  became  more  unlikely  with  the 
passing  of  every  hour.  Sometimes 
she  would  become  conscious  of  how 
tensely  she  was  waiting,  and  force 
herself  to  relax.  But  always  in  the 
next  moment  she  would  be  sitting 
‘upright  again,  looking  out  eagerly  at 
the  seals’  heads  and  the  light  on  the 
waves. 

Except  for  her  tense  waiting,  she 
felt  perfectly  calm.  Now  that  her  re- 
turn to  Corstophinc  was  so  near,  it 
aroused  no  emotion  in  her. 

Tuesday  came.  Dawkins  would  be 
at  Wracksand  tomorrow.  Eithne 
went  to  the  beach  early,  but  about 


84 


FANTASY  AND  SCIENCE  FICTION 


three  in  the  afternoon  she  felt  a sud- 
den impatience,  She  would  wait  no 
longer.  It  was  silly  to  wait  when  she 
didn’t  even  know  what  she  was 
waiting  for. 

She  packed  the  things  back  in  the 
lunch  basket  and  picked  up  her  baby. 
Una — Mary  Gertrude — gave  a sud- 
den wail.  Her  small  face  was  puck- 
ered with  rage.  She  had  been  fretful 
and  fractious,  crying  at  everything, 
for  the  last  few  days,  though  she 
had  been  such  a good  baby  before. 

Eithne  sat  down  again  and  tried 
to  comfort  her.  She  was  still  rocking 
the  child  and  singing  when  she 
heard  a step  on  the  sand. 

It  was  the  fisherman.  He  was  car- 
rying something  dark,  that  looked 
like  fur,  over  his  shoulders.  The  net 
he  had  carried  before  was  gone. 

Eithne  got  to  her  feet.  The  baby 
had  hushed  its  crying.  She  said,  “It 
was  you  I was  waiting  for.  But  I 
didn’t  think  you’d  come.” 

“Oh,  yes.  You  were  right,  you  see, 
when  you  thought  there  was  another 
path.” 

“Besides  the  two  human  ones? 
What’s  it  like,  underwave?” 

“Cool,  green  and  sliding,”  he  an- 
swered her  with  a smile.  “Better 
than  words.” 

“Better  than  Mrs.  Neville  told 
me?” 

“Yes,  better  than  her  words.” 

She  let  out  a long  breath.  Little 
Una  stirred.  “I  can’t  leave  my  baby,” 
Eithne  said. 

“Give  her  to  me.  Mrs.  May  said 
she  had  the  signs.” 


He  took  the  child  from  Eithnc’s 
arms  and  walked  out  into  the  water 
with  her.  Eithne,  looking  on,  felt  a 
moment  of  the  same  terrible  fear  she 
had  experienced  on  the  Baby’s  birth- 
night.  Una  would  drown,  she  had 
been  mad  to  trust  her  to  a stranger, 
she— Then  her  mind  steadied  and 
she  knew,  as  she  had  known  on  the 
night  of  her  confinement,  that  it  was 
all  right.  When  the  fisherman  came 
back  to  her,  she  was  sitting  quietly 
in  the  sand. 

He  gave  her  the  baby  and  sat 
down  beside  her.  Salt  water  was 
dripping  from  little  Una’s  clothes 
and  hair.  But  her  cheeks  were  pink, 
and  when  Eithne  cuddled  her  to  her, 
she  gave  a crow  of  delight, 

“She  can  live  underwave,  then, 
and  be  happy,”  Eithne  said. 

“Live,  and  be  very  happy,”  he  an- 
swered in  his  deep,  gentle  voice. 

The  tide  was  coming  in.  Eithne 
looked  slantwise  at  the  fisherman. 
She  scooped  up  a handful  of  sand 
and  let  it  trickle  through  her  fingers. 
Now  that  so  much  was  opening  be- 
fore her,  she  wanted  to  delay,  to  pro- 
long anticipation  on  the  very  edge  of 
bliss.  But  at  last  she  got  to  her  feet. 
“I  ...  we  ...  I am  ready  now. 
We’ll  come  with  you,”  she  said.  She 
began  to  fumble  with  the  buttons  of 
her  dress. 

He  had  risen  too  and  stood  facing 
her.  “Eithne — poor  Eithne — don’t 
you  understand?  You  have  to 
choose.  You  cannot  both  go.  There 
is  only  one  skin.” 

She  stared  at  him.  She  felt  a sense 


EITHNE 


85 


of  ruin  so  complete  that  it  seemed  to 
her  the  beach  was  heaving  under  her 
feet.  Her  mind  was  a kaleidoscope 
of  ideas.  Herbert — ^her  duties — Cor- 
stophine — the  baby’s  christening — 
discipline — the  two  paths.  Then  she 
held  the  child  out  to  him.  She  knew 
she  would  never  be  able  to  do  it  if 
she  delayed  another  moment.  “Take 
her,”  she  said. 

“Goodby,  Eithne,”  he  said  gently. 
“She  will  be  happy  underwave.”  For 
the  second  time  he  walked  out  into 
the  sea  with  Eithne’s  child. 

When  the  water  closed  over  his 
head  Eithne  realized  what  she  had 
done.  She  ran  wildly  out,  waist-deep, 
shoulder-deep,  pushing  against  the 
water’s  increasing  resistance.  She 
shrieked  Una’s  name  over  and  over. 

There  was  no  answer.  A little 
wave  bobbed  lightly  into  her  open 
mouth.  Far  out  on  the  water,  just  at 
the  edge  of  the  horizon,  there  was  a 
black  dot  that  might  have  been  a 
seal’s  head. 


She  ran  back  to  the  village.  Sob- 
bing, exhausted,  her  hair  trailing 
over  her  shoulders,  she  told  them 
her  story.  She  had  fallen  asleep,  the 
tide  had  come  in,  when  she  woke 
the  baby  had  been  gone.  Mrs.  Ne- 
ville held  her  close  and  tried  to  com- 
fort her. 

She  went  on  weeping. 

She  wept  when  she  gave  her  evi- 
dence at  the  inquest,  she  wept  when 
Herbert  reviled  her.  (He  would  get 
a separation,  he  said,  she  was  no  bet- 
ter than  a murderess,  he  would  live 
no  longer  with  a female  who  was  so 
irresponsible.)  She  wept  until  her 
eyes  were  almost  swollen  shut  with 
weeping. 

But  later,  when  her  tear-blinded 
eyes  met  Mrs.  May’s  wise  ones,  she 
realized  that  under  her  bitter  grief 
there  was  a spark  of  wmething  bet- 
ter. She  had,  after  all,  been  brave 
enough  to  choose  rightly.  It  was 
Eithne,  not  Una,  she  was  weeping 
for. 


In  this  age  of  tranquilizers,  Mrs.  Emsbwiller  offers  a short  and  grisly 
tale  of  the  perils  of  tranquil  optimism. 


You'll  Feel  "Fetter  . . . 

by  CAROL  EMSHWILLER 


The  Grind y perched  on  the  win- 
dow  sill  and  looked  out  at  the  rain 
pouring  down.  It  cocked  its  head, 
bird-hke,  grinned,  and  then  looked 
back  at  the  figure  stretched  out  like 
a corpse  on  the  bed. 

“Nice  day,”  it  said.  “Beautiful  day. 
It’s  raining,  but  that  makes  the  little 
flowers  grow.  Besides,  I like  rain.” 

The  shape  on  the  bed  rolled  over 
and  groaned. 

“Seven  o’clock,”  the  Grindy  said. 
“Nice  time  of  day,  seven.”  It  half- 
flew,  half-jumped  down  to  the  bed- 
side table.  “You’ll  feel  better,  you 
know,  once  you  get  up.” 

“Shut  up.”  Linno  pulled  at  his 
twisted  tunic,  and  half-opened  red- 
rimmed  eyes.  Something  bad,  some- 
thing very  bad  had  happened.  He 
felt  it  in  his  stomach,  a hard,  hot, 
indigestible  knot,  the  size  of  an 
apple. 

He  squinted  at  the  clock.  It  was 
only  seven,  early  for  him.  Yesterday 
he  had  got  up  at  seven  too.  Yester- 
day, he  thought,  yesterday  and 
something  bad.  Then  he  re- 


membered, closed  his  eyes  and 
groaned  again. 

“You  were  supposed  to  help,”  he 
told  the  Grindy. 

“I  am  helping.  Everything’s  go- 
ing to  be  just  fine.  You’ll  see.  It 
takes  a little  time,  that’s  all.  You 
mustn’t  be  impatient.” 

“It’s  too  late,”  Linno  slid  his  legs 
over  the  side  of  the  bed  and  sat  up. 
“Damn  fool  Grindy,  nobody  nee^ 
you  any  more.  Why  don’t  you  take 
off?  It’s  over.  It’s  been  done.” 

“I’m  what  the  Doctor  ordered,” 
the  Grindy  said.  “I’m  here  to  help 
you.  You  can  tell  me  all  about  it, 
you  know.  I won’t  tell  a soul.  I 
couldn’t  even  if  I wanted  to.  Why 
don’t  you  just  relax  and  tell  me  all 
about  it?  You’ll  feel  better.” 

Linno  rose  in  an  unsteady  arc, 
his  head  hanging  forward,  his 
shoulders  humped  up,  feet  wide  to 
steady  him.  He  grunted  a short 
syllable  of  a laugh.  “You  saw  the 
whole  thing,  the  whole  bloody 
thing,”  he  said. 

He  limped  across  the  room  and 


86 


you’ll  feel  better  . . . 

opened  a cupboard  door  to  reveal 
the  kitchen  unit,  an  ancient  stove 
with  food  burned  black  on  its  sur- 
face, a small  freezer  unit  under  it, 
a deep  sink  to  one  side  with  dirty 
dishes  in  it. 

He  turned  to  the  coffeepot, 
opened  the  lid  and  stared  inside  at 
the  inch  of  coffee  left  in  the  bottom. 

Then  he  turned  the  stove  on  un- 
der it,  went  back  and  sat  on  the  bed. 

“Lousy  weather,”  he  muttered. 
“Damn  lousy  weather.” 

“Oh,  it’s  not  as  bad  as  all  that,” 
the  Grindy  said  cheerfully  and 
grinned. 

“That’s  what  you  always  say,  no 
matter  what  it  is.  Even  about  that 
other  you  say,  ‘It’s  not  as  bad  as 
all  that.’  ” 

“Of  course  it  isn’t  so  bad,”  the 
Grindy  said.  “Look  on  the  brighter 
side  as  I do.” 

“What  brighter  side  is  that.^” 

“I’m  sure  you  can  find  it  for  your- 
self if  you  try.  Just  try,  really  try, 
and  you’ll  see.  I don’t  have  to  tell 
you.” 

Linno  got  up  again  and  went  to 
get  the  boiling  coffee.  He  poured 
it  into  a cup,  sipped  at  it  noisily, 
burning  his  lips  and  tongue. 

Burning,  burning  was  what  he 
deserved,  he  thought.  Only  the 
Grindy  deserved  it  too.  It  was  the 
Grindy  that  woke  him  up  at  seven 
yesterday  and  gave  him  a chance  to 
prepare  and  get  there  on  time. 

Of  course  he  had  told  it  to  do  it 
the  night  before.  “Wake  me  up  at 
seven,  Grindy,”  he  had  said.  “Wake 


87 

me  up  in  time  to  get  to  her  when 
she’s  alone.  I’ll  show  her  she  can’t 
play  games  with  me,”  and  the  fool 
Grindy  had  done  it.  It  had  made 
possible  just  what  it  was  supposed 
to  help  prevent. 

He  sipped  again  and  then  he  put 
the  half  empty  cup  down  in  the 
sink  on  top  of  the  other  dirty  dishes. 

“How  long  are  you  going  to  stay 
around.?”  He  went  back  to  the  bed 
and  lay  down  again  on  his  back. 
“Your  job’s  over.  You  did  just  fine. 
Now  I wish  to  god  you’d  leave  me 
alone.” 

“You  didn’t  go  to  see  Dr,  Mor- 
ris yesterday.  You  went  to  see  that 
girl  instead.”  The  Grindy  flew  up  to 
the  ceiling  and  perched  there,  upside 
down.  “Dr.  Morris  said  I would  do 
you  good  for  awhile,  make  you  feel 
better,  and  that’s  what  I’m  doing. 
Anyway,  I can’t  leave  till  Dr.  Morris 
tells  me  to.  You  know  that.  Besides, 
am  I so  bad,  really.?” 

“God.”  Linno  shut  his  eyes,  “You 
were  supposed  to  help  and  all  you 
did  was  flutter  around  and  say, 
‘That’s  fine.’  ” 

“You  must  remember,”  the 
Grindy  said,  “that  most  things  turn 
out  all  right  in  the  end.  All  you  have 
to  do  is  wait  a bit.  The  rain  goes 
away;  the  sun  comes;  that’s  the  way 
life  is.  Things  arc  never  as  bad  as 
they  seem  in  the  dark  moments.  We 
all  have  our  periods  of  self-doubt 
and  despair.  It’s  perfectly  natural. 
But  you  must  reaUze  that  you’ll  feel 
better  soon.” 

“I  did  that  thing  yesterday.  I did 


88 

it  but  of  course  I’ll  feel  better  about 
it  soon.  Things  are  not  so  bad. 
I'hey’re  just  fine,  in  fact.  Just  fine.” 

“That’s  better.”  The  Grindy 
walked  down  the  side  of  the  wall  to 
the  dresser  and  perched  on  the  edge 
of  it.  “I’m  glad  to  hear  you  say  it 
that  way.  We  know,  you  and  I,  that 
you’re  not  a bad  sort,  really,  and 
whatever  you  do,  it’s  never  as  bad  as 
it  seems  to  you  in  these  low  times.” 

“You’re  talking  about  murder,” 
Linno  said,  “and  blood,  blood  and 
meat,  like  in  a butcher  shop.”  His 
eyes  were  slits.  “I  can’t  get  it  out  of 
my  mind.” 

The  Grindy  hopped  down  to  the 
bedside  table.  “Tell  me  about  it,”  it 
said.  “It’ll  do  you  good.  Why  don’t 
you  just  tell  me  all  about  it.”  Its 
voice  was  soothing,  hypnotic. 

“I  didn’t  really  want  to  do  it.”  Lin- 
no’s  face  looked  blueish  against  the 
white  sheets.  “Or  perhaps  I did  then, 
only  now  I don’t.  It’s  funny,  that 
first  part  . . . how  I killed  her  . . . 
I don’t  even  remember.  It’s  after- 
wards I can’t  forget,  but  there  was 
no  other  way  to  get  rid  of  the  body. 
No  other  way  but  to  cut  it  up  into 
hams  and  hocks  and  shoulder  roasts, 
wrap  it  up,  and  take  it  out  in  the 

“You  did  all  right.” 

“What.'”’  Linno  raised  himself  on 
his  elbow  and  stared  at  the  Grindy. 
“What  did  you  say.?” 

“You  did  fine.  Of  course,  as  you 
say,  it  was  the  only  way.  There  was 
nothing  else  to  do,  so  you  did  the 
right  thing.  You  sec  that  too.  It  was 


FANTASY  AND  SCIENCE  FICTION 

fine  and  everything  is  turning  out 
for  the  best,  like  I said  it  would.” 

Linno  sat  up  and  leaned  his  face 
close  to  the  Grindy.  “I  killed  her,”  he 
said,  and  banged  his  fist  down  inches 
from  the  bird-like  creature.  The 
Grindy  jumped  to  the  wall  above  the 
table. 

“Now  don’t  disparage  yourself,”  it 
said.  “You  did  the  right  thing.  You 
admit  that.  You  mustn’t  tear  your- 
self apart  like  this.  Of  course  we  all 
do  it  sometimes,  it’s  natural,  but  you 
must  remember  that  basiaally  you’re 
a nice  person.  Wouldn’t  you  say 
that?  Think  about  it  now,  sincerely, 
and  don’t  be  influenced  by  your 
mood.” 

“Nice!  Damn  nice!”  Linno  stood 
up  and  stretched  a hand  toward  the 
Grindy,  but  it  trotted  higher,  to  the 
edge  of  the  ceiling. 

“I  think  you  really  ought  to  see 
Dr.  Morris,”  it  said.  “I’m  sure  he 
missed  you  yesterday.  Don’t  you 
think  now  would  be  a good  time  to 
go?  He’ll  make  you  feel  better 
about  everything.” 

“Yes,  he’ll  make  me  feci  just  fine 
. . . about  everything.”  Linno  stood 
on  a chair  and  leaped  for  the  Grindy 
and  then  fell  to  the  floor  on  his 
knees.  He  got  up,  looking  in  each 
corner  of  the  ceiling  for  the  Grindy. 
“You  were  supposed  to  make  me 
feel  better  before  it  happened.  Why 
didn’t  you?  Why?  Why?” 

“Shout  if  you  want  to,”  the  Grindy 
said  from  the  top  of  the  closet  door, 
“Get  it  off  your  chest,  that’s  the 
thing  to  do.” 


you’ll  feel  better  . . . 


89 


Linno  sat  down  on  the  floor  and 
leaned  his  back  against  the  bed.  “Get 
it  off  your  chest  and  forget  it,”  he 
muttered.  “Forget  the  whole  affair.” 

His  feet  stretched  limply  in  front  of 
him,  his  hands  lay  palms  up. 

The  Grindy  jumped  to  the  floor. 

Linno  kept  his  eyes  on  a spot  just  in 
front  of  him. 

“I’ve  told  you,”  the  Grindy  said. 

“All  we  have  to  do  is  wait  a bit.  The 
rain  will  stop,  the  mood  will  go,  and 
you’ll  feel  better.  Everything’s  going 
to  come  out  all  right.”  The  Grindy 
hopped  closer  and  Linno  turned  his 
legs  sideways  under  him. 

“The  little  blow-off  did  you  good, 

I think.”  The  Grindy  cocked  its 
head  and  grinned.  It  stepped  for- 
ward five  small  steps  into  the  spot 
where  Linno  was  staring. 

Linno  pounced  then.  There  was  a 

Look  for  the  July  issue  of 

F&SF’s  new  sister  magazine,  now  on  sale 

This  month’s  features: 

JAMES  E.  GUNN’S  "Not  So  Great  an  Enemy” — a tale  of  love  and  death 
in  a world  of  the  future — a world  where  money  bought  eternal  life,  and 
poverty  meant  slow,  terrible  death.  . . . 

LESTER  DEL  REY’s  "Seat  of  Judgment” — once  every  hundred  years  a 
living  goddess  was  born  to  the  trolls  of  Sayon — a goddess  almost  too  human 
...  too  desirable.  ... 

TOM  GOD’WIN’s  "Aces  Loaded” — Bull  thought  the  redhead  was  on  his 
side  against  the  gambling  combine  until  he  realized  that  her  needle  gun 
was  aimed  at  him.  . . . 

Plus  stories  by  H.  Beam  Piper,  C.  M.  Kornbluth,  Paul  Janvier  and  Tom 
Godwin — and  an  exciting  new  book  column  by  Theodore  Sturgeon. 


flurry  of  hands  and  wings  and  the 
boing  of  a broken  spring. 

“Awk,”  screamed  the  Grindy,  Just 
once. 

Linno  opened  his  hands  and 
dropped  the  crushed  thing  on  the 
floor,  a mixture  of  cogs  and  bone, 
wires  and  blood.  He  picked  up  the 
tag  from  the  leg,  fallen  to  one  side. 
Ego  Builder,  B 12-25,  Psy.  dept.,  it 
said. 

He  kicked  at  the  bird  thing.  Its 
mouth  still  seemed  to  grin. 

“Everything’s  not  going  to  be  all 
right,”  he  said.  “Everything’s  not 
fine.”  He  got  his  jacket  and  went  to 
the  door.  “You  made  me  see  that, 
you  crazy  bird,  but  you  shouldn’t 
grin  like  that  about  it.” 

And  he  went  out  to  the  nearest 
police  station  to  tell  them  about  the 
girl  in  the  basket. 


^Recommended  fading 

by  ANTHONY  BOUCHER 


The  only  marked  “trend”  so  far 
this  year  is  a quite  unexpected  one: 
the  appearance  of  a surprising  num- 
ber of  short  story  collections  which 
are  unclassifiable  yet  recognizably  all 
in  the  same  category. 

To  clarify  that  paradox:  These  are 
books  which  do  not  make  the  usual 
category<lassifications  of  fantasy,  sci- 
ence fiction,  mystery,  crime  fiction, 
guignol,  “straight”  or  “mainstream” 
fiction;  yet  the  books  have  unity, 
within  themselves  and  with  each 
other,  in  the  oddness  of  their  tales — 
an  oddness  best  defined  by  Whit  and 
Hallie  Burnett  as  “what  happens 
when  the  night  side  of  the  mind 
takes  over,” 

So  far  this  year  this  department 
has  reviewed  the  Burnetts’  19  tales 
OF  terror  (Bantam,  35<).  Don 
Congdon’s  stories  for  the  dead  of 
NIGHT  (Dell,  35?“)  and  Robert  M. 
Oiates’s  the  hour  after  westerly 
(Harcourt,  Brace,  $3.50) — and  one 
might  add,  as  at  least  closely  re- 
lated, Joseph  Whitehill’s  able  baker 
AND  OTHERS  (Little,  Brown-Atlantic, 
$3.75),  though  its  closest  approach  to 
fantasy  is  a curious  Kafka-like  tale  of 
not-quite-rcal  espionage. 

Now  come  two  more  disturbing 


revelations  of  the  night  side:  Alfred 
Hitchcock’s  anthology,  stories  they 
wouldn't  let  me  do  on  tv  (Simon  & 
Schuster,  $3.95),  and  Charles  Beau- 
mont’s first  collection  of  his  short 
stories,  the  hunger  and  other  stor- 
ies (Putnam’s,  $3.50) — both  books 
belonging  about  equally  in  a fantasy 
hbrary,  a crime  library,  or  a library 
of  straight  (if  off-trail)  fiction. 

The  Hitchcock  collection  is  almost 
exactly  parallel  in  virtues  and  de- 
fects, with  the  Congdon  volume — 
which  was  reviewed  here  last  month 
with  the  suggestion  that  it  might 
have  been  retitled  most  frequently 
REPRINTED  TERROR  TALES.  The  StOrieS 
are  almost  uniformly  flawless  . . . 
and  16  of  the  25  have  been  previously 
anthologized:  Lukjindoo,  How  Love 
Came  to  Professor  Guildea,  The 
Most  Dangerous  Game,  Couching 
at  the  Door  . . . But  the  volume  still 
deserves  high  marks  for  generosity 
(over  150,000  words),  for  the  qual- 
ity of  its  hitherto  unreprinted  stor- 
ies, which  are  (particularly  a won- 
derful Bradbury)  almost  on  a par 
with  the  classics,  and  for  the  fact 
that  even  some  of  the  anthologized 
stories  are  still  relatively  unfamiliar 
— especially  Leonid  Andreyev’s  The 


RECOMMENDED  READING 


91 


Abyss,  which  is  the  most  (in  the 
fullest  sense)  terrible  story  I have 
read. 

Even  with  some  first-hand  knowl- 
edge of  continuity  acceptance  (net- 
workese  for  censorship),  it’s  hard  to 
see  why  some  of  these  stories  are 
tabu  for  TV.  I doubt  if  any  public 
medium  other  than  the  printed 
word  could  ever  present  such  stories 
as  the  Bradbury  or  the  Andreyev 
(and  even  the  printed  word  may  not 
be  safe  if  we  don’t  firmly  resist  the 
efforts  of  today’s  many  bands  of  self- 
appointed  extra-legal  censors') ; but  a 
vigorous  dosage  of  at  least  half  the 
stories  here  wouldn’t  do  television 
any  harm.  A minor  note  of  humor  is 
that  one  of  these  TV-impossibles 
(Margaret  St.  Clair’s  admirable  mur- 
der-irony, The  Perfectionist)  has 
been  dramatized  on  TV,  if  very 
badly. 

What  a reviewer  keeps  hoping  for 
is  a collection  that  is  both  excellent 
and  unhackneyed.  The  Beaumont 
volume  is  certainly  not  hackneyed 
(14  of  its  17  stories  are  new  to  book 
form,  and  7 appear  not  to  have  been 
published  before  even  in  magazines) 
but  its  excellence  is  debatable — at 
least  to  a Beaumont  enthusiast  of 
long  standing.  The  size  of  the  vol- 
ume (80,000  words)  is  partly  at  fault 
here : Beaumont  or  his  editor  has  in- 
cluded a few  items  weak  in  either 
concept  or  execution,  a story  here 
and  there  that  needs  just  a little  more 
work  to  be  a masterpiece  . . . and  is 
exasperating  in  its  inadequate  form. 

But  this  exasperation  is  born  only 


of  the  feeling  that  the  first  Collected 
Beaumont  should  have  been  sensa- 
tionally impressive — and  at  that,  it 
quite  probably  will  be  to  those  who 
read  neither  F&SF  nor  Playboy  and 
come  upon  Beaumont’s  talents  for 
the  first  time. 

Technically,  there  are  only  4 fan- 
tasies here,  including  2 from  these 
pages  and  one  {The  Crool^ed  Man) 
which  I could  include  in  a (so  far 
extremely  slim)  Hitchcock-imitation 

called  STORIES  THEY  WOULDN’T  LET  XtE 
DO  IN  F&SF.  But  as  with  all  of  the 
books  in  this  night-side  genre,  the 
general  effect,  even  in  the  “main- 
stream” fiction,  is  of  an  eery  uncer- 
tain world  of  unexpected  terrors  and 
betrayals.  And  if  the  effect  is  not 
always  perfectly  sustained,  there  are 
enough  wholly  admirable  stories 
here  to  make  the  book  worth  every 
reader’s  while. 

Close  to  this  new  uncategorized 
category  is  the  welcome  reprint  of 
Isak  Dinesen’s  1942  winter’s  tales 
(Dell,  35^),  part  fantasy,  part  . . . 
well,  simply  curious,  and  ever  bril- 
liant and  beautiful.  A newer  Euro- 
pean writer  of  marked  interest  is 
Use  Aichinger,  vvhose  the  bound 
MAN  AND  OTHER  STORIES  (Noonday, 
$2.75)  reveals  her  as  a sort  of  con- 
cise Kafka.  The  not-quite-fantasy 
title  story  is  as  striking  a narrative 
use  of  multi-valued  symbolism  as 
I’ve  read  in  a long  time;  and  the 
other  tales  (ranging^  through  the 
macabre,  the  supernatural  and  even 
a strange  sort  of  si.)  should  delight 
sophisticated  palates. 


92 

We  return  to  normally  categorized 
books  of  short  stories  with  James 
Blish’s  THE  SEEDLING  STARS  (Gnome, 
$3),  which  is  si.  and  the  survivor 
AND  OTHERS  by  H.  P.  Lovecraft  and 
August  Derleth  (Arkham,  $3), 
which  is  Weird  Tales  horror. 

The  Blish  book  collects  5 of  his 
stories,  ranging  from  a short  to  a 
short  novel,  on  “pantropy” — the  in- 
terstellar dissemination  of  the  hu- 
man race  by  genetically  adapting 
man  to  environments  in  which  man- 
as-we-know-him  could  not  survive — 
a concept  doubtless  familiar  to  you 
from  A Time  to  Survive  (F&SF, 
February,  1956)  and  the  thrice-an- 
thologized Surface  Tension,  both  in- 
cluded here.  There  are  times,  partic- 
ularly in  the  latter  story,  when  Blish 
seems  to  pass  the  most  remote 
bounds  of  scientific  extrapolation; 
but  for  most  of  the  book  the  details 
are  worked  out  in  magnificently  con- 
vincing manner,  to  the  point  where 
the  reader  knows  precisely  what  it 
is  like  to  be  an  ammonia-blooded 
citizen  of  Ganymede,  a monkey-like 
treetopdweller  on  Tellura,  a micro- 
scopic pond-swimmer  on  a planet  of 
Tau  Ceti  . . . and  still  to  be  a man. 
It’s  a volume  nicely  illustrating  the 
characteristic  Blish  balance  between 
thinking  and  storytelling,  with  each 
reinforcing  the  other. 

“Among  the  papers  of  the  late  H. 
P.  Lovecraft,’’  Derleth  tells  us,  “were 
various  notes  and/or  outlines  for 
stories  which  he  did  not  live  to 
write.  . . . These  scattered  notes 
were  put  together  by  August  Der- 


FANTASY  AND  SCIENCE  FICTION 

leth,  whose  finished  stories  grown 
from  Lovecraft ’s  suggested  plots  are 
offered  here  as  a final  collaboration, 
post-mortem.’’ 

In  most  of  these  7 stories  (all  new 
to  book  form  and  5 unpublished  any- 
where), I can’t  help  feeling  that 
H.PX,.  knew  very  well  what  he  was 
doing  when  he  left  the  outlines  un- 
completed. Sometimes  the  idea  is, 
viewed  soberly,  a little  ludicrous; 
sometimes  the  concept  has  been 
treated  more  effectively  in  some 
other  episode  of  the  Canon  of 
Cthulhu.  Admirers  of  Solar  Pons 
know  Derleth’s  skill  at  pastiche;  he 
does  his  best  here,  but  somewhat 
unavailingly  . . . until  the  last  story, 
when,  with  a flash  of  inspiration,  he 
introduces  H.P.L.  himself  as  a char- 
acter into  one  of  his  unfinished  plots 
and  produces  a warmly  moving  trib- 
ute of  love  from  one  writer  to  an- 
other which  sets  a perfect  seal  upon 
this  post-mortem  collaboration. 

Fantasy  collectors  should  note  the 
availability  of  a new  stock  list  of  the 
publications  of  Arkham  House,  My- 
croft  & Moran  and  Stanton  & Lee — 
all  manifestations  of  author-editor- 
publisher  Derleth.  It’s  a valuable 
listing  of  a large  number  of  key 
titles  (Arkham  was  the  pioneer 
among  semi-professional  specialty 
publishers),  many  of  them  about  to 
go  out  of  print;  and  the  notes  and 
comments  on  the  books  make  the 
pamphlet  itself  a desirable  addition 
to  one’s  collection.  Write  to  August 
Derleth,  Sauk  City,  Wisconsin — and 
there  may  be  some  copies  available. 


RECOMMENDED  READING 


93 


too,  of  AUGUST  DERLETH ! THIRTY  YEARS 

OF  WRITING,  1926-1956,  a fascinating 
30-page  booklet  on  an  all  but  inex- 
haustible subject.  (And  how  I wish, 
as  editor,  collector  and  bibliographer, 
that  all  authors  would  prepare  such 
booklets  on  themselves!) 

Philip  K.  Dick’s  first  novel  solar 
LOTTERY  (Ace,  1955;  still  in  print, 
35^)  was  a very  good  one — ^and  I 
might  take  this  opportunity  to  re- 
mind librarians  that  a hardcover  edi- 
tion, retitled  world  of  chance,  is 
available  from  England  (Rich  & 
Cowan,  9 6 d.).  Now,  after  two 

hasty  and  disappointing  efforts,  Dick 
easily  tops  it  with  his  fourth  book, 
EYE  IN  THE  SKY  (Ace,  35^).  This  is 
so  nicely  calculated  and  adroitly  re- 
vealed a work  that  I’d  prefer  to  say 
little  about  its  plot  or  even  its  con- 
cepts; you  should  read  it,  and  its  as- 
sumptions and  implications  should 
hit  you  unexpectedly  exactly  as  they 
are  planned.  I hope  it’s  enough  to 
say  that  it  deals  with  the  alternate- 
universe  theme;  that  I’ve  never  seen 
that  theme  handled  with  greater 
technical  dexterity  or  given  more 
psychological  meaning;  that  Dick 
has  emphatically  come  of  age  as  a 
novelist,  as  well  as  a technician;  and 
that  this  may  very  well  be  the  best 
si.  novel  even  of  a year  which  has 
so  far  produced  outstanding  books 
by  Asimov,  Bester  and  Heinlein. 

Chad  Oliver’s  the  winds  of  time 
(Doubleday,  $2.95)  would  lend  it- 
self all  too  easily  to  the  type  of  re- 
view which  synopsizes  the  plot  in 
order  to  prove  the  book  is  balder-. 


dash.  Indeed,  I reread  the  synopsis 
on  my  own  file<ard  and  find  it  a 
little  hard  to  credit  that  I like  the 
book  itself  as  much  as  I do.  I doubt 
if  you’ll  quite  believe  the  meeting  of 
civilizations,  across  the  light-years 
and  the  millennia,  that  Oliver  de- 
picts; I’m  fairly  sure  you’ll  find  the 
structure  of  the  book  technically  im- 
balanced and  the  solution  unsatisfac- 
tory— and  not  in  the  deliberate  sense 
in  which  Heinlein  first  employed 
that  phrase.  Yet  it’s  hard  to  name 
many  more  purely  readable  books  in 
our  field  of  late.  It’s  warmly  human 
(and,  for  that  matter,  warmly  alien 
too — which  is  part  of  its  point), 
nicely  observant  of  our  own  con- 
temporary culture — in  short,  Oliver, 
may  have  goofed  in  articulating  the 
skeleton,  but  he  could  hardly  have 
fleshed  it  more  attractively. 

[Only  look,  Chad,  you  just  do 
not,  in  this  day  and  age,  end  a book 
with; 

This  was  not  the  end. 

This  was  only  the  beginning. 
Or  am  I suffering  from  an  excess 
allergy  to  corn .?  ] 

I could  probably  make  fun  of 
Charles  R.  Long’s  the  infinite 
BRAIN  (Avalon,  $2.75)  by  plot-synop- 
sis; only  first  I would  have  to  un- 
derstand the  plot — a feat  approach- 
ing impossibility  on  one  reading.  It 
has  something  to  do  with  a world 
35  light-years  away  which  is  identi- 
cal to  this  one  in  geography,  history, 
language,  culture,  etc.  99.9%  of  the 
time,  with  approximately  0.1%  com- 
plete difference;  and  its  action  is 


94 

roughly  as  complicated  as  the  square 
(or  even  cube)  of  van  Vogt.  But  the 
fast-cutting  montages  make  for  ter- 
rific tempo;  suspense  is  unusually 
high  (if  often  anticlimactic  in  reso- 
lution); and  it’s  all  lively  entertain- 
ment, whether  any  of  it  makes 
sense  or  not. 

Much  the  same  can  be  said  of 
Robert  Moore  Williams’  doomsday 
EVE  (Ace,  35^),  which  is  a story  of 
World  War  III  and  “the  new  people,” 
who  hope  to  avert  man’s  self-de- 
struction by  operating  through  “the 
race  mind.”  I’ve  never  encountered 
more  unconvincing  and  inconsistent 
mutants  (if  such  indeed  they  are: 
the  text  is  contradictory);  but  they 
engage  in  fast,  vigorous  action,  with 
some  of  Williams’  accustomed  mysti- 
cism but  little  of  his  heaviness.  The 
same  double-book  contains  a reprint 
of  Eric  Frank  Russell’s  effective  pur- 
suit-thriller, THREE  TO  CONQUER  (seri- 
alized as  CALL  HIM  dead). 

Nicholas  E.  Wyckoff’s  the  brain- 
tree  MISSION  (Macmillan,  $350)  is. 
I’ll  venture  to  guess,  the  first  World- 
of-If  story  ever  sponsored  by  the 


FANTASY  AND  SCIENCE  FICTION 

Book-of-the-Month  Club;  and  I’m 
curious  as  to  how  the  Club’s  vast 
audience  will  react  to  its  first  en- 
counter with  this  challenging  and 
enchanting  genre  of  fiction.  The  // 
here  is  a pretty  one:  if,  in  1770, 
North  had  conceived  and  Pitt  en- 
dorsed a policy  of  naming  six  liber- 
ty-loving American  earls  to  the 
House  of  Lords,  as  a prelim- 
inary to  arranging  the  representation 
of  American  boroughs  in  the  House 
of  Commons. 

This  is  the  well-told  story  of  a 
cultivated  nobleman’s  voyage  to 
America  to  negotiate  such  a pro- 
posal, and  his  selection  of  John 
Adams  as  the  first  belted  Bostonian 
earl;  and  I am  wholly  convinced 
that,  in  Mr.  Wyckofl’s  words,  “the 
results  must  have  been  almost  pre- 
cisely those  set  forth  in  the  tale.”  The 
feeling  for  the  truths  of  history  is  as 
admirable  as  the  pastiche  of  Eigh- 
teenth Century  prose;  and  if  the  au- 
thor has  obviously  fallen  in  love- 
across-the-centuries  with  Abigail 
Adams,  he  persuades  you  that  such 
a course  is  inevitable. 


Charles  Van  Doren’s  reign  as  the  Heaviest-W inner-on- Any-Single- 
Quiz-Show  was  brief;  but  its  effects  may,  I hope,  be  lasting.  Other 
quiz  heroes  have  been  monomaniacs  or  prodigies;  Van  Doren  won  the 
affection  (not  the  awe)  of  the  public  partly  because — aside  from  his 
unquestionable  personal  charm  and  gambling  spirit — he  revealed  him- 
self as  a genuinely  cultivated  man:  no  narrow  specialist,  but  a curious 
young  man  whose  wide-ranging  intellect  had  touched  upon  the 
damnedest  things.  This  ranging  curiosity  is  (as  Cyril  Kornbluth 
points  out  earlier  in  this  issue)  a characteristic  trait  of  the  writing 
profession;  and  it’s  not  surprising  that  Charles  Van  Doren  is  begin- 
ning to  follow  his  family's  tradition.  To  date  he  has  published  one 
short  story  (in  McCall’s^  and  one  book,  Lincoln’s  commando 
(Harper,  1957),  a biography  of  Commander  Cushing  written  in 
collaboration  with  Ralph  J.  Roske.  To  this  brief  bibliography  we  now 
add  a disturbing  vision  of  a possible,  not-too-remote  future,  "if  this 
goes  on.  . . 


s% 

by  CHARLES  VAN  DOREN 


The  man  walked  with  his  head 
down,  raising  it  only  from  time  to 
time  to  check  the  numbers  on  the 
buildings.  His  coat  collar  was  turned 
up;  the  cheap  material  was  evidently 
not  sulBcient  protection  against  the 
cold  wind.  He  kept  to  the  outside 
of  the  sidewalk,  stepping  off  into  the 
street  when  a party  of  people  passed, 
shoving  him.  He  did  not  shove  back. 
He  kept  his  left  hand  in  his  pocket; 
his  right  hung  at  his  side,  blue  with 
the  cold. 


32,  34,  36 — he  turned  into  the 
large  metal  doorway,  paused 
between  the  photoelectric  cells,  and 
entered  the  opening  door.  He  mut- 
tered his  name  to  the  electronic 
secretary  in  the  steel  and  glass  lobby 
and  passed  through  the  turnstile, 
continuing  down  the  corridor  past 
its  rows  of  doors.  He  glanced  at  the 
etched  words  on  the  frosted  glass: 
manager,  sales  manager,  vice-pres- 
ident. The  last  door  on  the  right, 
the  machine  had  said.  A woman 


95 


96 

passed  him,  walking  quickly.  He  no- 
ticed that  she  wore  the  new  Water- 
Pruf  shoes.  He  wondered  for  a mo- 
ment if  he  might  buy  some,  but 
remembered  that  the  allowance  the 
SRP  gave  him  would  never  pay  their 
rather  high  price,  personnel — last 
door  on  the  right.  He  stood  while 
the  door  opened,  clenching  his  left 
hand  in  his  pocket,  and  entered  the 
small  office.  Mr.  Watson  looked  up, 
smiling. 

“Sit  down,  sit  down,  Mr. — ” He 
checked  with  a card  on  his  desk. 
“Yes  . . . hm  . . . We  have  your 
letter.  A good  letter.  Now  I hope  you 
don’t  mind  if  we  ask  you  some 
further  questions.”  The  man  nod- 
ded, his  eyes  on  the  floor,  and  Mr. 
Watson  began  to  ask  questions  in  a 
smooth,  sure  voice.  From  time  to 
time  the  box  on  the  desk  interrupted 
with  mechanical  announcements. 
“And  of  course  your  papers,”  he 
ended.  The  man  took  them  from 
the  inside  pocket  of  his  coat  and 
handed  them,  trembling,  across  the 
desk.  Mr.  Watson  examined  them, 
his  eyebrows  raised.  “Yes  . . . hm 
. . . Everything  seems  to  be  in  or- 
der.” He  checked  with  the  card 
once  more,  and  looked  up  smiling. 
“We’ll  call  you.  . . . Oh  yes,  one 
thing  of  course,  before  you  go — just 
a formality.  Your  hand.?  You’ll  show 
me  your  hand.?” 

The  man  did  not  look  up  from  the 
paper-strewn  desk  at  which  he  had 
been  staring  during  the  interview. 
Slowly  and  unwillingly  he  drew  his 
left  hand  from  his  pocket  and  ex- 


FANTASY  AND  SCIENCE  FICTION 

tended  it,  palm  up,  across  the  desk. 

Tattooed  on  the  palm  were  the 
letters  S R,  in  green. 

Mr.  Watson  did  not  seem  surprised. 
“I  thought  as  much.  The  papers — 
they’re  a bad  job,  you  know.  It’s 
quite  easy  to  forge  papers  nowadays. 
I’m  aware  of  that,  but  it  isn’t  that 
easy.  Now  look  here,  you  l{now  we 
can’t  hire  you?  You  fellows  . . . 
Why  do  you  keep  on  trying?  You 
know  we  always  ask  to  see — ” 

“Yes,”  the  man  mumbled,  contin- 
uing to  stare  at  the  desk.  “I  thought 
— It’s  just  that  I haven’t  had  a job  in 
four  years.  I need  a job  ...  to  make 
a new  start  . . .”  His  voice  trem- 
bled and  he  stopped  speaking. 

Mr.  Watson  was  not  angry.  He 
leaned  forward  over  the  desk.  “A 
new  start.  It  isn’t  possible,  you  know. 
The  damage  is  done.  Anyway,  I 
don’t  see  why  you  fellows  want 
jobs.  You  keep  coming  here,  you 
keep  coming  everywhere.  In  a way 
I envy  you.  I mean,  not  having  to 
work.” 

The  man  said  nothing. 

“The  Project  takes  care  of  you, 
doesn’t  it?”  Mr.  Watson  went  on. He 
became  indignant.  “You  should  be 
grateful.  In  the  Other  Country  they 
shoot  fellows  like  you.  We  don’t 
restrain  you,  you  can  go  anywhere 
you  please.  We  feed  you,  give  you 
clothes,  a place  to  sleep.  . . . Why, 
you’ve  got  a lot  to  be  thankful  for!” 
The  box  on  the  desk  announced 
another  appointment,  and  the  man 
rose  wearily  from  his  seat  and 
walked  to  the  door.  “Now  I don’t 


S R 


97 


want  to  see  you  back  here,”  Mr. 
Watson  said.  “There  won’t  be  any 
sense  in  trying.  The  machine  has 
your  picture,  you  won’t  be  admitted 
again.  I’m  sorry,”  he  added,  turning 
to  the  dictaphone  and  speaking  into 
it.  He  glanced  up.  “You  know  quite 
well  . , The  man  went  out  of  the 
door. 

It  was  beginning  to  be  dusk  in  the 
street  outside  and  the  cold  wind 
blew  dust  in  a swirling  cloud  around 
him  as  he  turned  the  corner.  He 
shivered,  and  headed  for  the  neon 
lights  that  announced  an  Auto-Snak. 
He  sat  down  at  the  counter  and 
ordered  a cup  of  coffee,  leaning  for- 
ward to  speak  into  the  microphone 
in  front  of  his  place.  He  watched 
without  interest  while  the  machine 
collected  cup  and  saucer,  poured  the 
black  liquid,  and  placed  his  drink 
before  him.  “Ten  cents,”  the  speaker 
rasped,  and  he  reached  in  his  pocket 
and  fingered  a coin,  checked  to  see 
that  it  was  stamped  with  the  regula- 
tion SRP  across  the  Roosevelt,  and 
inserted  it  in  the  slot.  He  glanced 
round  him  and  found  that  he  was 
alone  at  the  counter,  though  in  a 
booth  two  old  men  were  arguing 
about  whether  the  Other  Country’s 
latest  note  had  been  bellicose  or  not. 
The  man  rounded  his  shoulders  and 
withdrew  his  left  hand  from  his 
pocket  and  laid  it,  as  though  it  did 
not  belong  to  him,  on  the  counter 
before  him.  Slowly  he  opened  the 
fingers  until  the  tattooed  letters  were 
visible.  He  moved  the  fingers  of  his 
right  hand  gently  over  the  letters. 


marveling  as  he  had  done  so  many 
times  that  there  was  no  tactile  evi- 
dence that  the  stigma  was  there. 
With  his  lips  pressed  tightly  together, 
a pale  line  across  his  face,  he  con- 
tracted the  skin  of  the  palm  in  an 
unsuccessful  attempt  to  make  the 
letters  disappear  in  the  folds  of  skin. 
He  could  change  them  to  C P by 
bringing  the  little  finger  forward 
and  cupping  the  palm  slightly,  but 
only  by  closing  the  hand  entirely 
could  he  make  them  disappear.  He 
replaced  the  hand  in  his  pocket  and, 
having  looked  around  to  sec  that  no 
one  had  been  watching,  finished  his 
coffee  and  walked  out  into  the  street. 

Lights  were  beginning  to  come  on 
everywhere  as  he  hurried  home.  He 
walked  in  the  street,  to  avoid  the 
crowds  that  filled  the  sidewalks.  A 
single  man  was  likely  to  be  an  S R 
these  days  (though  it  wasn’t  always 
so,  of  course),  and  he  did  not  enjoy 
being  shoved  and  hearing  the  re- 
marks when  he  passed  too  close  to 
people.  He  well  knew  that  everyone 
was  not  as  reasonable  as  Mr.  Watson, 
But  Personnel  Directors  were  often 
that  way,  of  course,  . . . Probably  it 
was  Government  Policy.  He  stopped 
at  the  corner  and  looked  down  the 
street  toward  the  large  Project  Build- 
ing. There  was  the  usual  crowd  of 
rowdies  and  teenagers  in  front  of  it, 
who  would  push  him  and  yell  at 
him  as  he  walked  up  the  steps  and 
waited  for  the  doors  to  open,  and 
he  thought  for  a moment  of  walking 
the  streets  all  night,  even  in  his  thin 
clothes.  But  it  was  getting  toward 


98 

closing  time  and  the  crowd  was  not 
as  large  as  it  often  was;  and  not  as 
large  as  it  would  be  at  eight  o’clock 
when  the  last  stragglers  would  have 
to  run  a gantlet  of  curses  and  blows. 
He  squared  his  shoulders  and 
pushed  through  the  crowd,  taking 
the  abuse  without  an  answering 
word,  and  hurried  up  the  stairs  into 
his  small  square  room.  He  sank 
down  on  the  bed  and  stared  at  the 
ceiling.  He  continued  to  hold  his 
left  hand  clenched  into  a tight  fist 
in  his  pocket. 

After  a few  minutes  he  got  off  the 
bed  and  opened  the  door  of  the 
small  cabinet  by  the  narrow  window, 
took  down  a glass-stoppered  bottle, 
and  sat  down  with  it  at  the  table. 
The  acid  smoked  when  he  with- 
drew the  stopper,  and  he  hesitated 
for  a long  moment  before  upturn- 
ing the  bottle  and  pouring  a few 
drops  of  the  heavy  liquid  into  his 
palm.  He  looked  at  the  clock  on  the 
wall.  He  was  able  to  endure  the  pain 
for  ninety  seconds  before  running  to 
the  sink  and  washing  his  hand  in 
cold  water.  He  fell  wearily  on  the 
bed,  his  fist  tightly  clenched,  his 
face  drawn  in  a grimace  of  pain. 
He  lay  without  moving  for  some 
time,  and  then  slowly  opened  his 
hand.  There  was  no  disappointment 
on  his  features  when  he  saw  that 
the  acid  had  had  no  other  effect 
than  to  redden  the  skin  of  the  palm. 
There  would  be  blisters  this  time, 
he  thought,  but  the  letters  were  still 
there,  a brilliant  mocking  green. 

He  lay  back  with  his  eyes  closed. 


FANTASY  AND  SCIENCE  FICTION 

listening  to  the  hum  of  the  clock 
and  to  the  cries,  faint  at  this  dis- 
tance, of  the  hecklers  in  front  of  the 
door  below.  He  started  violently 
when  the  loudspeaker  barked  at  him, 
and  after  combing  his  hair — it  was 
required — he  trudged  wearily  down 
the  corridor  and  up  the  stairs,  join- 
ing the  slowly  moving,  silent  throng 
that  converged  on  the  dining  room. 

The  meal  was  soon  over,  and  he 
returned  to  his  room,  stopping  to 
collect  the  day’s  SRP-stamped  nickel, 
dime  and  quarter  from  the  machine 
by  the  dining  room  door.  He  lay  on 
the  bed  again,  his  eyes  fixed  on  the 
white  ceiling,  listening  without  in- 
terest to  the  faint  sounds  his  stom- 
ach made  in  its  digestive  processes. 

By  ten  o’clock  he  could  hear  no 
more  activity  anywhere  in  the  build- 
ing. It  was  the  night,  he  decided. 
He  would  do  it  tonight.  He  pre- 
pared everything  carefully.  He  took 
from  the  cabinet  the  large  hatchet 
he  had  bought  two  weeks  before. 
He  had  saved  his  allowance  to  pur- 
chase it  (everything  metal  was  ex- 
pensive nowadays).  He  lit  matches 
under  the  blade  until  the  steel  was 
smoked  an  even  gray-blue.  It  re- 
quired some  time  to  adjust  the 
tourniquet  around  his  arm:  he  used 
a handkerchief,  and  pointed  a pencil 
through  the  cloth  in  order  to  adjust 
the  tension.  When  he  was  ready  he 
sat  down  at  the  table,  the  hatchet  in 
his  lap,  and  looked  at  his  hand.  The 
green  letters  stared  up  at  him.  He 
dropped  his  head  for  a moment.  If 
there  was  anything  to  wait  for,  he 


^9 


S R 

would  wait.  But  there  was  nothing 
. , . nothing.  He  raised  his  head  and 
pursed  his  lips,  and  lifted  the  hatch- 
et. It  did  not  required  a severe  blow. 

The  pain  was  at  first  slight  and 
then  terrible.  He  was  fascinated  by 
the  amount  of  blood.  For  a while  he 
forgot  to  tighten  the  tourniquet. 
When  he  did  so  the  blood  slowed 
but  did  not  cease.  He  began  to  be 
afraid,  and  pulled  wildly  at  the 
handkerchief.  The  blood  would  not 
stop.  He  stumbled  to  the  bed,  his 
hand  over  the  wound,  and  before 
fainting  jerked  at  the  emergency 
cord  on  the  wall.  He  heard  voices  at 
the  door  and  then  nothing. 

He  awoke  in  the  hospital;  from 
his  bed  he  could  see  the  words  over 
the  door:  SECURITY  RISK  PROJ- 
ECT, and  under  them  amputation 
WARD.  A nurse  was  tending  another 
patient  three  beds  away,  and  the 
man  lay  quietly,  his  eyes  staring  at 
the  white  ceiling.  His  hand  throbbed 
under  the  covers,  and  he  moved  his 
right  hand  to  touch  the  bandage. 
He  was  surprised  at  the  shortness 
of  his  arm,  and  then  remembered 
what  he  had  done.  He  felt  no  horror 
at  the  act,  only  a mixture  of  disgust 
and  relief.  The  nurse  in  her  white 
gown  came  up  to  him  and  adjusted 
the  pillows,  smiling  sourly.  But  she 
was  gentle  when  she  turned  him 
over  and  washed  his  back,  and  then 
checked  the  bandage.  “Don’t  pick  at 
it,”  she  warned.  You’ll  start  it  bleed- 
ing again.  We  don’t  want  any  more 
trouble  out  of  you.” 


“Was  I trouble.?”  he  muttered. 

“Of  course,  it’s  always  trouble,” 
she  said,  moving  to  the  next  bed. 
“You  fellows  . . .”  He  turned  on 
his  side,  away  from  her.  He  did  not 
want  to  be  trouble  to  anyone.  The 
bed  on  this  side  was  empty,  and  he 
stared  at  it  for  a long  time,  going  to 
sleep  and  waking  again  when  his 
hand  throbbed.  The  nurse  brought 
him  a meal  and  told  him  he  would 
be  up  the  next  day.  “We  haven’t  got 
the  room,”  she  complained.  “You  fel- 
lows, you  think  we’ve  got  nothing 
else  to  do.”  But  she  was  careful  of 
his  hand,  and  told  him  before  turn- 
ing out  the  lights  (she  left  one  bulb 
burning  by  the  door)  to  ring  if  he 
needed  a sedative. 

It  was  in  the  faint  light  of  this  one 
bulb  that  he  discovered  (reaching 
behind  him  to  press  the  buzzer  be- 
cause he  could  not,  after  all,  sleep 
through  the  pain)  the  green  letters 
on  his  right  palm.  S R,  they  said. 
There  was  no  change.  He  lay  back 
sweating.  With  difficulty  he  re- 
strained his  desire  to  cry  out  at  her 
when  she  came,  softly  on  her  rubber 
soles,  with  the  pill  and  the  glass  of 
water.  After  several  hours  he  man- 
aged to  sleep. 

The  interview  with  the  doctor  was 
at  three  in  the  afternoon,  and  the 
nurse  helped  him  to  dress.  “You  can 
do  it  fine  with  one  hand,”  she  said 
cheerfully.  “Don’t  worry,  it’s  hard  at 
first.”  He  had  trouble  with  the  but- 
tons on  his  shirt,  and  she  had  to  zip 
his  fly  while  he  faintly  blushed. 
“Now  don’t  be  afraid,”  she  said. 


100 

when  she  felt  him  tremble,  “Doctor 
won’t  bite  you.  It  might  be  different 
if  you  were  the  first.  But  he  wants  to 
talk  to  you,  to  try  to  make  it  easier. 
You’ll  find  it’s  much  better  to  coop- 
erate.” She  shailed  the  sour  smile 
again,  and  he  left  her,  shifting  his 
arm  in  its  sling.  He  wondered  how 
long  he  would  feel  the  pain. 

The  doctor  was  signing  papers, 
and  without  looking  up  motioned 
him  to  a seat.  The  man  sat  down 
wearily,  his  left  arm  resting  on  his 
lap,  his  right  hand  clenched  in  a fist 
in  his  pocket.  The  doctor  finished, 
“Well!”  he  said.  “We’d  hoped,  with 
you  ...  You  waited  four  years. 
We’d  hoped  that  some  sort  of  adjust- 
ment . . .”  He  stopped.  “In  a way, 
I suppose — Well,  you  know,  it’s  un- 
derstandable. We  understand  it,  you 
know.  It’s  a terrible  punishment. 
But  then  it’s  a terrible  crime!  And 
this  way  we  don’t  have  to  hate  you 
and  fear  you.  The  hecklers  outside, 
they  don’t  understand  very  well,  but 
then  such  people  often  don’t  under- 
stand. Yes.  What  was  your  crime,  by 
the  way.?  What  did  you  do.?”  He 
looked  up  curiously.  “I  don’t  have 
your  record  here.” 

“That’s  all  right,  you  don’t  have  to 
say.  I know  it’s  sometimes  hard.  But 
would  you  prefer  death.?  In  the 
Other  Country,  you  know,  they 
shoot  them,  immediately.  I think  we 
have  the  better  way.  And,  you  know, 
it’s  important  how  the  others,  how 
we  feel.  As  I say,  we  don’t  have  to 
hate  you.  You’re  not  martyrs,  you 


FANTASY  AND  SCIENCE  FICTION 

can’t  be  made  martyrs  of.  Oh,  I’m 
not  accusing  you!”  He  lit  a cigarette 
from  the  lighter  on  his  desk.  “It’s 
a difficult  question  though.  I’ve 
thought  a good  deal  about  it.  I sup- 
pose you  have,  too.  You  were  a . . . 
what  was  it.?  A lawyer?  A profes- 
sor.? Something  professional,  I seem 
to  remember.” 

“Yes.  I—” 

“Quite.  I understand.  I imagine 
it’s  not  pleasant  to  think  back  to 
those  days.  We  don’t  want  to  make 
the  punishment  any  harder  than  it 
is — and  of  course  the  Government 
directive  . . .”  He  drew  deeply  on 
the  cigarette.  “You  should  thank 
God  for  that  Government  directive. 
Ten  years  ago,  you  know,  you  were- 
n’t allowed  outside  the  buildings.” 

The  man  continued  to  stare  at  the 
floor,  flexing  the  fingers  of  his  hand 
in  his  pocket.  He  was  surprised  as 
always  to  discover  that  the  tattoo 
marks  could  not  be  felt  by  his  fingers 
as  they  moved  across  his  palm. 

The  doctor  went  on.  “Now  we 
hope  this  won’t  happen  again.  We’ve 
tried  to  find  some  rehabilitation 
method,  hut  without  very  much  suc- 
cess, I’m  afraid,  so  far.  We’ve  got 
good  men  working  on  it.  As  I said, 
in  your  case  we’d  hoped  that  it 
wouldn’t  be  necessary.  But  now  , . . 
well,  you’ve  got  only  one  hand  now, 
and  you’ll  have  to  find  some  way  of 
adjusting  to  that.  Of  course  all  the 
men  here  have  only  one  hand — ” He 
stopped  when  he  noticed  the  puz- 
zled expression  on  the  man’s  face, 
“The  nurse  didn’t  tell  you  that  you’d 


S R 


101 


been  transferred?  But  of  course  you 
were,  while  you  slept.  But  as  I was 
saying,  we  can  offer  you  an  artificial 
hand.  Some  of  them  won’t  go  to  the 
trouble  of  learning  to  use  it.  I sup- 
pose they  think  there’s  not  much 
point  in  it,  since  they  can’t  work, 
you  know.  I hope  you’ll  have  a dif- 
ferent attitude.  In  any  case  you  don’t 
have  to  decide  now,  it’ll  be  some 
time  before  the  . . . stump  is  strong 
enough.”  He  coughed  quietly.  “Now 
is  there  anything  you’d  like  to 
know?”  He  smiled  faintly.  “I’m  here 
to  answer  any  questions  you  might 
have.”  He  waited,  the  cigarette  burn- 
ing between  his  fingers. 

“I — ” the  man  began.  “What  is  . . . 
the  next  ...  ?”  He  did  not  look  up. 

“The  next?  How  do  you  mean?” 

“The  next — after  the  hand  ...  ?” 

“Oh,  of  course,  quite.  Now  I said 
I hoped  that  wouldn’t  be  necessary.” 

“Yes.” 

“Well,  of  course,  I might  as  well 
tell  you.  Why,  it’s  the  forehead.  The 
forehead.” 

“But  . . . I’ve  seen  ...  I haven’t 
seen  anyone  with — the  letters  there. 
There  are  many  of  them,  I haven’t 
seen  anyone  with  the  letters  on  the 
forehead.” 

“No.”  The  doctor  stubbed  the  cig- 
arette out  in  the  automatic  ashtray. 


which  whirred  and  then  turned  up 
clean  again.  They  can’t  bear  it. 
They  can’t  bear  that.” 

“You  mean,  they  ...  ?” 

“They  what?” 

“You  mean  they  cut . . . that ...  ?” 

“Yes,  quite.  Of  course.  Now  if 
you’ll  excuse  me?”  The  doctor  shuf- 
fled through  the  papers  on  his  desk. 
He  looked  up  quickly.  “I’ve  got  a lot 
of  work  to  do,”  he  said,  brusquely. 
“I’m  sorry.  I think  it  would  be  better 
if  you  didn’t  go  out  for  a few  days. 
Of  course  we’re  not  restraining  you, 
you  can  go  out  if  you  wish.  But  I 
know  it’s  painful.”  He  delved  into 
the  papers  once  more,  picked  up  a 
pen,  and  began  signing  them. 

The  man  rose  slowly  to  his  feet 
and  moved  toward  the  door.  “You 
mean  . . . ?”  He  licked  his  lips. 
“They  cut  . . . that  . . . ?”  The 
doctor  nodded  without  looking  up. 
The  man  glanced  at  him  as  he 
passed  through  the  door.  The  doctor 
had  lit  another  cigarette,  and  the 
smoke  curled  up  around  his  bowed 
head,  filling  the  room  with  a faint 
blue  haze,  as  he  scribbled  across  the 
bottom  of  the  papers.  He  must  not 
have  one  of  the  new  Micro-Smuthe 
pens,  for  the  point  made  an  unpleas- 
ant scratching  sound  as  it  moved 
across  the  paper. 


THE  HORROR  STORY  SHORTER  BY  ONE  LETTER  THAN  THE 
SHORTEST  HORROR  STORY  EVER  WRITTEN 

The  last  man  on  Earth  sat  alone 
in  a room.  There  was  a lock  on  the 
door.  RON  SMITH 


One  treasures  the  reliable  writers  who  are  always  at  their  characteristic 
best;  but  one  particularly  cherishes  the  surprising  ones  who  have  no 
fixed  characteristics,  the  wondrous  unclassifiables  who  never  write  the 
same  kind  of  story  twice,  the  Avram  Davidsons,  the  Mildred  Clinger- 
mans,  the  Andrew  Carves,  the  Enid  Bagnolds  . . . and,  it  would  ap- 
pear, the  Mary-Carter  Robertses.  Miss  Roberts  has  recently  published 
an  extraordinary  novel,  little  brother  fate  (Farrar,  Straus  & Cud- 
ahy, 1957),  which  is  a sort  of  montage  of  three  of  the  greatest  murder 
cases  of  the  1920’s  (and  of  all  time);  Snyder-Gray,  Loeb-Leopold 
arid  Hall-Mills — an  uncompromisingly  realistic  and  analytical  book, 
in  which  no  one  could  possibly  recognize  the  author  of  the  following 
fantasy.  This  is  imaginative  literature  of  a kind  and  quality  which  I 
have  not  encountered  since  the  death  of  Stephen  Vincent  Benet;  his- 
torical American  folklore  illuminated  by  warm  sympathy,  enlivened 
by  vivid  storytelling  and  memorable  prose;  and  I hope  you’ll  agree 
that  Jack  Smith's  is  the  most  powerful  encounter  with  the  Devil  since 
Dan’ I Webster’s, 


When  Jac\  Smith  Fought  Old  Satan 

hy  MARY-CARTER  ROBERTS 


This  story  was  told  me  by  a minis- 
ter,  a venerable  man  of  nationwide 
repute.  He  heard  it  from  the  country 
people  among  whom  he  had  spent 
his  youth.  They  heard  it  from  their 
forebears,  who  had  repeated  it,  par- 
ent to  child,  throughout  the  century 
that  stretched  between  the  happening 
itself  (in  1769)  and  my  clerical 
friend’s  birth.  Many  mouths  thus 
narrated  the  tale,  and  all  belonged  to 


godly  folk.  Obviously,  the  tale  is 
true. 

The  event  took  place  on  that  scrap 
of  land  that  makes  a false  nose,  as  it 
were,  off  the  southeast  corner  of 
Pennsylvania,  a dwindling  protuber- 
ance with  its  northern  half  between 
Delaware  Bay  and  Chesapeake  and 
its  southern  between  Chesapeake  and 
the  Atlantic  Ocean.  This  territory  is 
composed  of  one  state — Delaware — 


© 1956  by  Crotvell-Collier  Publishing  Co.,  Inc. 
102 


WHEN  JACK  SMITH  FOUGHT  OLD  SATAN 


103 


and  parts  of  two  others — Maryland 
and  Virginia — but  with  the  parts  so 
cut  off  by  water  from  the  states’ 
main  bodies  as  to  have  no  geographi- 
cal relationship.  In  recent  years,  in- 
deed, people  have  taken  to  giving  the 
nose  a name  of  its  own,  bestowing 
a territorial  identity  on  it.  They  call 
it  “Delmarva.”  That  would  not  have 
been  safe  in  1769,  for  then  geography 
was  kept  in  its  place,  if  you  under- 
stand what  I mean.  It  was  properly 
turned  back  at  state  Hnes.  A Virgini- 
an in  those  days  would  not  be  taken 
dead  for  a Marylander  or  Delaware- 
an, a Marylander  for  a Delawarean 
or  Virginian,  or  a Delawarean  for 
anybody  but  himself.  Delawareans, 
of  the  three  populations,  were  un- 
doubtedly the  most  exclusive.  They 
still  are.  My  story  happened  in  Dela- 
ware. 

There  was  this  young  man,  Jack 
Smith,  and  there  was  the  chapel  in 
Bascom’s  Woods,  and  to  the  country 
people  round  about  it  was  perfectly 
apparent  that  something  was  wrong 
with  both.  But  everyone  was  used  to 
the  wrongness  of  Jack  Smith,  so  the 
greater  concern  was  felt  for  the  chap- 
el. That  structure  should  have  been 
the  local  joy  and  pride.  It  was  new; 
it  had  been  built  by  the  church  mem- 
bers themselves;  it  was  the  first 
sacred  edifice  in  those  parts;  the 
people  had  done  the  best  they  could 
to  make  it  beautiful  as  well  as  sturdy; 
they  had  bought  a very  fine-toned 
bell  to  hang  in  its  little  steeple — and 
they  had  never  been  able  to  use  the 


building  at  all.  This  was  enough  to 
cause  any  pious  congregation  plenty 
of  distress — while  as  for  Jack  Smith, 
he  had  always  been  the  way  he  was 
and  occasioned  no  general  worry. 
One  person  alone  cared  what  hap- 
pened to  him. 

Jack  Smith  was  the  kind  of  fellow 
ordinary  folk  would  like  to  laugh  at 
— if  they  dared.  His  wrongness  was 
about  practically  everything  ordinary 
folk  take  for  granted.  He  was  against 
all  respected  institutions.  Nothing 
on  earth  could  induce  him  to  touch 
his  forelock  to  his  betters;  he  did  not 
admit  he  had  any  betters,  though  he 
was  just  a poor  freeholder  who  tilled 
his  few  acres  with  his  own  hands. 

And  it  was  not  enough  for  him  to 
refrain  from  the  gesture  of  deference. 
He  would  march  by  the  local  bar- 
onet with  his  hat,  which  he  usually 
wore  at  a sideling  angle,  squarely  on 
top  of  his  head,  to  make  his  attitude 
clear.  He  did  not  like  any  gentry,  if 
it  came  to  that.  He  called  them  Pet 
Cats  and  said  they  all  lived  by  lick- 
ing boots  bigger  than  their  own, 
composing  in  this  way  a social  sys- 
tem in  which  he.  Jack  Smith,  would 
take  no  part.  And  since  all  respecta- 
ble people  respected,  above  all  things, 
religion  in  some  form.  Jack  Smith 
was  against  religion  in  all  forms.  He 
named  himself  an  infidel.  Most  of  the 
time  he  was  quiet,  being  busy  on  his 
land,  but  he  carried  these  wrong- 
headed ideas  very  close  to  his  sur- 
face, kept  them  right  under  his  skin, 
as  it  were,  and,  with  two  grogs 
in  him  to  set  him  off,  he  would  vo- 


104 


FANTASY  AND  SCIENCE  FICTION 


ciferate.  People  generally  took  the 
view  that  he  was  ridiculous. 

This  notwithstanding,  there  was 
just  a single  reason — no  more — why 
Jack  Smith  could  be  despised  in  his 
own  neighborhood  with  safety;  he 
was  a minority  of  one.  His  mockers 
knew  instinctively  that  they  needed 
to  be  in  numbers.  Jack  Smith  had  a 
dash  about  him  that  spelled  danger. 
It  kept  him  from  being  comfortably 
contemptible. 

He  was  twenty  when  these  events 
happened,  a strongly  built  bucko, 
black  as  night  as  to  hair  and  eye, 
swarthy  of  skin,  comely  of  feature 
but  always  scowling,  as  if  he  dared 
anyone  to  say  he  approved  of  any- 
thing. We  would  call  him  adolescent 
today.  In  1769,  however,  adolescence 
had  not  gotten  recognized.  Fifteen 
was  a man  then,  and  Jack  Smith  had 
pushed  his  maturity  still  further 
along  by  going  to  the  wars,  or  such 
wars  as  there  were.  He  had  fought 
Indians  on  the  frontier  and  in  Cana- 
da and  had  journeyed  as  far  west  as 
the  mysterious  Ohio  River.  He  had 
seen  more  of  the  world  than  anyone 
in  his  county  and  he  uninhibitedly 
expressed  scorn  for  the  stick-in-the- 
bogs  that  were  his  neighbors.  Yet  it 
was  not  strange  that  he  had  returned. 
He  was  a Delawarean,  and  return  is 
a Delaware  custom. 

People  had  gathered  around  him 
when  he  came  back,  but  not  to  learn 
where  he  had  been  or  what  he  might 
have  seen.  They  just  wanted  to  know 
if  he  had  changed  any.  When  they 
found  he  had  not,  but  was  as  wrong- 


headed as  ever,  they  were  pleased, 
and  then  and  there  began  nettling 
him  in  groups  when  there  was  a 
chance  for  it. 

These  chances  occurred  mostly  at 
the  Bear’s  Claw  Tavern,  for  that  was 
where  he  went  oftenest.  The  other 
drinkers  soon  had  a program  laid 
out  to  use  on  him.  They  would  wait 
until  he  was  muddled  and  then  over- 
whelm him  with  their  witticisms, 
speaking  one  after  another  too  fast 
for  him  to  answer.  He  would  finally 
explode,  curse  until  it  was  frightful, 
and  slam  out.  Then  they  would  all 
laugh,  feeling  very  sure  that  never, 
under  any  circumstances,  would 
they  be  so  absurd. 

The  one  person  who  cared  what 
happened  to  him  was  always  present 
at  these  shouting  matches,  but  was 
prevented  by  sex  and  condition  of 
servitude  from  taking  any  part.  It 
was  the  bound  girl  who  worked  as 
the  tavern  barmaid.  This  young  per- 
son had  been  left  on  the  township  an 
orphan  pauper  at  the  age  of  six,  and 
authorities  had  bound  her  out  to 
Horeb  Potter,  the  tavern  proprietor, 
who  had  signed  articles  making  him 
responsible  for  her  protection,  care 
and  Christian  education.  That  meant 
he  had  put  her  to  work.  From  day- 
light to  dark  for  the  past  ten  years 
she  had  drudged  on  the  Potter  prop- 
erty, doing  everything.  But  nobody 
thought  then  that  such  a life  was  a 
hardship;  so,  not  knowing  she  had 
reason  to  be  sorry  for  herself,  Oma 
had  space  in  her  to  be  sorry  for  oth- 
ers. She  was  sorry  for  Jack  Smith. 


WHEN  JACK  SMITH  FOUGHT  OLD  SATAN 


105 


In  her  eyes  he  was  handsome  and 
brave,  and  certainly  superior  to  his 
tormentors.  When  she  saw  him  over- 
come by  their  numbers,  she  would 
be  filled  with  grieving  pity.  She  was 
a tender-hearted  thing,  anyway.  She 
mothered  the  graceless  Potter  brats 
and  the  chicks  in  the  Potter  barn- 
yard, and,  until  recently,  such  kind 
occupations  had  absorbed  all  her  natu- 
ral emotions.  Up  to  the  time  she  saw 
Jack  Smith,  she  had  never  given  a 
thought  to  men,  except  to  wonder 
occasionally  how  it  was  that,  in  an 
evening  of  drinking,  a dozen  of  them 
could  talk  so  much  and  say  nothing 
anyone  could  remember.  Now  she 
would  have  liked  nothing  better 
than  to  sit  in  utter  silence  while  Jack 
Smith  told  her  the  tale  of  his  adven- 
tures, but  she  hardly  formulated  this 
dream,  for  dreams  were  outside  her 
experience.  More  practically,  she 
longed  for  something  to  turn  him 
from  his  dangerous,  wicked  ways, 
which,  she  was  passionately  sure, 
were  no  true  part  of  him. 

She  was  a good  girl  behind  the 
bar.  She  had  a light  foot,  a strong 
wrist,  a pretty  bosom,  and  fine,  silky, 
golden  hair.  Nobody  gave  her  a look, 
however — she  had  no  portion,  and 
she  lacked  the  forward-coming  man- 
ners that  some  wenches  might  have 
used  to  get  notice  for  themselves,  be- 
ing modest,  seldom  lifting  her  eyes, 
never  her  voice.  She  was  pious,  too. 
She  had  not  been  taught  to  read,  but 
she  kept  her  dead  mother’s  little 
Bible  reverently  wrapped  in  a clean 
kerchief,  and  every  night  before  she 


lay  down  in  the  haymow  where  she 
was  sent  to  sleep,  she  said  her  pray- 
ers. Always  she  prayed  for  Jack 
Smith. 

He  was  barely  aware  of  her.  When 
he  entered  the  Bear’s  Claw,  he 
would  come  swelling  with  anger  at 
his  former  defeats  and  thinking  only 
of  his  adversaries  and  how,  this 
evening,  he  would  triumph  over 
them.  Sometimes,  sensibly,  he  would 
tell  himself  that  the  best  thing  to  do 
would  be  just  to  ignore  the  gnats, 
have  his  drink  and  go.  But  that 
never  happened.  The  drink  would 
unlock  his  speech  and  soon  one  fa- 
miliar thing  would  lead  to  another. 

That  was  how  matters  stood  when 
knowledge  of  the  wrongness  at  the 
chapel  took  hold  on  people’s  minds 
arrd  spread  first  amazement,  then 
terror,  over  the  countryside. 

It  started  at  the  very  opening 
service.  The  circuit  rider  was  there, 
to  dedicate  the  new  House  of  God, 
and  everyone  was  eager  and  excited. 
They  all  came  in  a throng  to  the 
Woods  and  waited  until  the  Rever- 
end arrived,  carrying  the  shining 
key,  his  good  face  shining  too.  He 
unlocked  the  door.  Then  he,  and  all 
the  others,  as  fast  as  they  could 
crowd  up  and  look  in,  stopped  in  un- 
believing shock.  Everything  in  the 
beautiful  little  church  had  been 
flung  into  the  most  shameful  dis- 
order. 

The  benches  were  turned  over,  the 
Communion  table  too,  if  such  a 
thing  can  be  credited,  and  the  pulpit 


106 

chairs.  The  hymnals  were  strewn 
along  the  aisles.  Only  the  lectern,  on 
which  lay  the  Bible,  had  been  left  un- 
touched, but  right  beside  it  was  the 
strangest,  most  sinister  evidence  of 
sacrilegious  venom  in  the  place:  the 
carpet,  which  had  been  carefully  cut 
to  fit  the  lectern’s  foot  and  then 
nailed  smoothly  down,  had  been 
ripped  up  and  flung  back  all  around, 
the  tacks  still  in  it.  It  was  as  if  some- 
one had  come  so  far,  meaning  to  de- 
file the  Book  itself,  and  then  had 
been  afraid  and  had  turned  a baffled 
rage  on  the  floor.  But  all  the  win- 
dows were  found  to  be  securely 
locked,  just  as  the  door  had  been. 
There  was  no  explanation  of  the 
crime  whatever. 

The  circuit  rider,  a doughty  war- 
rior for  the  faith,  was  used  to  fron- 
tier rowdyism.  He  rallied  fast. 
Straight  in  he  went,  calling  for  the 
other  men  to  help  him,  and,  blast- 
ing out  a strong  fighting  psalm  as  he 
worked,  began  to  put  things  to 
rights.  Soon  the  chapel  was  once 
again  in  order.  But  of  course  grief 
and  horror  filled  all  the  people’s 
hearts  where  there  had  been  hap- 
piness and  pride.  By  then  they  were 
thinking  the  harm  had  been  done 
by  some  debased  rufiian  who  had 
managed  to  get  a false  key.  That 
thought  passed  through  all  their 
minds,  that  and  the  hot  promise  they 
made  themselves  to  find  out  who  the 
scoundrel  was  and  see  that  he  got  at 
least  a hundred  lashes  well  laid  on, 
at  the  next  assize.  With  this  vague 
and  miserable  theory  replacing  their 


FANTASY  ANP  SCIENCE  FICTION 

joy,  they  took  their  seats.  They  had 
the  dedication  service,  but,  if  it  had 
been  a funeral,  it  could  not  have 
been  less  like  the  radiant  time  they 
had  expected. 

They  had  planned,  as  a climax, 
when  the  church  was  finally  and 
fully  consecrated,  to  have  the  bell 
peal  out.  In  this  way  the  building  it- 
self, with  its  own  voice,  would  say 
to  God  that  it  belonged  to  Him, 
while  the  givers  of  the  gift  sat  under 
the  immaculate  roof,  listening.  To 
make  this  ritual  perfect,  the  leaders 
had  decided  against  any  preliminary 
ringing.  They  had  had  reports  from 
the  foundry  of  the  beauty  and  mel- 
lowness of  the  bell’s  tone,  and  while 
hanging  the  instrument,  they  had 
tapped  the  metal  and  had  been  de- 
lighted with  the  musical  resonance. 
But  not  yet  had  the  bell  been  rung. 

Now  the  moment  approached, 
and  a ghost,  as  it  were,  of  the  earlier 
anticipation  crept  back  into  the  sad- 
dened group.  They  saw  Brother 
More,  who  had  been  chosen  ringer 
for  the  first  term,  rise  and  tiptoe  out, 
and  after  that  they  sat  keyed  up, 
waiting.  It  seemed  that  the  voice  of 
the  church,  when  it  sounded,  would 
sweep  the  ugly  beginning  away.  But 
the  voice  did  not  sound.  Brother 
More  came  back  in,  and  this  time  he 
was  not  tiptoeing.  He  was  walking 
fast  and  looking  very  queer.  He  ad- 
vanced halfway  down  the  aisle, 
stopped,  lifted  his  right  hand  as  if  he 
were  taking  an  oath,  and  addressed 
the  minister.  “Brother,”  he  said,  “the 
bell  won’t  ring.” 


WHEN  JACK  SMITH  EOUOHT  OLD  SATAN 


107 


That  was  too  much.  The  Reverend 
came  down  from  the  pulpit,  coattails 
flapping,  and  every  man,  woman  and 
child  stood  up.  He  strode  headlong 
toward  the  door.  Everybody,  as  he 
passed,  fell  in  behind  him.  They  all 
crowded  around  the  doors  on  either 
side,  craning  necks,  rolling  eyes,  star- 
ing up  into  the  steeple.  They  could 
see  the  rope  hanging  in  its  proper 
place,  swaying  as  a result  of  Brother 
More’s  efforts.  He  was  telling  the 
preacher  that  he  had  felt  the  bell 
swing,  all  right,  but  that  no  sound 
had  followed  the  swinging.  Everyone 
thought  the  ruffians  had  either  muf- 
fled the  tongue  or  stolen  it  away. 

The  preacher  said,  “A  ladder.” 
They  brought  one  that  they  had  used 
in  getting  the  bell  hung.  They  put  it 
in  place  aivd  he  started  up.  As  he 
was  an  old  man,  some  of  the  younger 
members  offered  to  make  the  climb 
in  his  place,  but  he  went  on,  fast  and 
spry.  When  he  came  down,  he  too 
looked  queer.  The  tongue  had  not 
been  removed  or  muffled,  he  said. 
It  was  there,  he  had  taken  it  in  his 
hand  and  struck  it  against  the  bell’s 
side.  And  no  sound  whatever  had 
resulted.  When  the  people  heard  this, 
they  lost  heart  in  utter  bewilderment. 
The  men  hung  their  heads,  some  of 
the  women  sobbed,  and  the  children 
began  to  shriek  and  howl. 

The  Reverend  did  what  he  could 
to  comfort  the  distracted  flock.  He 
said  he  had  heard  somewhere  that 
there  were  such  things  as  sick  bells, 
strange  as  it  seemed.  He  suggested 
that  they  send  a message  to  the 


foundry,  asking  that  a bell  doctor  be 
dispatched  to  them  right  away.  In 
the  meantime,  he  reminded  them, 
they  had  a church,  whereas  up  to 
then  they  had  had  none.  They  must 
not  weaken  because  of  evildoers.  Let 
them  have  the  lock  changed  and 
then,  if  the  mischief  went  on,  let 
them  set  a watch. 

Those  were  the  things  he  said,  his 
air  that  of  common  sense  and  good 
cheer.  But  he  was  far  from  feeling 
that  the  words  covered  the  truth  of 
the  matter.  He  had  a powerful  pre- 
monition that  something  worse  than 
bell  sickness  or  mischief-making  was 
involved  here,  and  he  longed  to  stay 
with  the  beleaguered  congregation 
and  guide  it  through  the  danger, 
whatever  it  might  be.  But  four  hun- 
dred miles  of  rigidly  made  appoint- 
ments lay  before  him  and  he  could 
not  linger,  even  for  a day.  So  he  rode 
off,  promising  himself  that  he  would 
make  the  chapel  in  Bascom’s  Woods 
the  first  object  of  his  prayers. 

The  people  followed  his  advice. 
They  had  the  lock  changed  and  the 
smith  who  did  the  job  was  a chapel 
member.  He  saw  to  it  that  nobody 
got  a glimpse  of  bis  work  until  the 
lock  was  in  the  door.  As  for  the  key, 
he  made  just  one  and  for  it  he  fash- 
ioned an  iron  case  with  a lock  of  its 
own,  so  that  only  the  member  to 
whom  the  sextonship  was  entrusted 
ever  set  eyes  on  the  precious  object. 
And  still  the  mischief  continued. 

There  was  never  again  such  a 
complete  hurly-burly  as  on  the  open- 


108 

ing  day,  but  the  insults  were  not  the 
less  striking  for  being  slighter.  The 
people  would  come  in  and  find  a 
pulpit  chair  upended  on  the  Com- 
munion table.  Or  the  collection  bas- 
kets would  be  filled  with  rocks.  Or 
the  cup  o£  the  Holy  Sacrament 
would  be  standing  by  the  common 
drinking-water  bucket. 

As  these  atrocities  made  it  plain 
that  someone  had  entry  to  the 
church,  even  though  entry  was  im- 
possible, the  members  took  the 
preacher’s  other  direction  and  set  a 
watch.  Four  farmers  with  muskets 
stood  guard  each  night  for  a week. 
All  was  tranquil  and,  when  the  next 
meeting  day  came,  nothing  was 
found  disturbed.  The  congregation 
felt  better.  Some  progress,  at  least, 
was  being  made.  Then,  right  in  the 
middle  of  the  prayer,  there  was  a 
terrible  crash  and  a window  burst 
in.  Burst  in — that  is  to  say,  all  the 
broken  glass  fell  inside  the  room- 
But  no  missile  was  found  to  explain 
the  breaking — no  rock,  no  chunk, 
nothing.  That  window  had  just  ex- 
ploded. The  people  were  really 
frightened  then. 

They  made  no  effort  to  remain  in 
possession.  It  was  the  Devil,  they 
said.  And  terror  spread  over  the 
land.  Old  Satan  lived  in  Bascom’s 
Woods.  You  did  not  have  to  be  an 
ignorant  or  superstitious  person  to 
believe  it.  Educated  people  had  prac- 
tically seen  it.  The  grove  was  avoid- 
ed even  in  daylight,  and  soon  other 
stories  about  it  began  to  circulate. 

Someone  remembered  an  old  re- 


FANTASY  AND  SCIENCE  FICTION 

port  of  how,  about  a century  earlier, 
a passing  schoolteacher  had  asked 
Sir  Thomas  Bascom,  the  holder  of 
the  original  patent,  to  let  him  have 
some  part  of  the  Woods  for  a free 
school  for  poor  children.  But  Sir 
Thomas  had  not  considered  that  the 
poor  deserved  educating  and  had 
been  additionally  affronted  by  the 
notion  that  they  should  have  any- 
thing free,  and  so  had  profanely  re- 
fused. When  the  suitor  had  had  the 
impertinence  to  inquire  what  better 
purpose  the  land  might  serve,  the 
nobleman  had  roared,  “I’ll  let  the 
Devil  have  it  first!”  and  had  ordered 
his  footmen  to  give  the  upstart  a 
thrashing. 

Now  it  appeared  that  the  baron- 
et’s misuse  of  the  Devil’s  name  had 
marked  one  of  those  patiently  re- 
curring occasions  in  human  annals 
when  the  Devil  himself  had  been 
eavesdropping.  He  had  obviously 
taken  Sir  Thomas  up  on  his  impul- 
sive promise.  He  had  accepted  the 
gift  of  Bascom’s  Woods.  That,  any- 
way, was  what  people  said.  And, 
dubious  as  it  seemed  from  some 
points  of  view,  there  was  this  fright- 
ful thing  about  it — it  fit  the  facts 
and  no  other  explanation  did. 

These  events  tickled  the  infidel 
Jack  Smith  immensely.  He  told  him- 
self the  godly  had  been  caught  in 
their  own  reasoning  at  last,  and 
were  they  anything  but  the  poltroons 
their  mothers  had  unfortunately 
borne,  they  would  at  least  admit  it. 
But  no — ^not  they.  They  were  like  a 


WHEN  JACK  SMITH  FOUGHT  OLD  SATAN 


109 


man  standing  on  a plank  that  is 
balanced  over  a crossbar — if  they 
took  a step  in  one  direction,  their 
footing  would  fly  up  and  smite 
them,  because  of  God.  If  they  moved 
the  other  way,  it  would  do  the  same 
thing,  because  of  the  Devil.  And 
nothing  could  make  them  say  they 
were  not  on  eternal  ground,  even 
while  their  teeth  chattered  as  they 
spoke. 

Jack  Smith  saw  clearly  that  it  was 
the  alleged  personal  irruption  of  the 
Devil  into  Delaware  that  had  put  the 
issue  in  so  favorable  a light  from 
the  viewpoint  of  an  infidel.  As  long 
as  the  godly  could  settle  every  philo- 
sophical question  in  terms  of  their 
own  gab,  there  was  not  much  a real 
thinker  could  bring  before  them. 
They  buried  it  all  under  saws  about 
faith  and  the  Scriptures.  But  they 
could  not  bury  Old  Horny!  He  had 
already  shown  them  that.  One  snort 
of  sulphur  from  Horny’s  nose,  and 
every  one  of  them  was  on  the  run, 
whimpering  as  he  went.  What  a 
spectacle! 

Eating  his  bachelor  supper  in  his 
snug  little  farmhouse  kitchen,  Jack 
Smith  chuckled  over  this  out  loud.  It 
was  the  funnier  to  him  because, 
himself,  he  did  not  believe  in  the 
Devil — either.  The  Devil  was  part  of 
church  religion,  and,  as  he  could  not 
accept  the  church  God,  neither  could 
he  the  church  Adversary.  The  chapel 
people,  as  he  saw  it,  had  gotten 
trapped  in  their  very  first  need  to  put 
their  dogma  to  the  proof.  And  at 
last,  he,  Jack  Smith,  could  triumph. 


He  slapped  on  his  old  hat  at  a 
desperate  pitch  and  started  for  the 
Bear’s  Claw,  and  for  the  first  part 
of  his  walk  he  kept  himself  warm 
and  happy  inside  by  reviewing  the 
scathing  things  he  was  going  to  say 
when  he  arrived.  Then  he  came 
to  the  branch  road  that  led  off  to- 
ward Bascom’s  Woods.  At  the  sight 
of  that,  he  felt  his  thoughts  change. 
Just  who  was  it,  he  wondered,  that 
was  doing  the  damage  out  there, 
anyway 

He  did  not  doubt  that  the  reports 
were  true.  Too  many  people 
vouched  for  them.  So — who  was 
responsible.'*  Maybe,  thought  Jack 
Smith,  the  really  masterly  thing  for 
him  to  do  would  be  to  catch  the 
criminal  and  refute  all  this  Devil 
possession  nonsense  by  appearing 
with  the  fellow — a human  being,  of 
course — in  person,  taken  in  the  act. 
What  a stroke!  How  would  the 
pious  look  then  ? Jack  Smith  strongly 
inclined  to  the  idea  for  a minute. 
He  stood  still,  squinting  narrow- 
eyed down  the  road,  where  already 
the  grass  was  growing,  since  no- 
body now  would  put  foot  on  the 
surface,  and  considered  the  depre- 
dations. He  had  decided  some  time 
earlier  that  they  were  committed  by 
someone  who  came  down  the  chim- 
ney. But  who.? 

He  ran  over  the  list  of  low  county 
characters,  as  he  had  it  in  his  mind 
— gamblers,  wenchers,  sots,  petty 
thieves,  runaways — and  then  shook 
his  head.  None  of  those  men  was 
low  in  a way  that  would  make  him 


no 

do  anything  with  a fixed  purpose. 
None  of  them  was  antireligious  eith- 
er; on  that  subject  they  were  ful- 
somely  conformist.  Maybe  some 
smart  bound  man,  thought  Jack 
Smith,  articled  to  a penny-worship- 
ing chapel  member  and  getting  even 
the  only  way  he  could.  Maybe.  And 
what  would  happen  to  the  fellow  if 
Jack  Smith  collared  him  and  dragged 
him  in?  Well,  he  might  be  burned 
in  the  hand  with  a red-hot  iron. 
Might  be  put  in  the  pillory — if  he 
was  lucky.  Might  be  flogged  to  a 
pulp.  Might  have  his  ears  cropped. 
Any  of  those  things  could  happen 
to  him.  He  might  be  hanged.  Sac- 
rilege was  serious.  Jack  Smith 
walked  on  toward  the  Bear’s  Claw. 

His  mood  was  altered,  though. 
His  happy  malice  had  left  him  for  a 
somber  anger.  He  still  felt  able  to 
refute  the  psalm  singers,  but  now 
that  the  time,  at  long  last,  had  come, 
he  could  not  feel  the  enemy  worth 
the  effort.  He  entered  the  tavern, 
walked  to  the  bar  and  laid  down 
his  money  for  a grog.  Not  more 
than  eight  seconds  passed  while  he 
was  doing  this,  but  everyone  in  the 
parlor  became  aware  of  him.  Always 
it  was  that  way  with  Jack  Smith.  It 
was  his  dash.  He  turned  other  hu- 
man beings  into  a crowd — and  suf- 
fered accordingly. 

The  crowd  that  evening  was  all 
men.  To  be  sure,  there  was  one  fe- 
male in  the  room,  but  she  could  not 
be  thought  of  as  a woman,  or  even 
as  completely  human,  since  she  was 
just  the  bound  girl,  Oma,  washing 


FANTASY  AND  SCIENCE  FICTION 

glasses  behind  the  bar.  When  she 
observed  Jack  Smith  coming  in,  she 
felt  her  heart  give  a great  hard  beat. 
When  she  noticed  that  he  was  mo- 
rose and  scowling,  she  felt  the  same 
organ  melt  with  grief  that  he  should 
ever  be  other  than  perfectly  happy. 
No  one  she  had  seen  in  her  life 
had  been  perfectly  happy,  but  per- 
fect happiness  was  what  she  wanted 
for  Jack  Smith,  and  perfect  happiness 
for  herself  would  have  lain  in  bring- 
ing perfect  happiness  to  him.  She 
loved  him. 

He,  for  once,  gave  her  a little 
attention,  though  not  for  her  own 
sake.  Taking  that  strange  truth  in — 
that  he  no  longer  needed  to  struggle 
with  the  others,  that  he  felt  com- 
pletely detached  from  them — he 
found'  himself,  in  that  room  with  its 
long  association  of  struggle,  queerly 
lonely,  almost  forlorn.  So  when  he 
saw  Oma’s  kind  little  face  turned 
toward  him  from  the  far  end  of  the 
bar,  he  waved  at  her,  just  from  emp- 
tiness. “Ah  there,  sweeting,”  he  said, 
“You  make  a poor  old  man’s  eyes 
feel  better.” 

Oma’s  skin,  at  that,  went  from 
milk-white  to  a glowing,  glorious 
red,  while  her  eyes  changed  from 
still  gentleness  to  the  most  dazzling 
sparkle.  But  Jack  Smith  did  not  see 
these  lovely  happenings,  because  at 
that  second  Horeb  Potter  stepped 
between  him  and  the  girl.  Horeb, 
having  heard  the  rallying  speech, 
decided  that  the  guest  was  in  an 
expansive,  or  spending,  mood  and 
acted  to  help  things  along.  He  did 


WHEN  JACK  SMITH  FOUGHT  OLD  SATAN 


111 


what  was  for  him  almost  unheard 
of.  He  stood  treat.  He  set  a second 
glass  down  beside  Jack  Smith’s  first, 
and  said,  “Do  me  the  honor.” 

Surprised  but  courteous.  Jack 
Smith  answered,  “Your  good 
health,”  and  tossed  the  liquor  off. 
His  new  detachment  ended  tlien 
and  there. 

He  listened  to  the  other  men  talk- 
ing. They  were  discussing  the  chapel 
mystery,  of  course — nobody  in  the 
county  those  days  discussed  anything 
else — and,  unlike  Jack  Smith  earlier 
in  the  evening,  they  were  not  inter- 
ested in  who — they  knew  who.  They 
were  suggesting  methods  by  which 
the  congregation  might  get  the 
building  free. 

Cut  down  the  trees,  said  the 
squire.  Make  the  whole  tract  open 
ground.  The  Devil  wouldn’t — could- 
n’t— lurk  there  without  cover. 

Hold  a great  meeting,  rejoined  the 
schoolmaster.  Have  a month,  six 
weeks,  of  unbroken  gospel  feast. 
Services  twenty-four  hours  a day, 
great  bonfires  all  night.  If  necessary, 
let  the  brethren  put  up  tents  in  the 
grove  and  live  there.  Crowd  the 
Devil  out. 

“No,  no,”  exclaimed  a sharp,  eag- 
er, breaking-sticks  sort  of  voice  then. 
It  was  the  notary.  He  was  a little, 
mean,  cowardly  man  who  took  great 
pains  to  be  correct  in  everything  he 
did  and  equal  pains  to  find  other 
people  guilty  of  mistakes.  He  had  a 
rat-type  face  and  just  now  his  light 
blue  eyes  were  strangely  gleaming. 
“Not  by  cutting  trees  or  holding 


meetings  will  we  drive  the  Devil 
from  our  midst!”  he  proclaimed. 
“He  does  not  hide  in  trees,  he  does 
not  fear  the  godly — the  few  godly  of 
this  sinful  township.  His  strength 
is  in  the  hearts  of  the  sinners,  and 
we  have  many,  many  of  those.  Let 
us  drive  the  sinners  forth,  and  wc 
will  soon  see  Satan  follow.” 

The  squire  said,  politely  but  a 
trifle  crustily,  “Sinners.?  If  you  mean 
we  are  lax  in  enforcing  our  laws, 
sir,  you  are  mistaken.  We  have  very 
few  unpunished  crimes.” 

“True,  true!”  cried  the  notary. 
“But  how  do  we  punish  those 
crimes.?  With  patience,  with  long- 
suffering,  with  mercy.  The  other 
day  I heard  of  a bound  girl  in  Bethel 
township  who  had  been  robbing  her 
good  mistress,  taking  the  keys  while 
her  lady  napped,  opening  the  cup- 
board and  helping  herself  to  sugar. 
What  was  her  punishment.?  Six  lash- 
es. She  should  have  had  three  dozen! 
That  is  what  I mean,  gentlemen.  So 
merciful  are  we,  the  wicked  creep 
to  our  county  from  all  over  the 
colony,  and  in  every  wicked  heart 
the  Devil  finds  a shelter.  So  now  he 
too  has  come.” 

The  high  fast  speech  and  the  blaz- 
ing eyes  had  their  magnetism.  The 
others  exchanged  looks  question- 
ingly.  Maybe  he  was  right,  they 
thought.  Something  was  amiss.  They 
had  seen  the  disordered  church. 
They  had  pulled  the  bell  rope  and 
gotten  only  silence. 

“What  do  you  think  we  should 
do?”  asked  a freeholder. 


112 

“Revive  our  good  old  laws!”  cried 
the  notary,  his  voice  going  still  high- 
er. “Burn!  Brand!  Crop  ears!  Cut 
off  hands!  And  whip!  Whip,  whip, 
whip!  Make  the  Devil-shelterers  suf- 
fer!” 

“That  ain’t  the  way  I fight,”  said 
Jack  Smith. 

His  voice,  ordinary  in  pitch  and 
disgusted  in  tone,  swept  the  notary’s 
magnetic  moment  quite  away.  Once 
more  Jack  Smith  was  the  chief  man 
present.  Once  more  the  others  were 
a crowd.  And  the  notary,  from  a 
peak  of  leadership,  felt  reduced  to 
the  crowd’s  least  significant  mem- 
ber, so  that  in  his  heart  he  bled, 
though  outwardly  he  looked  as 
bloodless  as  a little  rock.  The  school- 
master said  affably,  “We  wouldn’t 
expect  you  to  fight  the  being  we  are 
talking  of.  Master  Smith,  I assure 
you.” 

“I  don’t  care  what  you  expect,” 
said  Jack  Smith. 

“To  an  infidel,  his  presence  is 
probably  welcome,”  continued  the 
schoolmaster,  and  now  a faint  note 
of  hysteria  edged  A is  voice,  although 
he  usually  had  good  control  of  him- 
self. 

Jack  Smith  answered,  “To  (Ais 
infidel,  his  presence  hasn’t  even  been 
visible.  I don’t  belong  to  your  chapel. 
So  I don’t  care.  But  here’s  what  I 
just  heard  you  people  saying.  There’s 
a hundred  and  fifty  men  that  do 
belong,  and  there’s  one  old  Devil. 
And  the  only  way  you  men  can 
figure  to  lick  that  Devil  is  to  beat 
a poor  bound  girl  that  ate  some 


FANTASY  AND  SCIENCE  FICTION 

sugar.  My  remark  was — I don’t  fight 
that  way.  You  can  take  it  or  leave  it. 
I don’t  care.” 

It  is  unnecessary  to  give  in  full  the 
charges  and  countercharges  that 
were  then  hurled  back  and  forth 
across  the  Bear’s  Claw  parlor.  Suf- 
fice it  to  report  two  points — first. 
Jack  Smith  made  it  perfectly  clear 
that  he  did  not  believe  in  the  Devil, 
thereby  shocking  his  hearers  far 
more  than  when  he  had  denied  be- 
lieving in  God;  and  second,  the 
notary,  fairly  screeching,  invited 
Jack  Smith  to  walk  through  Bas- 
com’s  Woods  that  very  night,  and 
Jack  Smith  accepted. 

He  not  only  accepted.  He  put  a lit- 
tle flourish  on  it.  He  said,  “I’ll  walk 
through  the  Woods,  though  it  ain’t 
on  my  way  home,  if  I sec  Old 
Satan,  and  he’s  civil  to  me.  I’ll  be 
civil  too.  But  if  he  interferes  with 
me.  I’ll  fight  him.  He  won’t  see  me 
turn  and  run,  like  a chapel  lad.” 

He  got  that  far  in  his  speech  and 
saw  young  Oma’s  eyes  fixed  on 
him — her  wonderful,  new,  blazing, 
big  blue  eyes,  frankly  adoring.  Well, 
he  thought.  And  went  on  to  his 
flourish. 

“I’ll  fight  him  any  way  he  likes,” 
he  announced.  “The  fancy.  Rassle. 
Rough-and-tumble,  bite  and  gouge. 
Canuck.  Injun.  Any  style.”  And,  as 
he  listed  the  items  of  his  prowess,  he 
gave  a demonstration  with  each  one. 

Saying  “The  fancy,”  he  whirled 
his  fists  through  a sequence  of  jabs 
and  punches  that  had  the  distinc- 
tion, at  least,  of  being  very  fast. 


WHEN  JACK  SMITH  FOUGHT  OLD  SATAN 


113 


Saying  “Rassle,”  he  hooked  an  el- 
bow under  an  imaginary  adversary’s 
chin  and  pressed  back  until  the 
watchers  fairly  heard  the  bones 
crack.  Saying  “Rough-and-tumble, 
bite  and  gouge,”  he  removed  another 
adversary’s  eyeballs  with  a graphic 
sweep  of  his  thumbs  and  bared  his 
hard,  white,  handsome  teeth  in  some 
ferocious  grimaces. 

At  “Canuck,”  he  simply  gave  a 
kick;  it  was  too  fast  for  the  spec- 
tators to  make  anything  of  it.  But  at 
“Injun,”  he  performed  his  master- 
piece. For  then  he  took  on  a strange, 
wild,  mysterious  expression,  bent 
over  forward  from  his  hips  until  he 
was  the  shape  of  a right  angle, 
bounded  into  the  air  and  after  that 
circled  the  parlor  three  or  four 
times,  seeming  just  to  float,  for  when 
he  put  a foot  down  he  did  so  with- 
out making  a particle  of  sound  or 
even  vibration.  It  was  a passage 
from  the  Huron  war  dance,  and,  as 
its  climax,  called  for  a war  whoop, 
which  Jack  Smith  faithfully  sup- 
plied. 

Then  he  laughed  with  the  utmost 
gaiety,  hurled  on  his  old  hat,  opened 
the  door  and  went  out.  The  second 
he  was  standing  on  the  step  alone, 
he  stopped,  gathered  himself  and 
took  a standing  broad  jump  that 
shot  him  halfway  across  the  road. 
He  thought  he  had  not  felt  so  good 
in  a long  time,  but  he  did  not  as- 
sociate this  goodness  with  anyone’s 
beautiful  eyes.  He  had  forgotten  the 
bound  girl  and  was  dehghtfully  ab- 
sorbed in  himself. 


She,  behind  the  bar,  was  praying 
for  him  with  all  the  terror  of  her 
loving  heart.  He  was  going  into 
Bascom’s  Woods!  “O  God,  help 
him!”  she  whispered,  while  she 
washed  glass  after  glass.  And  then 
she  remembered  the  wicked,  unre- 
ligious things  he  had  said,  and  won- 
dered in  new  fear  if  God  could 
forgive  such  speech.  God,  as  she  had 
had  Him  described  to  her,  was  dis- 
tinctly a Lord  of  Vengeance.  Where 
any  mercy  entered  into  her  concept 
of  the  Divine  make-up,  it  was  by 
her  own  involuntary  amendment — 
involuntary  because  she  could  not 
long  imagine  anything  without  some 
kindness  in  it.  Now  she  hopefully 
laid  hold  of  the  idea  that  the  Om- 
nipotent might  be  propitiated  by  a 
scapegoat  and  hastened  to  offer  one. 
“Punish  me  in  his  place,”  she  im- 
plored. “Punish  me — but  help  him, 
please,  oh,  please!”  Jack  Smith  had 
said  he  did  not  fight  that  way.  . , . 

He  marched  rapidly  along  and 
turned  into  the  road  to  the  Woods 
without  a worry.  He  genuinely  did 
not  beheve  the  Devil  existed.  He  had 
no  fear  of  anything  supernatural. 
However,  when  he  rounded  the 
bend  that  let  him  see  the  Woods’s 
front — a mile-long  stretch  of  un- 
broken heavy  timber — he  thought 
that,  since  it  was  a dark  night,  he 
might  better  be  wearing  his  pistol. 
He  could  run  into  human  interfer- 
ence, if  not  diabolical.  But  who 
would  try  to  rob  him?  He  was 
known  to  be  a poor  man  who  never 


114 

had  anything  but  a few  shillings  for 
his  drink.  He  went  on.  He  entered 
the  Woods.  Then  he  was  reminded, 
out  of  his  frontier  experience,  of 
what  forest  darkness  could  be.  No 
moon,  no  stars  and  a thick  canopy  of 
heavy-leafed  branches  overhead.  See 
the  Devil  in  there — the  Devil,  who 
was  reputed  to  be  black?  See  black 
— against  black?  Jack  Smith  grinned. 
He  might  pass  within  two  feet  of 
Old  Satan  and  never  know  Satan 
was  there. 

He  was  wrong  about  that.  He  saw 
Old  Satan  when  he  had  penetrated 
the  Woods  about  half  a mile,  and 
what  he  saw  was  precisely  a silhou- 
ette. Old  Satan  showed  up — blac}{ — 
against  his  black  surroundings.  He 
really  did.  The  reason  was — Old 
Satan  was  so  much  hlac\er. 

He  was  sitting  on  the  ground  be- 
side the  path,  facing  toward  Jack 
Smith.  Jack  Smith  saw  his  horns 
curving  up  on  the  sides  of  his  head, 
saw  his  long  pointed  ears,  saw  a pair 
of  high  shoulders  and  what  seemed 
to  be  the  sides  of  a pretty  long 
torso,  and  that  was  all  he  could 
make  out.  He  had  an  impression, 
however,  that  Old  Satan  had  his 
knees  lifted  and  was  clasping  them 
with  his  arms.  It  was  Jack  Smith’s 
woodsman’s  eye  that  took  all  this 
in,  an  eye  that  worked  far  faster  than 
human  thought.  So  Jack  Smith  had 
seen  the  Devil,  had  recognized  him 
and  catalogued  his  points  before  the 
awful  conclusion  arrived — Old  Satan 
was  real!  There  he  was! 

Jack  Smith  stood  still.  He  had 


FANTASY  AND  SCIENCE  FICTION 

been  an  orphan  since  he  could  re- 
member and  in  consequence  was 
used  to  feeling  himself  alone — alone 
and  deprived  of  something  all  other 
people  had.  This  accustomedness 
was  a good  thing  for  him  now,  for 
in  that  moment  he  felt  alone  in- 
deed. Alone,  alone,  alone.  Old  Satan 
was  real?  Then  he.  Jack  Smith,  had 
been  wrong  in  everything  that  had 
seemed  right  to  him.  It  was  a great 
deal  to  take  in  without  warning. 
He  went  on  standing  still. 

Old  Satan  spoke  first.  He  said, 
“Jack  Smith.”  His  voice  was  light,  a 
little  wooden  and  not  in  the  least 
terrifying. 

Jack  Smith  replied,  “My  name.” 

“I  hear  you  want  to  fight,”  Satan 
continued,  without  making  a move. 

“Well,  then,  come  on  and  fight,” 
Jack  Smith  replied,  himself  unmov- 
ing. 

Something  switched  across  the 
path  in  front  of  his  feet,  something 
like  a big  and  very  fast  snake.  It 
made  several  heavy  wriggles, 
straightened  out  and  was  still.  It  was 
the  Devil’s  tail.  Jack  Smith  knew 
this  without  understanding  how. 

“Step  over  it,”  invited  Old  Satan. 

“Horns,”  said  Jack  Smith,  “and  a 
long  tail  too.  You  damned  old  cow.” 

He  took  a very  short  step  forward 
and  aimed  a hard  kick.  With  all  the 
blackness,  he  miscalculated,  and  that 
was  lucky  for  him,  for,  had  he 
landed  his  foot  as  he  intended,  he 
would  have  broken  every  foot  bone 
he  had.  He  grazed  the  tail  as  it  was, 
and  the  mere  touch  was  enough  to 


WHEN  JACK  SMITH  FOUGHT  OLD  SATAN 


115 


tell  him  that,  despite  its  limberness 
a few  seconds  before,  it  was  now 
like  a bar  of  iron. 

“You  fight  hind-part-to?”  Jack 
Smith  inquired. 

He  then  saw  a change  in  Old 
Satan’s  silhouetted  head.  At  the  tip 
of  each  horn  there  appeared  a very, 
very  short  pointed  flame.  These  were 
pale  green.  The  next  thing  Jack 
Smith  knew,  the  Devil  was  up  and 
charging. 

The  green  flames  were  racing  to- 
ward him,  and  they  were  at  about 
the  level  of  his  belly.  Evidently  Old 
Satan  was  meaning  to  gore  him. 
His  herd  bull  had  meant  to  do  that 
same  thing  two  weeks  earlier,  when 
it  caught  him  in  close  quarters  in 
the  feed  lot.  Jack  Smith  acted  now 
as  he  had  acted  then.  He  made  no 
attempt  to  dodge,  but  threw  his 
whole  weight  forward  against  the 
oncoming  Devil,  grabbing  the  horns, 
shoving  down  and  then  twisting 
hard.  He  doubted  Satan’s  neck  was 
stronger  than  the  bull’s,  and  he  knew 
that  even  a neck  of  great  power  is 
not  much  good  if  yanked  out  of  line. 

His  calculations  seemed  to  be 
right.  He  soon  had  Satan  looking 
over  his  own  shoulder,  while  Satan’s 
feet  scrabbled  hard  to  keep  planted, 
the  sound  reminding  Jack  Smith 
that  those  feet  were  hoofs.  A few 
yanks  more,  he  thought,  and  bones 
should  crack.  It  seemed  too  easy,  and 
it  was.  Jack  Smith  was  next  aware 
that  something  was  funny  about  his 
arms. 

They  were  numb.  They  were 


heavy.  They  were  almost  like  dead 
— what  on  earth?  Then  Jack  Smith 
realized — his  hands,  wrists  and  fore- 
arms were  terribly  cold.  He  could 
not  feel  a thing  with  them;  he  was 
keeping  his  grip  just  by  bringing 
his  weight  down,  but  the  weight 
traveled  along  his  arms  as  if  they 
were  sticks.  The  reason  was  that 
the  little  flames  in  the  tips  of  Satan’s 
horns  were  licking  Jack  Smith’s 
flesh  and  spreading  this  frozen  tor- 
por. 

In  the  nick  of  time  Jack  Smith 
let  go,  forcing  his  fingers  to  loosen 
by  sheer  will  power.  Then  he  sprang 
aside,  anticipating  another  charge, 
but  Old  Satan  stopped  to  rub  and 
feel  his  neck.  He  straightened  up 
and  Jack  Smith  saw  he  was  about 
seven  feet  tall,  a foot  taller  than  he 
was  himself. 

Jack  Smith  spoke.  “Put  ’em  out,” 
he  said,  and  waggled  his  fingers  over 
his  own  brow,  to  indicate  that  it 
was  the  horns  he  was  referring  to. 

Satan  answered,  “Why  don’t  you 
do  that?” 

“I  will,”  said  Jack  Smith.  And 
spat.  Once,  twice.  The  green  flames 
disappeared. 

And  Satan,  it  seemed,  could  bear 
this  peculiarly  abominable  insult 
no  better  than  a man,  for  he  made 
an  angry  noise,  a sound  like  that  of 
a teakettle  boiling  over  on  a hot 
stove,  and  then  came  on  in  a rush. 
This  time  he  did  not  undertake  to 
gore,  but  minced  up,  dancing  and 
prancing,  his  fists  lifted,  his  chin  in, 
his  shoulders  weaving  and  bobbing. 


116 

all  in  the  smartest  style  of  the  fancy. 

Now  although  earlier  that  eve- 
ning Jack  Smith  had  given  so  flashy 
an  exhibition  of  his  skill  in  box 
fighting,  he  really  had  no  wish  to 
engage  in  any  such  bout,  for  the 
truth  was  he  knew  little  of  the 
method.  Also,  he  believed  that,  in 
meeting  any  attack,  it  was  healthy 
to  introduce  an  element  of  surprise. 
So  he  met  Old  Satan’s  scientific  pu- 
gilism with  a wild,  savage  trick 
right  out  of  the  American  woods, 
the  vicious  French-Canadian  lash, 
the  kick  that  kills.  It  is  delivered 
without  warning;  it  travels  like  light- 
ning, or  anyway  faster  than  human 
sight  can  go;  it  is  aimed  at  the 
victim’s  chin;  and,  ideally,  it  breaks 
both  jaw  and  neck.  Ideally  also,  of 
course,  it  is  performed  by  a foot 
cased  in  the  French-Canadian  log- 
ger’s spiked  and  cleated  boot.  Jack 
Smith  was  wearing  no  such  gear — 
only  a Delaware  farmer’s  shoe,  light- 
ly armed  with  a toe  of  copper. 

But  he  did  have  the  speed  and 
muscle.  He  kicked  his  demonic  en- 
emy as  if  he  were  a demon  himself. 
He  flashed  his  leg  up  as  if  there  had 
been  no  such  thing  as  gravitation. 
His  foot  traveled  like  a weight  on 
the  end  of  a rope  that  is  swinging 
down,  gaining  speed  and  force,  not 
losing  it,  longing  for  the  climax  of 
its  arc  when  it  should  crash  against 
its  target.  It  was  a magnificent  lash. 

One  thing,  however,  went  against 
its  success.  That  was  the  pilch  dark- 
ness. (The  Canucks  seldom  lashed 
in  the  dark  themselves;  barrooms 


FANTASY  AND  SCIENCE  FICTION 

and  torch-lighted  camps  were  their 
sites  for  this  kind  of  battle;  in  the 
dark  they  simply  stabbed.)  So  Jack 
Smith  failed  of  his  target,  though 
not  by  a complete  miss.  His  shoe 
scraped  Old  Satan’s  cheek  and  tore 
one  of  his  long  ears.  It  brought 
blood.  Jack  Smith  could  see  that — 
pale-green  blood,  the  color  of  those 
flames,  seeped  out  of  one  side  of 
Satan’s  head  and  ran  onto  his  shoul- 
der. It  did  not  shine  in  the  dark, 
but  it  was  brightly  visible.  It  painted 
the  ragged  edge  of  the  ear  that  had 
been  torn — no  thicker  than  a mem- 
brane— against  the  air  behind  it. 

Old  Satan  did  not  resume  his  fancy 
fighting.  He  took  a new  attitude,  out 
of  which  Jack  Smith  could  at  first 
make  nothing.  Slightly,  just  slightly, 
Satan  bent  his  body  and  every  one 
of  his  limbs,  spreading  the  limbs 
abroad,  holding  his  elbows  out  from 
his  sides,  taking  a wide-planted 
stance  on  his  hoofs.  Then  he  pulled 
in  his  neck,  so  that  his  head  seemed 
to  be  right  on  his  shoulders,  sticking 
a little  forward.  In  this  position  he 
looked  like  just  one  thing,  and  Jack 
Smith  recognized  that  thing  for 
what  it  was,  at  last. 

Ever  since  he  had  first  glimpsed 
Satan  sitting  there  beside  the  path, 
he  had  been  wild  in  one  quarter  of 
his  mind  because  there  was  nothing 
for  him  to  liken  his  adversary  to. 
Old  Satan  was  not  like  a man, 
despite  having  human  speech,  erect 
posture,  hands  and  the  general  out- 
line of  a man’s  body.  He  was  not 
like  a field  beast— horns,  hoofs,  ears 


WHEN  JACK  SJMITH  FOUGHT  OLD  SATAN 


117 


and  tail  notwithstanding.  But  those 
were  the  only  creatures  that  he  could 
reasonably  be  compared  to,  since  they 
were  the  only  ones  whose  properties 
he  shared.  Now  Jack  Smith  saw 
the  real  likeness  of  him  and  that 
turned  him  sick,  for  it  was  the  one 
member  of  the  animal  kingdom  that 
Jack  Smith  simply  could  not  abide — 
not  in  sight,  in  thought,  or  in  memo- 
ry— the  spider.  Hunching  there  in 
the  midst  of  his  curved  limbs.  Old 
Satan  was  spiderUke  and  nothing 
else.  Jack  Smith  even  had  an  idea 
that  Satan  was  not  standing  on  his 
hoofs  at  all,  but  was  hanging  from  a 
thread  of  web.  And  Jack  Smith’s 
stomach  went  clear  over. 

In  this  horrible  second.  Old  Satan 
addressed  him  with  a sentence  of 
austere  rebuke.  He  said,  “You  do  not 
fight  fair.” 

Spinning  through  Jack  Smith’s  al- 
ready spinning  mind  went  the  an- 
swer he  might  make:  “I  don’t  take  it 
out  of  the  backs  of  bound  men  and 
girls,  either.”  For  at  that  second,  at 
the  sight  of  his  lifelong,  inborn 
dread  and  hate — the  insect  murderer 
— so  magnified,  so  black  against  pure 
blackness.  Jack  Smith  felt  all  his 
hates  come  together.  And  Old  Satan, 
hanging  there,  was  not  just  a spider 
in  his  eyes  but  was  smugness  and 
hypocrites,  and  aristocracy  and  cow- 
ards; and  no-justice-for-the-poor; 
and  the  agonies  of  branding  iron, 
pillory  and  gibbet;  and  the  tears  of 
all  the  hopeless  people — ^and  of  Httle 
orphan  boys  too.  The  whole  sum  of 
the  bitter  emotions  that  had  kept 


Jack  Smith  from  ever  being  a petter 
of  Pet  Cats,  and  had  made  him  Jack 
Smith,  infidel,  blazed  up  in  him, 
directed  against  the  dangler  opposite. 

And  if,  previously,  he  had  been 
accepting  his  battle  with  Old  Satan 
as  a fight  between,  at  least,  two  male 
beings,  he  no  longer  did.  He  could 
not  conceive  that  Old  Satan  had 
even  the  single  warm  attribute  of 
sex.  Sex  was  the  means  by  which 
men  changed,  giving  life  to  new 
men,  sons  to  come  after  them — and 
Satan  did  not  change.  He  was  always 
the  same  and  he  had  always  been 
there — the  same — for  every  man  who 
had  drawn  breath.  The  Old  One. 
Jack  Smith  did  not  try  to  put  any 
of  this  clot  of  concepts  into  lucid 
words.  He  just  roared,  “And  serve 
you  right!”  and  gathered  himself 
for  what  might  come  next. 

Then  Satan  leaped.  Still  keeping 
his  spread-out  posture,  he  sailed 
through  the  black  air  that  was  be- 
tween him  and  Jack  Smith.  He 
landed  hard,  chest  to  chest,  and  they 
went  down.  Jack  Smith  of  course 
being  underneath.  Satan  at  once  en- 
wrapped him,  using  arms,  legs  and 
tail  as  well. 

Then  it  was  rough-and-tumble, 
nothing  else.  They  kneed,  clawed, 
ground,  choked  and  hammered. 
Jack  Smith  did  not  remain  under- 
neath, but  neither  could  he  remain 
on  top.  He  and  Satan  rolled,  thrash- 
ing over  a wide  expanse.  Sometimes 
they  spun  fast,  each  contriving  to 
defeat  the  other’s  tactic  as  soon  as  it 
was  applied.  Sometimes  they  lay. 


118 

seemingly  still,  for  moments,  meas- 
uring each  other’s  strength,  each 
gathering  his  own  resources.  This 
went  on  a long  time,  and  all  of  that 
time  the  two  were  in  a close  em- 
brace, body  against  body,  sometimes 
face  against  face.  Jack  Smith  in  this 
manner  got  an  intimate  comprehen- 
sion of  what  Old  Satan’s  physical 
being  was. 

Spiderlike,  indeed.  Old  Satan  was 
neither  warm,  as  a man  would  be, 
nor  cold,  as  a fish  or  lizard.  He  was 
just  a trifle  coldish — and  utterly  dry. 
And  he  was  a prober  and  sucker  in 
every  particle  of  him.  He  was  com- 
pletely covered.  Jack  Smith  found 
out,  with  very,  very  short  thick  fur, 
and  each  hair  of  this  coat  had  a life 
of  its  own — which  was  to  probe  and 
suck.  Wherever  a surface  of  Old 
Satan  came  in  contact  with  a bare 
surface  of  Jack  Smith,  the  satanic 
surface  took  hold.  Each  separate  hair 
on  it  wriggled  to  investigate  Jack 
Smith’s  skin  and,  having  satisfied 
itself  tliat  way,  went  to  work,  fasten- 
ing its  tip  down,  sucking.  So  that 
Jack  Smith,  as  well  as  his  mighty 
battle  with  the  spider  that  was  seven 
feet  high,  had  also  these  thousands  of 
infinitesimal,  eager  indecencies  to 
madden  him.  Ghastly  as  they  were, 
they  helped  him,  in  a way.  They 
kept  him  from  sinking  into  routine, 
either  physical  or  mental.  They  gave 
him  the  spur  of  horror.  He  fought 
like  one  inspired,  inventing  and  ap- 
plying new  tricks  without  being 
aware  of  it,  driven  to  brilliance  by 
desperation.  Just  to  get  away  from 


FANTASY  AND  SCIENCE  FICTION 

the  feel  of  Satan — that  was  the  whole 
of  his  state  of  mind  in  this  passage 
of  the  fight. 

And  yet,  frantic  as  he  was,  he 
forbore  to  use  one  well-proved,  ef- 
fective trick,  forbore  again  and 
again,  for  he  had  repeated  chances. 
That  was  the  bite.  He  would,  in 
need,  have  taken  a beast-devil’s  ear 
or  even  tail  in  his  teeth.  He  would 
have  taken  a man-devil’s  hand  or 
sinew.  But  the  hairy,  temperature- 
less anatomy  of  a spider!  Jack  Smith 
fought  this  part  of  his  fight  with  his 
jaws  clenched  and  his  lips  pressed 
together  too. 

However,  if  the  bite  was  omitted 
from  consideration,  not  so  was  the 
gouge.  Jack  Smith  presently  fixed 
his  mind  on  gouging  as  the  best 
method  of  getting  free,  could  he  but 
attain  the  necessary  position.  The 
gouge,  very  simply,  consisted  in  re- 
moving an  opponent’s  eyes.  It  was 
quick,  requiring  only  a few  seconds 
to  achieve  its  purpose.  It  was  eco- 
nomical of  effort,  for  it  called  for  no 
strength.  It  might  kill  an  adversary 
or  it  might  not,  but  that  was  un- 
important. It  would  end  a fight. 

At  long  last  Jack  Smith  got  his 
opportunity.  He  found  himself  on 
top  with  his  forearms  free  and  above 
his  head.  The  position  could  change 
in  a second — Old  Satan  was  trying, 
with  both  his  arms,  to  heave  Jack 
Smith  off  his  chest,  while  with  his 
thick,  coldish  tail  he  was  tearing  at 
Jack  Smith’s  leg  hold,  sometimes 
latching  on  and  pulling,  as  if  the 
tail  had  been  a cable,  sometimes 


WHEN  JACK  SMITH  fOUGHT  OLD  SATAN 


119 


flailing,  as  if  with  a whip.  So  Jack 
Smith  acted  fast.  He  felt  over  Satan’s 
face  to  the  spots  where  the  eyes 
should  be  (up  to  then  he  had  seen 
no  light  come  from  Satan’s  counten- 
ance, nothing  except  the  pale-green 
fire  and  blood)  and,  finding  the  eyes 
in  the  normal  places,  though  covered 
with  furry  lids,  he  instantly  set  his 
thumbs. 

The  technique  then  was  to  push 
down,  driving  the  eyeballs  back  in 
the  skull  a certain  distance.  After 
which,  the  thumbs  should  be  bent 
at  the  first  joint  and  the  direction  of 
the  push  changed — from  down  to 
outward.  By  this  very  simple  se- 
quence of  motions,  if  all  went  well, 
the  eyes  would  be  scooped  forth.  It 
was  an  old  method  of  human  com- 
bat, descending  from  the  Ncander- 
thalers  by  way  of  the  Greeks,  Rom- 
ans and  European  mercenary  armies 
to  the  American  frontier,  where  it 
had  been  well  established  for  a cen- 
tury. Jack  Smith  was  perfectly  fa- 
miliar with  it.  He  proceeded  cor- 
rectly. He  drove  his  thumbs  down, 
Satan’s  furry  eyelids  being  under 
them. 

What  happened  next  was  that  Jack 
Smith’s  thumbs  went  on  an  unex- 
pected distance.  For  Satan’s  eyes  did 
not  wait  to  be  pushed  in;  they  with- 
drew, as  it  were,  before  the  pushers, 
retired  of  their  own  accord,  and 
left  Jack  Smith’s  thumbs  sticking 
down  in  Old  Satan’s  skull  in  seem- 
ing vacancy.  For  a few  seconds. 
Then  Jack  Smith  realized  what  was 
happening.  His  thumbs  were  freez- 


ing and  the  cold  was  crawling  up 
his  wrists  and  forearms.  It  was  the 
same  cold  as  had  struck  him  from 
the  flames  in  the  horns,  and  it  acted 
the  same  way,  of  course.  It  was  so 
terrible  that  it  numbed  without 
warning.  Jack  Smith’s  hands  were 
half  paralyzed  before  he  even  felt  a 
chill.  He  jerked  his  thumbs  out  with 
a yell  and,  in  the  whole  horror  that 
he  felt,  he  let  go  of  Old  Satan  com- 
pletely and  sprang  to  his  feet  and 
rushed  back  three  or  four  yards. 

Old  Satan  in  no  way  interfered 
with  this.  He  sat  up  himself,  taking 
the  easy  attitude  in  which  he  had 
been  resting  when  Jack  Smith  first 
saw  him.  For  a second,  no  more,  he 
allowed  Jack  Smith  to  see  his  eyes — 
two  pale-green  slits — as  if  to  inform 
him  that  they  were  uninjured.  Then 
he  patted  the  ground  in  front  of  him 
with  the  end  of  his  tail,  giving  a 
gentle  thump.  That  was  all  he  did. 

And  Jack  Smith,  standing  still  and 
breathing  loud,  feeling  the  life  creep, 
with  an  agony  as  of  death,  back  into 
his  hands,  but  also  feeling,  on  every 
particle  of  his  exposed  skin,  the 
loathsome  memory  of  the  hairy  vi- 
olations, vivid  and  crawling  and  vit- 
al— Jack  Smith,  at  this  point,  de- 
cided to  finish  this  fight  Injun.  Injun 
style  was  clean.  There  was  no  hug- 
ging and  rubbing  in  it.  There  was 
no  contact  at  all,  up  to  the  last 
moment.  So  the  Injun  fight  would 
be  his  method  from  now  on.  He  was 
a master  Injun  fighter. 

There  had  been  one  whole  sum- 
mer in  the  north  woods  when  he 


120 

had  fooled  some  bands  of  Huron 
trackers  who,  themselves,  were  re- 
liably reported  to  fool  the  Devil 
daily.  So  it  would  take  a smart  In- 
jun to  fool  Jack  Smith — a smarter 
one  than  had  yet  lived  to  brag  of  it 
— and  a smart  devil  too.  Having 
laid  this  plan.  Jack  Smith  vanished. 

He  had  been  standing  by  a tree 
and  he  became  part  of  the  tree  trunk. 
How?  You  could  not  say  he  stepped. 
He  glided,  maybe.  Or  drifted.  Or 
dissolved  and  floated,  if  you  choose. 

Best  to  say.  Jack  Smith  just  was 
gone.  He  had  been  in  one  place,  and 
then  he  was  not  in  that  place,  nor 
had  he  moved  to  any  other,  so  far  as 
a watching  eye  could  see.  Such  was 
the  essence  of  the  Injun  stalk. 

Jack  Smith  loved  this  way  of  fight- 
ing. As  soon  as  he  decided  to  use  it, 
he  underwent  that  wonderful  change 
that  he  had  had  earlier  in  the  Bear’s 
Claw  Tavern — he  ceased  to  be  a 
Delaware  farmer;  he  became  the 
free,  gleeful,  savage  child  that  was 
bred  of  the  American  wilderness. 
He  was  an  Injun. 

That  meant  he  was  the  trees,  the 
undergrowth,  the  air.  He  was  Bas- 
com’s  Woods  as  well  as  was  in  it, 
for  he  drew  it  all  into  himself,  call- 
ing on  the  sub-  and  supersensory 
faculties  that  men  in  breeches  never 
know  they  have. 

This  was  the  way  to  fight!  For 
this  was  the  primitive  essence  of  the 
fight — fight  and  hunt  combined — 
and  the  sublimation,  since  it  was 
fight  on  a mental  plane,  mind  against 
mind,  no  other  force  involved.  Well, 


FANTASY  AND  SCIENCE  FICTION 

that  did  not  leave  him  much  to  fear, 
Jack  Smith  thought,  grinning.  Old 
Satan  was  no  Injun  fighter.  Jack 
Smith,  after  he  blended  into  that 
tree,  never  had  Old  Satan  out  of  his 
sight  (though  he  never  came  in  line 
of  Satan’s  vision  either)  and  he  could 
easily  perceive  that  Satan  knew  not 
the  first  thing  about  the  stalk.  Old 
Satan  showed  a really  pitiable  ignor- 
ance. 

He  first  cocked  his  horned  head 
at  the  tree  into  which  Jack  Smith 
seemed  to  have  entered,  telling  him- 
self, practically  out  loud,  that,  as 
Jack  Smith  must  have  gone  behind 
the  tree,  he  would  have  to  come  out 
from  behind  it  sooner  or  later.  When 
this  did  not  happen,  Old  Satan  got 
up  and  walked  around.  He  did  not 
leave  the  comparatively  clear  space 
in  which  they  had  done  the  rough- 
and-tumble,  and  it  was  apparent  to 
the  watching  Jack  Smith  that  he  was 
uneasy,  for  twice  he  whirled  sud- 
denly around,  fists  lifted,  evidently 
expecting  Jack  Smith  to  be  creeping 
up  behind.  Finally  he  sat  down 
again,  but  remained  edgy;  Jack 
Smith  could  tell  that  by  his  tail, 
which  swftched  back  and  forth  in 
nervous  short  arcs.  Jack  Smith,  in  the 
meantime,  was  never  more  than 
fifty  feet  away.  His  plan  was  to  get 
Old  Satan  completely  baffled,  but  not 
give  him  time  to  conclude  that  his 
opponent  had  run  off,  and  then 
come  in  and  cut  Old  Satan’s  throat. 

His  weapon  for  the  blow  was  not 
much.  It  was  a little  clasp  knife  that 
he  carried  in  his  pocket.  It  had  a 


WHEN  JACK  SMITH  FOUGHT  OLD  SATAN 


121 


single  blade  and  that  was  no  more 
than  two  inches  long.  It  was  razor- 
sharp,  however,  and  two  inches,  if 
applied  accurately  and  fast,  would 
be  enough  to  split  the  big  vein  that 
was  in  any  neck  that  was  a neck  at 
all,  human  or  devilish.  Jack  Smith, 
gliding  through  the  pitch  darkness 
and  seeming  to  be  part  of  it,  felt 
calmly  sure  of  himself.  He  pro- 
longed the  stalk  about  ten  minutes 
and  then  closed  in. 

He  came  across  the  little  clear 
space  that  was  between  him  and 
Old  Satan,  as  silent  as  a cloud.  He 
got  up  to  Satan’s  back.  The  tail, 
switching  its  little  arcs,  was  laid  on 
the  ground  to  Satan’s  right.  That 
was  a good  thing.  Jack  Smith  aimed 
to  strike  on  the  left — the  vein  was 
there.  He  struck.  He  drove  his  blade 
in  its  full  length,  stabbing  Satan’s 
neck  just  about  under  the  left  ear 
and  then  dragging  hard  toward  the 
front.  The  vein  parted.  Jack  Smith 
knew  this  because  at  once  the  pale- 
green  blood  spurted  up,  looking  like 
the  jet  of  a fat  fountain;  but  Jack 
Smith  could  not  stop.  So  violent 
was  his  hatred,  he  dragged  on  and 
achieved  a half  decapitation.  Then 
Old  Satan’s  head  clunked  down  on 
his  chest  and  Jack  Smith  quit  cut- 
ting because  he  had  to.  He  took  his 
fingers  from  the  knife  handle,  leav- 
ing the  blade  in  the  gash,  and  started 
to  rise  up  to  expel  the  great 
“Ah-h-h!”  of  victory.  The  “Ah-h-h” 
did  not  follow. 

Instantly,  before  he  got  his  back 
straight,  he  was  thrown  into  a frenzy 


by  Old  Satan’s  blood.  It  had 
drenched  his  hand,  wrist  and  sleeve, 
and  now  he  felt  it  act  precisely  as 
the  hair  had  acted.  It  seemed  to 
separate  into  an  infinity  of  particles, 
each  of  which  had  the  hairs’  hideous 
investigative  propensity  and  the  re- 
volting sucking  mouth.  Instead  of 
the  “Ah-h-h,”  Jack  Smith  expelled  a 
shout  of  disgust  and  rage.  He  flung 
off  his  coat,  he  ripped  out  his  shirt 
sleeve,  he  grabbed  a great  handful 
of  leaves  and  scrubbed  at  his  skin 
until  at  last  he  felt  clean  again. 
Not  until  he  had  done  all  this  did  he 
pay  the  slightest  attention  to  Old 
Satan. 

Then  he  saw  that  Old  Satan  was 
clear  down,  prostrate.  He  was  lying 
on  his  back.  The  blood,  spurting 
from  his  neck,  had  made  a puddle 
all  around  his  head  and  shoulders. 
Against  the  pale  green.  Jack  Smith 
could  plainly  see  the  hairy,  horrible 
and  sinewy  formation  of  his  late 
enemy.  He  could  also  see  the  handle 
of  his  little  knife,  still  stuck  in  Sat- 
an’s neck.  He  stood  still  and  sighed. 

Then  Old  Satan  spoke.  In  a tired, 
bored,  very  faraway  voice,  he  said, 
“You  cannot  kill  me.  Jack  Smith, 
for  you  are  just  a man.  I am  Evil-in- 
the-World,  and  no  man  can  destroy 
me.  I have  played  out  this  nonsense 
of  a fight  with  you  to  teach  you 
that.  I have  let  you  use  all  your 
tricks,  and  have  let  you  seem  to  win. 
So  that  you  would  learn  that  you 
cannot  win.  A blade  in  my  throat.?” 
Old  Satan  languidly  lifted  his  tail 
toward  his  head  and  let  a loop  slide 


122 

over  the  handle  o£  Jack  Smith’s 
weapon.  The  tail  then  plucked  the 
knife  from  the  wound,  carried  it  to 
Old  Satan’s  left  chest  and  drove  the 
steel  in  there.  After  which  the  tail 
seemed  to  collapse.  It  simply  flopped 
back  on  the  ground.  Old  Satan  went 
on,  exhaustedly  talking. 

“In  my  throat,  in  my  heart,  in  me 
anywhere,  a human  weapon  is  im- 
potent. Jack  Smith,  I tell  you  again; 
a man  cannot  fight  the  Devil.  But 
once  in  a while,  once  in  a great, 
great  while,  far  too  infrequently  for 
my  needs  and  purposes,  there  is  a 
man  who  can  be  a devil.  A man 
who  can  rise  so  high.  You  are  such 
a one.  You  can  be  one  of  my  helpers 
and  friends.  With  me,  you  can  throw 
confusion  into  human  hypocrisy. 
You  already  hate  it.  You  have  al- 
ready cut  yourself  off  from  it.  Now, 
with  me,  you  can  confound  it.  Come 
on.” 

Jack  Smith  thought  how  those 
words  fit  into  every  story  he  had 
ever  been  told  about  Old  Satan.  Old 
Satan  tempted  people.  He  made  them 
great  promises  and  then  dragged 
them  off  to  Hell.  Anybody  knew 
that.  But  why,  Jack  Smith  asked 
himself,  did  Satan,  trying  now  to 
win  a recruit,  put  on  so  poor  a 
showing?  Why  lie  there,  weltering 
in  his  blood,  talking  in  a beyond- 
the-grave  voice,  while  telling  Jack 
Smith  what  a great  future  he  could 
offer  him?  If,  as  he  said,  he  really 
was  unscathed?  Why?  Jack  Smith 
squinted  hard  at  the  flat,  sunken 
form  before  him.  The  green  blood 


FANTASY  AND  SCIENCE  FICTION 

Still  flowed — what  a lot  the  creature 
had.  Were  the  jets  slowing  a little 
now?  Jack  Smith  tried  to  believe 
they  were.  And  Old  Satan,  making  it 
clear  that  he  read  Jack  Smith’s  mind, 
thought  for  thought,  gave  a demon- 
stration. 

Out  of  his  chest  there  rose  an- 
other Old  Satan,  just  like  himself, 
except  that  he  was  uninjured  and 
full  of  vigor.  And  behind  this  second 
Satan  came  a third,  and  a fourth  and 
fifth,  and  so  on,  until  a throng  of 
them  filled  the  clear  space  full.  Ev- 
erywhere Jack  Smith  looked  he  saw 
horned  heads,  high  shoulders,  long 
bodies,  pointed  ears.  None  of  these 
new  Devils  did  anything.  They  just 
stood.  For  perhaps  a minute  they 
stood,  while  the  green  blood  spurted 
from  the  DeviLon  the  ground.  After 
which,  as  they  had  arrived,  so  they 
departed.  One  at  a time  they  sank 
down  into  the  first. 

“I  am  Evil-in-the-World,  and  no 
man  can  destroy  me.  Jack  Smith,” 
said  Old  Satan  again.  “Come  on.” 

Jack  Smith  knew  then  exactly 
what  he  had  to  do — and  he  did  it. 
He  spun  on  his  heel  and  walked 
straight  away  from  the  thing  before 
him,  walked  straight  indeed,  walked 
hard  and  fast,  for  he  was  filled 
with  consummate  purpose.  Right  in 
his  path  stood  an  oak,  the  biggest 
oak  in  Bascom’s  Woods,  one  that 
was  named  the  Five  Hundred  Year 
Tree,  because  people  said  it  must  be 
so  old.  Jack  Smith  did  not  swerve 
as  he  approached  it.  He  did  not 
slow  down,  either.  He  walked  plumb 


■WHEN  JACK  SMITH  FOUGHT  OLD  SATAN 


123 


into  the  monster  trunk  and  shoved 
his  breastbone  against  it  and  spread- 
eagled  his  arms,  which,  at  their  full 
extent,  did  not  cover  a fifth  of  the 
tree’s  circumference. 

And  so  standing.  Jack  Smith  bel- 
lowed out,  in  a voice  that  rang 
through  Bascom’s  Woods  from  one 
end  to  the  other,  the  very  prayer  of 
all  human  prayers,  the  basic,  desper- 
ate petition  that  lies  in  every  simple 
heart  when  it  has  seen  the  determin- 
ation and  elaborateness  of  evil.  "O 
God’’  he  roared,  “HELP  me!’’  And 
then  he  planted  his  feet  with  all  his 
might,  did  as  much  as  he  could 
with  his  arms  to  grasp  that  great 
wall  of  bark,  and  heaved.  The  tree 
came  up. 

Jack  Smith  felt  its  profound  center 
root  move  first.  That  gave,  then 
rocked  and  swayed.  The  vast  root 
mat  that  was  above  it  then  relin- 
quished the  unstirring  mold  in 
which  it  had  lain  for  half  a mil- 
lennium, and  finally  out  sprang  the 
long  root  arms  that  stretched  along 
the  surface,  waving  and  flying  like 
pennons  of  victory.  And  to  the 
sound  of  a thunder  too  vast  to  be 
imagined,  Jack  Smith  found  himself 
standing  with  the  Five  Hundred 
Year  Tree  resting  on  his  shoulder. 

It  was  an  awkward  thing  to  hold, 
and  he  had  to  act  fast  to  keep  it  in 
balance.  He  did.  He  passed  the  trunk 
rapidly  along  from  hand  to  hand 
until  he  grasped  it  about  thirty  feet 
short  of  the  top.  Then  he  swung 
the  whole  tree  back,  over  his  shoul- 
der, as  if  he  were  using  an  ax,  and 


then  forward,  and  then  down.  With 
all  the  fire  in  his  heart  he  made  his 
aim,  and  with  the  same  fire  he  ex- 
pressed it.  “Get!”  he  screamed.  He 
hit.  The  awful  weight  of  the  central 
mat  came  down  exactly  where  he 
sent  it — smack — on  the  bleeding 
spider.  And  then  Jack  Smith  was 
there  alone,  the  tree  trunk  in  his 
hands,  himself  the  center  of  a cata- 
clysmic commotion. 

Nothing  visible  was  moving,  but 
through  the  length  and  breadth  of 
Bascom’s  Woods,  and  of  the  whole 
township  and  county,  and  probably 
of  all  Delaware,  if  it  comes  to  that, 
the  sound  waves  were  leaping  and 
pitching  and  soaring  like  the  surface 
of  the  sea  at  the  height  of  a hurri- 
cane. The  crash  of  the  oak  had 
been  simply  indescribable.  It  was  so 
big  that  Jack  Smith  could  not  hear 
it;  he  became  aware  of  it  only  when, 
finally,  it  ended  and  there  was  quiet 
once  more.  And  then,  so  stunned,  so 
numbed  was  he,  he  might  not  have 
apprehended  silence  itself,  except 
that  this  silence  had  a very  peculiar 
little  noise  moving  through  it.  It 
was  like  the  singing  of  a bullet,  be- 
ginning loudish  but  rapidly  rushing 
away,  yet,  from  both  its  direction 
and  a certain  thickness  in  its  tone, 
making  plain  that  the  object  produc- 
ing it  was  traveling  not  through 
air  but  earth,  straight  down.  And 
Jack  Smith  understood  what  the  ob- 
ject was.  It  was  Old  Satan,  heading 
home — Old  Satan  diving  for  Hell  so 
fast  he  made  the  rocks  hum  with 
his  passage.  Fainter  and  fainter  grew 


124 

die  note,-  dwindled  to  a last,  slim, 
V-shaped  g-l-o-o-c-k,  and  stopped. 
After  that,  into  Bascom’s  Woods  the 
real  quiet  came. 

Jack  Smith  let  the  trunk  slide  out 
of  his  hands.  It  sank  gently  to  the 
ground.  He  followed  its  motion.  His 
knees  began  to  bend  and  went  on 
bending  until  they  brought  the  full 
length  of  his  shins  to  the  earth.  He 
did  not  stop  at  that.  He  kept  on 
sinking  until  he  was  sitting  on  his 
heels.  All  the  time  his  eyes  stayed 
fixed  on  the  vast  hole  made  by  the 
uprooting. 

At  last  Jack  Smith  spoke.  “You 
did,”  he  said. 

More  quiet  followed,  a period  of 
the  kind  that  can  never  be  measured 
on  a clock.  Then,  sensibly,  pleasantly 
and  cheerily,  the  little  chapel  bell  be- 
gan to  ring.  Jack  Smith  knew  no 
human  hands  were  pulling  on  the 
rope.  He  looked  toward  the  sky 
and,  very,  very  humbly,  he  touched 
his  forelock.  And  the  sun  came  up. 

Oma  and  Jack  Smith  were  mar- 
ried soon  after  that  night.  Theirs  was 
the  first  wedding  in  the  chapel.  The 
good  people  of  the  township  (for  of 


FANTASY  AND  SCIENCE  FICTION 

course  there  were  good  people  there, 
as  Jack  Smith  himself  could  see 
when  he  looked  at  what  was  before 
his  eyes  instead  of  what  was  stored 
in  his  mind)  made  up  a purse  for 
them,  in  gratitude.  He  at  first  re- 
fused the  gift,  as  contrary  to  his  in- 
dependence. But  Oma,  the  bride, 
plucked  his  sleeve  and  whispered, 
and  he  accepted.  They  used  the 
money  to  buy  freedom  for  the  bound 
girl  who  had  sampled  her  mistress’ 
sugar. 

Jack  Smith  and  Oma  had  a long 
happy  life  together.  For  seven  years, 
to  be  sure,  they  were  separated;  that 
was  when  he  went  to  fight  in  Gen- 
eral Washington’s  War,  the  conflict 
that  ensued  when  Delaware  decided 
to  expel  the  British  Empire — and 
did.  Despite  the  interruption,  how- 
ever, the  pair  contrived  to  have  a 
good  many  children.  You  will  find 
Smiths  all  over  the  United  States 
today,  fine  citizens  too— but,  if  de- 
scended from  farmer-soldier  Jack 
and  bound  girl  Oma,  making  noth- 
ing of  it.  For  those  Smiths  are  from 
Delaware  and  Delawareans  are,  as  I 
said  at  the  beginning  of  this  story, 
exclusive  people. 


You  are  probably  reading  this  just  after  the  Memorial  Day  weekend. 
And  ids  only  about  a month  till  the  Fourth  of  July,  And  underneath 
all  of  your  pleasure  in  these  national  celebrations,  there  may  be  a 
certain  haunting  doubt,  a question  that  keeps  nagging  at  you. . , , 


The  Holiday  cM.an 

by  RICHARD  MATHESON 


“You’ll  be  late,”  she  said. 

He  leaned  back  tiredly  in  hb 
chair. 

“I  know,”  he  answered. 

They  were  in  the  kitchen  having 
breakfast.  David  hadn’t  eaten  much. 
Mostly,  he’d  drunk  black  coffee  and 
stared  at  the  tablecloth.  There  were 
thin  lines  running  through  it  that 
looked  like  intersecting  highways. 

“Well?”  she  said. 

He  shivered  and  took  his  eyes 
from  the  tablecloth. 

“Yes,”  he  said.  “All  right  ” 

He  kept  sitting  there. 

‘‘David,"  she  said. 

“I  know,  I know,”  he  said.  “I’ll  be 
late.”  He  wasn’t  angry.  There  was 
no  anger  left  in  him. 

“You  certainly  will,”  she  said,  but- 
tering her  toast.  She  spread  on  thick 
raspberry  jam,  then  bit  off  a piece 
and  chewed  it  cracklingly. 

David  got  up  and  walked  across 
the  kitchen.  At  the  door  he  stopped 
and  turned.  He  stared  at  the  back  of 
her  head. 


“Why  couldn’t  I?”  he  asked  again. 

“Because  you  can’t,”  she  said. 
“That’s  all.” 

“But  why?" 

“Because  they  need  you,”  she  said. 
“Because  they  pay  you  well  and  you 
couldn’t  do  anything  else.  Isn’t  it  ob- 
vious?” 

“They  could  find  someone  else.” 

“Oh,  stop  it,”  she  said.  “You  know 
they  couldn’t.” 

He  closed  his  hands  into  fists. 
“Why  should  I be  the  one?”  he 
asked. 

She  didn’t  answer.  She  sat  eating 
her  toast. 

“Jean?” 

“There’s  nothing  more  to  say,”  she 
said,  chewing.  She  turned  around. 
“Now,  will  you  go?”  she  said.  “You 
shouldn’t  be  late  today.” 

David  felt  a chill  in  his  flesh. 

“No,”  he  said,  “not  today.” 

He  walked  out  of  the  kitchen  and 
went  upstairs.  There,  he  brushed  his 
teeth,  polished  his  shoes  and  put  on 
a tie.  Before  eight  he  was  down 


125 


126 


FANTASY  AND  SCIENCE  FICTION 


again.  He  went  into  the  kitchen. 

“Goodby,”  he  said. 

She  tilted  up  her  cheek  for  him 
and  he  kissed  it.  “’By,  dear,”  she 
said.  “Have  a — ” She  stopped 
abruptly. 

“ — nice  day?”  he  finished  for  her. 
“Thank  you.”  He  turned  away.  “I’ll 
have  a lovely  day.” 

Long  ago  he  had  stopped  driving 
a car.  Mornings  he  walked  to  the 
railroad  station.  He  didn’t  even  like 
to  ride  with  someone  else  or  take  a 
bus. 

At  the  station  he  stood  outside  on 
the  platform  waiting  for  the  train. 
He  had  no  newspaper.  He  never 
bought  them  anymore. 

“Mornin’,  Garrett.” 

He  turned  and  saw  Henry  Coul- 
ter who  also  worked  in  the  city. 
Coulter  patted  him  on  the  back. 

“Good  morning,”  David  said. 

“How’s  it  goin’?”  Coulter  asked. 

“Fine.  Thank  you.” 

“Good.  Lookin’  forward  to  the 
Fourth?” 

David  swallowed.  “Well  . . .”  he 
began. 

“Myself,  I’m  takin’  the  fainily  to 
the  woods,”  said  Coulter.  “No  lousy 
fireworks  for  us.  Pilin’  into  the  old 
bus  and  headin’  out  till  the  fireworks 
are  over.” 

“Driving,”  said  David. 

“Yes,  sir,”  said  Coulter.  “Far  as  wc 
can.” 

It  began  by  itself.  No,  he  thought; 
not  now.  He  forced  it  back  into  its 
darkness. 


“ — rising  business,”  Coulter  fin- 
ished. 

“What?”  he  asked. 

“Said  I trust  things  are  goin’  well 
in  the  advertising  business.” 

David  cleared  his  throat. 

“Oh,  yes,”  he  said.  “Fine.”  He  al- 
ways forgot  about  the  lie  he’d  told 
Coulter. 

When  the  train  arrived  he  sat  in 
the  No  Smoking  car  knowing  that 
Coulter  always  smoked  a cigar  en 
route.  He  didn’t  want  to  sit  with 
Coulter.  Not  now. 

All  the  way  to  the  city  he  sat  look- 
ing out  the  window.  Mostly  he 
watched  road  and  highway  traffic; 
but  once,  while  the  train  rattled  over 
a bridge,  he  stared  down  at  the  mir- 
ror-like surface  of  a lake.  Once  he 
put  his  head  back  and  looked  up  at 
the  sun. 

He  was  actually  to  the  elevator 
when  he  stopped. 

“Up?”  said  the  man  in  the  maroon 
uniform.  He  looked  at  David  stead- 
ily. “Up?”  he  said.  Then  he  closed 
the  rolling  doors. 

David  stood  motionless.  People  be- 
gan to  cluster  around  him.  In  a mo- 
ment, he  turned  and  shouldered  by 
them,  pushing  through  the  revolv- 
ing door.  As  he  came  out,  the  oven 
heat  of  July  surrounded  him.  He 
moved  along  the  sidewalk  like  a 
man  asleep.  On  the  next  block  he 
entered  a bar. 

Inside,  it  was  cold  and  dim.  There 
were  no  customers.  Not  even  the 
bartender  was  visible.  David  sank 


THE  HOLIDAY  MAN 


127 


down  in  the  shadow  of  a booth  and 
took  his  hat  off.  He  leaned  his  head 
back  and  closed  his  eyes. 

He  couldn’t  do  it.  He  simply 
could  not  go  up  to  his  office.  No 
matter  what  Jean  said,  no  matter 
what  anyone  said.  He  clasped  his 
hands  on  the  table  edge  and 
squeezed  them  until  the  fingers  were 
pressed  dry  of  blood.  He  just 
wouldn’t. 

“Help  you.^’’  asked  a voice. 

David  opened  his  eyes.  The  bar- 
tender was  standing  by  the  booth 
looking  down  at  him. 

“Yes,  uh  . . . beer,”  he  said.  He 
hated  beer  but  he  knew  he  had  to 
buy  something  for  the  privilege  of 
sitting  in  the  chilly  silence  undis- 
turbed. He  wouldn’t  drink  it. 

The  bartender  brought  the  beer 
and  David  paid  for  it.  Then,  when 
the  bartender  had  gone,  he  began  to 
turn  the  glass  slowly  on  the  table 
top.  While  he  was  doing  this  it  be- 
gan again.  With  a gasp,  he  pushed 
it  away.  No! — he  told  it;  savagely. 

In  a while  he  got  up  and  left  the 
bar.  It  was  past  ten.  That  didn’t 
matter,  of  course.  They  knew  he  was 
always  late.  They  knew  he  always 
tried  to  break  away  from  it  and 
never  could. 

His  office  was  at  the  back  of  the 
suite,  a small  soundproof  cubicle  fur- 
nished only  with  a rug,  a couch  and 
a small  desk  on  which  lay  pencils 
and  white  paper.  It  was  all  he  need- 
ed. Once  he’d  had  a secretary  but  he 
hadn’t  liked  the  idea  of  her  sitting 


outside  the  door  and  listening  to 
him  scream. 

No  one  saw  him  enter.  He  let 
himself  in  from  the  hall  through  a 
private  door.  Inside,  he  relocked  the 
door,  then  took  off  his  suit  coat  and 
laid  it  across  the  desk.  It  was  stuffy 
in  the  office  so  he  walked  across  the 
floor  and  pulled  up  the  window. 

Far  below,  the  city  moved.  He 
stood  watching  it.  How  many  of 
them.?  he  thought. 

Sighing  heavily,  he  turned.  Well, 
he  was  here.  There  was  no  point  in 
hesitating  any  longer.  He  was  com- 
mitted now.  The  best  thing  was  to 
get  it  over  and  clear  out. 

He  drew  the  blinds,  walked  over 
to  the  couch  and  lay  down.  He  fussed 
a little  with  the  pillow,  then 
stretched  once  and  was  still.  Almost 
immediately,  he  felt  his  limbs  going 
numb. 

It  began. 

He  did  not  stop  it  now.  It  trick- 
led on  his  brain  like  melted  ice.  It 
rushed  like  winter  wind.  It  spun 
like  blizzard  vapor.  It  leaped  and 
ran  and  billowed  and  exploded  and 
his  mind  was  filled  with  it.  He  grew 
rigid  and  began  to  gasp,  his  chest 
twitching  with  breath,  the  beating 
of  his  heart  a violent  stagger.  His 
hands  drew  in  like  white  talons, 
clutching  and  scratching  at  the 
couch.  He  shivered  and  groaned 
and  writhed.  Finally,  he  screamed. 
He  screamed  for  a very  long  while. 

When  it  was  done,  he  lay  limp 
and  motionless  on  the  couch,  his 
eyes  like  balls  of  frozen  glass.  When 


128 

he  could,  he  raised  his  arm  and 
looked  at  his  wrist  watch.  It  was 
almost  two. 

He  struggled  to  his  feet.  His 
bones  felt  sheathed  with  lead  but  he 
managed  to  stumble  to  his  desk. 

There  he  wrote  on  a sheet  of  pa- 
per and,  when  he  was  finished, 
slumped  across  the  desk  and  fell  in- 
to exhausted  sleep. 

Later,  he  woke  up  and  took  the 
sheet  of  paper  to  his  superior  who, 
looking  it  over,  nodded. 

“Four  hundred  eighty-six,  huh?” 
the  superior  said.  “You’re  sure  of 
that?” 

“I’m  sure,”  said  David,  quietly.  “I 
watched  every  one.”  He  didn’t  men- 
tion that  Coulter  and  his  family 
were  among  them. 

“All  right,”  said  his  superior, 
“Let’s  see  now.  Four  hundred  fifty- 
two  from  traffic  accidents,  eighteen 

from  drowning,  seven  from  sun- 

/ 

★ 


BINDERS  . . . 

The  Magazine  of  FANTASY 
and  SCIENCE  FICTION  has 

in  stock  a supply  of  strong, 
handsome  binders  for  your 
copies  of  F&SF.  Each  binder 
holds  one  complete  volume — 
six  issues.  The  price  is  $ 1 .50 
postpaid.  Send  your  order 
remittance  to:  Special  Binder 
Dept.,  F&SF,  527  Madison 
Ave.,  N.  Y.  22,  N.  Y. 


FANTASY  AND  SCIENCE  FICTION 

stroke,  three  from  fireworks,  six 
from  miscellaneous  causes.” 

Such  as  a litde  girl  being  burned 
to  death,  David  thought.  Such  as  a 
baby  boy  eating  ant  poison.  Such 
as  a woman  being  electrocuted;  a 
man  dying  of  snake  bite. 

“Well,”  his  superior  said,  “let’s 
make  it — oh,  four  hundred  and  fifty. 
It’s  always  impressive  when  more 
people  die  than  we  predict.” 

“Of  course,”  David  said. 

The  item  was  on  the  front  page  of 
all  the  newspapers  that  afternoon. 
While  David  was  riding  home  the 
man  in  front  of  him  turned  to  his 
neighbor  and  said,  “What  I’d  like 
to  know  is — how  can  they  tell?" 

David  got  up  and  went  back  on 
the  platform  at  the  end  of  the  car. 
Until  he  got  off,  he  stood  there  lis- 
tening to  the  train  wheels  and  think- 
ing about  Labor  Day. 


★ 


Wherever  you  go,  F&SF  will  follow  — 
if  you  send  ns  your  new  address  as 
early  as  possible  (5  or  6 weeks  are 
needed.)  Please  be  sure  to  give  us  your 
old  address  as  well  as  the  new  one. 

SUBSCRIPTION  SERVICE,  F&SF 
527  MADISON  AVE.,  N.Y.C.  22,  N.Y. 


^nc^S^o^ub’s  An^ng 
®*jvioon-Tooi[  Offer. . 


continued  from  Back  Cover 

NOW  you  can  get  an  authen- 
tic Round-Trip  Reservation 
to  the  Moon  Free  when  you  take 
the  Lunar  Quiz  on  other  side — 
Plus  any  3 of  the  masterpieces 
of  Science-Fiction  described  on 
this  page  for  only  $1.  Each  is 
packed  with  rocket-swift  ad- 


venture that  takes  you  soaring 
in  time  and  space . . . written  by 
the  greatest  science-fiction 
writers.  A $11.95  value,  full- 
length,  full-size,  in  handsome, 
permanent  bindings  — and  all 
yours  for  only  $1  on  this  amaz- 
ing offer ! 


“"‘'eetrouf 

Ftee 


Omnibus  «f 
SCIENCE 
fiction 


SCIENCE-FICTION 

BEST  SELLERS 

WORTH  UP  TO  $11.95  IN  PUBLISHERS'  EDITIONS 


TREASURY  OF  SCIENCE-FICTION 
CLASSICS.  4 famous  novels ; a complete 
play : scores  of  all-time  great  S-F 
stories,  including  H.  G.  Wells’  "Inva- 
sion from  Mars,"  made  famous  by  Orson 
Welles'  hoax  newscast.  (Pub.  ed.  $2.95) 

OMNIBUS  OF  SCIENCE-FIC- 
TION.  43  classic  stories  by  top  au- 
thors. Wonders  of  Earth  and  Man. 
Amazing  Inventions.  Space  travel 
and  visitors  from  outer  space.  Ad- 
ventures in  dimension.  Worlds  of 
Tomorrow.  (Pub.  ed.  $3.50) 

THE  ASTOUNDING  SCIENCE- 
FICTION  ANTHOLOGY.  A story 


about  the  first  A-Bomb  . . . written 
before  it  was  invented  1 Plus  a score 
of  other  best  tales  from  a dozen 
years  of  Astounding  Science  Fic- 
tion Magazine.  (Pub.  ed-  $3.50) 

REPORT  ON  UNIDENTIFIED 
FLYING  OBJECTS  by  Edward  J. 
Ruppelt.  The  first  authoritative 
report  on  hitherto  hushed-up  facts 
about  "flying  saucers”  ...  by  a for- 
mer Air  Force  expert  in  charge  of 
their  investigation.  NOT  fiction,  but 
amazing  FAC'T!  (Pub.  ed.  $4.95) 

DRAGON  IN  THE  SEA  by  Frank 
Herbert.  You're  on  a 21st-century 
undersea  mission  from  which  no 
human  has  ever  returned.  Now  8,- 
000  feet  down,  you  learn  that  an  un- 
known crewman  wants  you  DEAD ! 
(Pub.  ed.  $2.95) 

THE  BEST  FROM  FANTASY 
AND  SCIENCE-FICTION.  (New 

edition)  17  thrilling  stories  select- 
ed from  Fantasy  and  Science-Fic- 
tion Magazine.  Adventure  in  other 
worlds  . . . mystery,  intrigue,  sus- 
pense! (Pub.  ed.  $3.50) 


SEND  NO  MONEY- Jusf  Mail  Coupon 


Your  choice  of  ANY  3 of  the  new 
Science- Fiction  masterpieces  describ- 
ed here — At  Only  $1  for  All  Three — 
Plus  Free  Round-Trip  Reservation  to 
the  Moon.  (See  other  side.)  Two  books 
are  your  gift  for  joining,  and  one  is 
your  first  Club  selection.  Every  month, 
you  will  be  offered  the  “cream”  of  the 
new  $2.50  to  $3.95  Science-Fiction  books 
— for  only  $1.  You  take  only  those  books 
you  really  want — as  few  as  four  a year. 
This  offer  may  have  to  be  withdrawn.  So 
mail  coupon  Right  Now  to ; 

SCIENCE-FICTION  BOOK  CLUB 
Dept.  MFSF-7  Garden  City,  N.  Y. 


SCIENCE-FICTION  BOOK  CLUB 
Dept.  MFSF-7  Garden  City,  N.  Y. 

I have  completed  quiz  on  other  side.  Please  send  FREE  Moon- 
Tour  Reservation.  Also  rush  3 books  checked  below,  as  my  gift  books 
and  first  selection.  Bill  me  only  $1  (plus  shipping  charge),  and 
enroll  me  as  a member.  Every  month  send  the  Club’s  free  bulletin, 
so  that  I may  decide  whether  I wish  to  receive  the  coming  selection. 
For  each  book  I accept,  I will  pay  only  $1  plus  shipping.  I need  take 
only  4 books  during  each  year  I am  a member — and  I may  resign  at 
any  time  after  accepting  4 selections. 

GUARANTEE:  If  not  delighted,  I may  return  all  books  In  7 days, 
pay  nothing,  and  this  membership  will  be  cancelled, 


n Astounding  S-F  Anthology 

□ Best  from  Fantasy  and  S-F 

□ Dragon  in  the  Sea 


I Name— 


□ Omnibus  of  Science-Fiction 

□ Report  on  UFO's 

n Treasury  of  S-F  Classics 

- (PLEASE  PRINT) 


Address- 
City_ 


. Zon^~ 


. State— 


SAME  OFFER  TO  RESIDENTS  OF  CANADA;  Ad- 
dress  Science-Fiction  Book  Club,  Bond  St., 

Toronto  2.  Offer  good  in  U.S.A.  Canada  only. 


OF  THESE  COMPLETE  NEW  MASTERPIECES  OF 


‘VT'ES,  a passing  grade  on  this  Lunar  Quiz  "will 
bring  you — Absolutely  Free  — a genuine 
round-trip  Reservation  which  certifies  that  you 
are  among  the  Very  First  to  apply  for  passage 
to  the  Moon  ! Although  it  in  no  way  commits  you 
to  make  the  voyage,  it  signifies  that  your  name 
is  filed  in  Science-Fiction  Book  Club  archives  to 
be  turned  over  to  the  first  commercial  company 
making  trips  to  the  Moon. 

Your  reservation  includes  many  amazing 
facts : your  actual  weight  on  the  Moon,  a Rocket 
Ship  Schedule,  etc.  To  get  your  wallet-size  Moon 
Tour  Reservation  right  away,  take  the  Quiz 
below.  Then  choose  Any  3 of  the  exciting  books 
described  on  the  other  side — for  only  $1  with 
membership  in  the  Science-Fiction  Book  Club. 
Mail  coupon  at  once ! 


SCIENCE-FICTION 


CAN  PASS  THIS  LUNAR  QUIZ? 

How  much  do  you  know  about  the  Moon?  Circle  the  answers 
you  think  are  correct,  fill  out  reverse  side,  and  mail  today 
for  your  Genuine  Moon-Tour  Reservation  Certificate. 


?! 


WITH 


1.  Diameter  of  the  Moon  Is:  smaller  — greater  — the  same  as 
Karlh's. 


2.  Since  Its  gravity  Is  weaker  than  Earth's,  on  the  Moon  you 
would  weigh : more  — less  than  on  Earth. 


3.  The  Moon  is  really  a;  star  — satellite  — planet. 

4.  Distance  to  the  Moon  is  about:  93.000.000  miles  — 238,000 
miles  — 9.000  miles. 


5.  Scientists  have  proved  that  human  life  does  — does  not  exist 
on  the  Moon. 


4.  Surface  of  the  Moon  Is  rough  — smooth  — covered  with  water. 


IMPORTANT:  This  application  will  NOT  be  honored 
unless  filled  out  and  signed  on  the  reverse  side. 


SEE  OTHER  SIDE  OF  COUPON  FOR  UP  TO  $11.95  WORTH 
OF  SCIENCE-FICTION  BEST  SELLERS  FOR  ONLY  $1.00! 


This  authentic  certificate  is  a 
Bonafide  Reservation  for  one  of 
the  first  commercial  flights  to  the  Moon 


Take  This  Lunar  Quiz 

and  WIN  A ROUND-TRIP 
RESERVATION  TO  THE  MOON